Produced by MFR, Bryan Ness, Eleni Christofaki and the
Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
(This file was produced from images generously made
available by The Internet Archive/Million Book Project)
(Missing pages and high resolution illustrations and
decorative pieces were produced from images generously
made available by Monash University Library, Rare Books
Collection)









Transcriber's Note.

A list of the changes made can be found at the end of the book.

  Mark-up: _italic_
           =bold=




THE DAY AFTER DEATH




[Illustration]




  THE

  DAY AFTER DEATH

  OR

  Our Future Life according to Science

  TRANSLATED FROM THE FRENCH OF
  LOUIS FIGUIER

  _ILLUSTRATED BY TEN ASTRONOMICAL PLATES_


  A NEW EDITION


  London

  MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED
  NEW YORK: THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
  1904




  _Formerly published by Richard Bentley & Son.
  Reprinted 1904._




CONTENTS.


                                                                    PAGE

  INTRODUCTION                                                         1

  CHAPTER THE FIRST.

  MAN IS THE RESULT OF THE TRIPLE ALLIANCE OF THE BODY, THE SOUL, AND
  LIFE.--OF WHAT DOES DEATH CONSIST?                                   6

  CHAPTER THE SECOND.

  WHAT BECOMES, AFTER DEATH, OF THE BODY, THE SOUL, AND LIFE?          9

  CHAPTER THE THIRD.

  WHERE DOES THE SUPERHUMAN BEING RESIDE?                            16

  CHAPTER THE FOURTH.

  DO ALL MEN PASS AFTER DEATH TO THE STATE OF SUPERHUMAN
  BEINGS?--RE-INCARNATIONS OF PERVERSE SOULS.--RE-INCARNATION OF
  CHILDREN WHO HAVE DIED IN INFANCY                                   24

  CHAPTER THE FIFTH.

  WHAT ARE THE ATTRIBUTES OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING? PHYSICAL SHAPE,
  SENSES, DEGREE OF INTELLIGENCE.--FACULTIES OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING  30

  CHAPTER THE SIXTH.

  WHAT BECOMES OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING AFTER DEATH?--DEATHS,
  RESURRECTIONS, AND NEW INCARNATIONS IN THE ETHEREAL SPACES          55

  CHAPTER THE SEVENTH.

  PHYSICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SUN                    61

  CHAPTER THE EIGHTH.

  THE SUN.--DEFINITIVE SOJOURN OF SOULS ARRIVED AT THE HIGHEST DEGREE
  OF THE CELESTIAL HIERARCHY.--THE SUN IS THE FINAL AND COMMON SOJOURN
  OF THE SOULS WHICH COME FROM THE EARTH.--PHYSICAL CONSTITUTION OF THE
  SUN.--THIS HEAVENLY BODY IS A MASS OF BURNING GAS                   89

  CHAPTER THE NINTH.

  THE INHABITANTS OF THE SUN ARE PURELY SPIRITUAL BEINGS.--THE
  SOLAR RAYS ARE EMANATIONS FROM SPIRITUAL BEINGS THAT LIVE IN
  THE SUN.--THESE BEINGS THUS PRODUCE VEGETABLE AND ANIMAL LIFE
  ON EARTH.--THE CONTINUITY OF SOLAR RADIATION, INEXPLICABLE
  BY PHYSICISTS, EXPLAINED BY EMANATIONS FROM THE SOULS OF THE
  INHABITANTS OF THE SUN.--THE WORSHIP OF FIRE, AND THE ADORATION OF
  THE SUN IN DIFFERENT NATIONS, ANCIENT AND MODERN                   104

  CHAPTER THE TENTH.

  WHAT ARE OUR RELATIONS WITH SUPERHUMAN BEINGS?                     122

  CHAPTER THE ELEVENTH.

  WHAT IS THE ANIMAL?--THE SOULS OF ANIMALS.--MIGRATIONS OF SOULS
  THROUGH THE BODIES OF ANIMALS                                      138

  CHAPTER THE TWELFTH.

  WHAT IS THE PLANT?--THE PLANT CAN FEEL.--HOW DIFFICULT IT IS TO
  DISTINGUISH PLANTS FROM ANIMALS.--GENERAL CHAIN OF LIVING BEINGS   149

  CHAPTER THE THIRTEENTH.

  DOES MAN EXIST ELSEWHERE THAN ON THE EARTH?--DESCRIPTION OF THE
  PLANETS.--PLURALITY OF THE INHABITED WORLDS                        177

  CHAPTER THE FOURTEENTH.

  THAT WHICH TOOK PLACE ON EARTH FOR THE CREATION OF ORGANIZED BEINGS
  MUST HAVE EQUALLY TAKEN PLACE IN THE OTHER PLANETS.--SUCCESSIVE ORDER
  OF THE APPEARANCE OF LIVING BEINGS ON OUR GLOBE.--THE SAME SUCCESSION
  MUST HAVE TAKEN PLACE IN EACH PLANET.--THE PLANETARY MAN.--THE
  PLANETARY MAN, LIKE THE TERRESTRIAL MAN, IS TRANSFORMED, AFTER DEATH,
  INTO A SUPERHUMAN BEING, AND PASSES INTO THE ETHER                 195

  CHAPTER THE FIFTEENTH.

  PROOFS OF THE PLURALITY OF HUMAN EXISTENCES, AND OF
  RE-INCARNATIONS.--WITHOUT THE AID OF THIS DOCTRINE THE PRESENCE OF MAN
  UPON THE EARTH IS INEXPLICABLE, LIKEWISE THE UNEQUAL CONDITIONS OF
  HUMAN LIFE, AND THE FATE OF CHILDREN WHO DIE IN INFANCY            202

  CHAPTER THE SIXTEENTH.

  FACULTIES PECULIAR TO CERTAIN CHILDREN, APTITUDES AND VOCATIONS
  AMONG MEN, ARE ADDITIONAL PROOFS OF RE-INCARNATIONS.--EXPLANATION OF
  PHRENOLOGY.--DESCARTES' INNATE IDEAS, AND DUGALD STEWART'S PRINCIPLE
  OF CAUSALITY CAN ONLY BE EXPLAINED BY THE PLURALITY OF LIVES.--VAGUE
  REMEMBRANCES OF OUR FORMER EXISTENCES                              212

  CHAPTER THE SEVENTEENTH.

  SUMMARY OF THE SYSTEM OF PLURALITY OF EXISTENCES                   226

  CHAPTER THE EIGHTEENTH.

  ANSWERS TO SOME OBJECTIONS.--FIRST: THE IMMORTALITY OF THE SOUL, WHICH
  SERVES AS THE BASIS TO THIS SYSTEM, IS NOT DEMONSTRATED.--SECOND: WE
  HAVE NO REMEMBRANCE OF FORMER EXISTENCES.--THIRD: THIS SYSTEM IS ONLY
  THE METEMPSYCHOSIS OF THE ANCIENTS.--FOURTH: THIS SYSTEM IS CONFOUNDED
  WITH DARWINISM                                                     232

  CHAPTER THE NINETEENTH.

  SEQUEL TO OBJECTIONS.--DIFFICULTY OF UNDERSTANDING HOW THE RAYS OF
  THE SUN, MATERIAL SUBSTANCES, CAN BE THE GERMS OF SOULS, IMMATERIAL
  SUBSTANCES                                                         259

  CHAPTER THE TWENTIETH.

  PRACTICAL RULES RESULTING FROM THE FACTS AND PRINCIPLES DEVELOPED
  IN THIS WORK.--TO ELEVATE ONE'S SOUL BY THE PRACTICE OF VIRTUES,
  AND BY TRYING TO ACQUIRE A KNOWLEDGE OF NATURE AND ITS LAWS
  THROUGH SCIENCE.--TO RENDER PUBLIC WORSHIP TO THE DIVINITY.--WE
  SHOULD PRESERVE THE REMEMBRANCE OF THE DEAD.--WE SHOULD NOT FEAR
  DEATH.--DEATH IS BUT AN INSENSIBLE TRANSITION FROM ONE STATE TO
  ANOTHER; IT IS NOT AN END, BUT A METAMORPHOSIS.--IMPRESSIONS OF THE
  DYING.--THOSE WHO DIE YOUNG ARE LOVED BY THE GODS                  269

  EPILOGUE.

  IN WHICH WE SEEK GOD, AND IN OUR SEARCH DESCRIBE THE UNIVERSE      284




[Illustration]


THE DAY AFTER DEATH.

INTRODUCTION.


READER, you must die. You may perhaps die to-morrow. What will become
of you? What shall you be, on the day after your death? I do not now
allude to your body; that is of no more importance than the clothes
which it wears, or the shroud in which it will be buried. Like these
garments, like that cerecloth, your body must be decomposed, and its
elements distributed among Nature's great reservoirs of material,
earth, air, and water. But your soul, whither shall it go? That which
was free within you, that which thought, loved, and suffered, what
shall become of it? Of course you do not believe that your soul will
be extinguished with your life on the day of your decease, and that
nothing will remain of that which has palpitated in your breast,
vibrating to the emotions of joy and sorrow, to the tender affections,
the numberless passions and disturbances of your life.

Where shall that sensible, existing soul, which must survive the tomb,
go to? What will it become, what shall you be, my reader, the day after
your death?

To the consideration of this question this book is devoted.

Almost all thinkers have declared that the problem of the future life
defies solution. They have argued that the human mind is powerless to
foresee so profound a mystery, and that therefore the only rational
course is to abstain from the endeavour. This is the reasoning of
the majority of mankind, partly from carelessness, or partly from
conviction. Besides, when we venture to look at this tremendous
question closely, we find ourselves immediately surrounded with such
thick darkness that we lack courage to pursue the investigation. And
thus we are led to turn away from all thought of the future life.

There are, nevertheless, circumstances which force us to reflect on
this dark and difficult subject. When one finds oneself in danger
of death, or when one has lost a dearly beloved object, there is no
escape from meditation upon the future life. When we have dwelt long
and earnestly upon the idea, we may be brought to acknowledge that the
problem is not, as it has so long been believed, beyond the reach of
the human mind.

During the greater portion of his life, the author of this book
believed, in common with everybody else, that the problem of the
future life is out of our reach, and that true wisdom consists in not
troubling our minds about it. But, one dreadful day, a thunderbolt fell
in his path. He lost the son in whom centred all the hope and ambition
of his life. Then, in the bitterness of his grief he reflected deeply
on the new life which must open for each of us, above the tomb. After
long dwelling on this idea in solitary meditation, he asked of the
exact sciences what positive information, on this question, they could
furnish him with, and subsequently, he interrogated ignorant and simple
people, peasants in their villages, and unlettered men in towns, an
ever precious source of aid in re-ascending towards the true principles
of nature, for it is not perverted by the progress of education, or by
the routine of a commonplace philosophy.

Thus the author of this book succeeded in constructing for himself an
entire system of ideas concerning the new life of man, which is to
follow his terrestrial existence.

But his system is all contained in nature. Each organized being is
attached to another which precedes, and another which follows it,
in the chain of the living creation. The plant and the animal, the
animal and the man, are linked, soldered to one another; the moral
and physical order meet and mingle. It results from this, that any
one who believes himself to have discovered the explanation of any
one fact concerning this organization, is speedily led to extend this
explanation to all living beings, to reconstruct, link by link, the
great chain of nature. Thus it was with the author of this book. After
having sought out the destination of man, when dismissed from his
terrestrial life, he was led to apply his views to all other living
beings, to animals, and then to plants. The power of logic forced him
to study those beings, impossible to be seen by our organs of vision,
by which he holds the planets, the suns, and all the innumerable stars
dispersed over the vast extent of the heavens, to be inhabited. So
that you will find in this book, not only an attempt at the solution of
the problem of the future life by science, but also the statement of a
complete theory of nature, of a true philosophy of the universe.

It may be that I am deceiving myself; it may be that I am taking the
dreams of my imagination for serious views; I may lose myself in that
dark region through which I am trying to grope my way; but at least I
write with absolute sincerity, and that is my excuse for writing this
book at all. I hope that others may be induced by my example to attempt
similar efforts, to apply the exact sciences to the study of the great
question of the destinies of man after this life. A series of works
undertaken in this branch of learning, would be the greatest service
which could be rendered to natural philosophy, and also to the progress
of humanity.

After the terrible misfortunes of 1870 and 1871, there is not a family
in France which has not had to mourn a kinsman or a friend. I found,
not indeed consolation for my grief, but tranquillity for my mind,
in the composition of this work; and I have therefore hoped that, in
reading its pages, they who suffer and they who grieve might find some
of the same hope and assurance which have lifted up my stricken heart.

Society is in our day the prey of a deadly disease, of a moral canker,
which threatens it with destruction. This disease is materialism.
Materialism, which was preached first in Germany, in the universities,
and in books of philosophy, and the natural sciences, afterwards spread
rapidly in France. With brief delay, it came down from the level of
the _savans_ to that of the educated classes, and thence it penetrated
the ranks of the people; and the people have undertaken to teach us
the practical consequences of materialism. Little by little they have
flung off every bond, they have discarded all respect of persons
and principles; they no longer value religion or its ministers; the
social hierarchy, their country, or liberty. That this must lead to
some terrible result it was easy to foresee. After a long period of
political anarchy, a body of furious madmen carried death, terror, and
fire through the capital of France.

It was not patriotism which fired the illustrious and sacred monuments
of Paris, it was materialism. Nothing can be more evident than that,
from the moment one is convinced that everything comes to an end in
this world, that there is nothing to follow this life, we have nothing
better to do, one and all of us, than to appeal to violence, to excite
disturbance, and invoke anarchy everywhere, in order to find, amid such
propitious disorder, the means of satisfying our brutal desires, our
unruly ambition, and our sensual passions. Civilization, society, and
morals, are like a string of beads, whose fastening is the belief in
the immortality of the soul. Break the fastening, and the beads are
scattered.

Materialism is the scourge of our day, the origin of all the evils of
European society. Now, materialism is fiercely fought in this book,
which might be entitled, "Spiritualism Demonstrated by Science."
Because this is its aim, and its motive, my friends have induced me to
publish it.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE FIRST.

MAN THE RESULT OF THE TRIPLE ALLIANCE OF THE BODY, THE SOUL, AND THE
LIFE. WHAT CONSTITUTES DEATH.


BARTHEZ, Lordat, and the Medical School of Montpellier have created the
doctrine of the _human aggregate_, which, in our opinion, affords the
only explanation of the true nature of man. This doctrine of which we
shall avail ourselves, as a guide in the earlier portions of this work,
may be defined as follows:--

There exists in man three elements:--

1. The body, or the material substance.

2. The Life, or as Barthez calls it, the _Vital Force_.

3. The Soul, or as Lordat calls it, the _Intimate Sense_.

We must not confound the soul with the life, as the materialists
and certain shallow philosophers have done. The soul and the life
are essentially distinct. The life is perishable, while the soul is
immortal; the life is a temporary condition, destined to decline and
destruction; while the soul is impervious to every ill, and escapes
from death. Life, like heat and electricity, is a force engendered
by certain causes; after having had its commencement, it has its
termination, which is altogether final. The soul, on the contrary, has
no end.

Man may be defined as _a perfected soul dwelling in a living body_.

This definition permits us to specify what it is that constitutes death.

Death is the separation of the soul and the body. This separation is
effected when the body has ceased to be animated by the life.

Plants and animals cannot live except under certain conditions: plants
in the air or in the water, animals in the air, fish in the water; and
if they are deprived of these conditions, they perish immediately.
Again, there are existences which require special conditions for their
support within the general ones.

Certain polypoid-worms can live only in carbonic acid, or azotic gas;
the germs of cryptogams produced by damp can be developed only in
aqueous infusions of vegetable matters; the fish which live in the sea,
die in fresh, or only moderately salt, water.

Every living being has then its special _habitat_. The soul does not
form an exception to this rule. The place, the _habitat_ of the soul
is a living body. The soul disappears from the body when this body
ceases to live, just as a man forsakes a house when that house has been
destroyed by fire.

Such is the doctrine of the triple alliance of the body, the soul, and
the life, as formulated by the School of Montpellier, and such, as a
consequence of this doctrine, is the mechanism of death.

It must be added that this triple alliance of the body, the soul,
and the life, is not peculiar to man; it exists also in all animals.
The animal has also a living body, and soul; but the soul in animals
is much inferior to the soul in men, in the number and extent of its
faculties. Having few wants, the animal has a very small number of
faculties, which are all in a rudimentary condition. It is only in
the very considerable development of the faculties of the soul that
man differs from the superior animals, to which he bears a strong
resemblance in his physiological functions, and his anatomical
structure.

It must be remarked that the Montpellier School does not admit this
view of the condition of animals. In another part of this work,[1] a
fuller explanation of the distinctions which divide man from animal
will be found.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[1] Ch. XV.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE SECOND.

WHAT BECOMES OF THE BODY, THE SOUL, AND THE LIFE, AFTER DEATH.


AFTER death, the body, whether of a man, or of an animal, being no
longer preserved from destruction by vital force, falls under the
dominion of chemical forces. If the body of a dead animal, or a human
corpse be kept in a place where the temperature is below 0°, or if
it be shut up in a space entirely air-tight, or if it be impregnated
with antiseptic substances, it will remain intact, as at the moment
at which life has abandoned it. Such is the process of embalming.
The effect of the various chemical substances with which a corpse is
impregnated, is to coagulate the albumen of the tissues, and thus to
preserve the animal substance from putrefaction. A similar result will
be obtained if the corpse be placed between two layers of ice, or in
a coffin entirely surrounded with ice constantly renewed. If kept at
a temperature of 0°, the body will not be subject to decomposition,
because putrid fermentation cannot take place at so low a temperature.

This was the process by which the entire carcasses of the mammoths,
or extinct elephants, which belonged to the quaternity period, were
preserved. In 1802 a perfectly preserved carcass of this gigantic
pachyderm was found on the bank of the Lena, a river which runs into
the Arctic Sea, after traversing a portion of the Asiatic continent
in the vicinity of the North Pole. The frozen earth and the ice which
covers the banks of the river into which the mammoth had plunged, had
so effectually preserved it from putrefaction, that the flesh of the
huge creature, dead for more than a hundred thousand years, made a
feast for the fishermen of that desert place. In northern countries, if
one would preserve the body of a man, it could be effectually done by
simply keeping it constantly wrapped in ice.

When the body of a man, or of an animal, is exposed to the combined
influences of air, of water, and of a moderately high temperature, it
undergoes a series of chemical decompositions, whose final term is its
transformation into carbonic acid gas, and some compounds, gaseous or
solid, which represent the less advanced products of destruction. Gases
of various kinds, carbonic acid, hydrosulphuric, and ammoniac, and the
vapour of water, spread themselves through the atmosphere, or dissolve
into the humidity of the soil. At a later stage these compounds, thus
dissolved into the water which bathes the earth, are absorbed by the
little roots of the plants which live on it, and aid in their nutrition
and development. As for the gas, it begins by spreading through the
air; and then falling to the earth again dissolved in the rainwater,
it also equally supplies the needs of vegetable life. The ammoniac and
carbonic acid in the water which penetrates the soil, is absorbed by
the roots, introduced into the tubes of the plants, and supplies them
with nourishment.

Thus, the matter which forms the bodies of men and animals is not
destroyed; it only changes its form, and under its new conditions it
aids in the composition of fresh organic substances.

In all this the human body does but obey the common laws of nature.
That which it undergoes, every organized substance, vegetable or
animal, exposed to the combined influences of air, water, and
temperature, equally undergoes. A piece of cotton or woollen stuff, a
grain of wheat, a fruit--they all ferment, and reduce themselves to
new products, exactly as our bodies do. The cere cloth which enfolds a
corpse is destroyed by precisely the same process which destroys the
corpse.

But, if the material substance which forms man's body does but
transform itself, journeying through the globe, passing from animals
to plants and from plants to animals; it is quite otherwise with life.
Life is a force. Like the other forces, heat, light, and electricity,
it is born, and it transmits itself; it has a beginning and an end.
Like light, heat, and electricity--the physical agents which make us
comprehend life, and which have certainly the same essence and the same
origin--life has its producing causes, and its causes of destruction.
It cannot rekindle itself when it has been extinguished; it cannot
re-commence its course when its fatal term has arrived. Life cannot
perpetuate itself; it is a simple condition of bodies, a fugitive and
precarious condition, subject to countless influences, accidents, and
chances.

The life is therefore greatly inferior in importance to the soul, which
is indestructible and immortal. The soul is the essential element in
all nature. It has active and positive qualities in all respects where
the two other elements, the body and the life, have only negative
qualities. Whilst the body dissociates itself and disappears, while the
life becomes annihilated, the soul can neither disappear nor become
annihilated.

We have seen what becomes of a man's body after his death, and also of
his life; let us now examine into the condition of his soul.

No philosopher, no learned man, none of those who know the immensity of
the universe and the eternity of the ages, can admit that our existence
on the earth is a definite thing,--that human life has no link with
anything above or beyond itself. Man dies at thirty, or twenty years
old; he may live only a few months, or a few minutes. The average
length of life, according to Duvilard's tables, is twenty-eight years.
At present it is thirty-three. One fourth of mankind die before their
seventh year, and one half do not outlive their seventeenth. Those who
survive this time enjoy a privilege which is denied to the rest of the
human race.[2]

What is so short an interval, compared to the general duration of
time, to the age of the earth and of the worlds? It is one minute in
eternity. Our brief life is not, cannot be anything but an accident, a
rapid and passing phenomenon, which hardly counts for anything in the
history of nature.

On the other hand, the physical conditions of terrestrial life are
detestable. Man is a martyr, exposed to every sort of suffering: owing
partly to the defective organization of his body, incessantly menaced
with danger from external causes, dreading the extremes of heat and
cold; weak and ailing, coming into the world naked, and without any
natural defence against the influence of climate. If, in one portion
of Europe, and in America, the progress of civilization has secured
comfort for the rich, what are the sufferings of the poor in those
very same countries? Life is perpetual suffering to the greater number
of the men who inhabit the insalubrious regions of Asia, Africa, and
Oceania. And then, before there was any civilization at all, during the
period of Primitive Man, a period so immense that it stretches back
to a hundred thousand years before our epoch, what was the fate of
humanity? It was a perpetual succession of suffering, danger, and pain.

The conditions of human existence are as evil from the moral as from
the physical point of view. It is granted that here below happiness is
impossible. The Holy Scriptures, when they tell us that the earth is
a valley of tears, do but render an incontestable truth in a poetic
form. Yes, man has no destiny here but suffering. He suffers in his
affections, and in his unfulfilled desires, in the aspirations and
impulses of his soul, continually thrust back, baffled, beaten down
by insurmountable obstacles and resistance. Happiness is a forbidden
condition. The few agreeable sensations which we experience, now and
then, are expiated by the bitterest grief. We have affections, that we
may lose and mourn their dearest objects; we have fathers, mothers,
children, that we may see them die.

It is impossible that a state so abnormal can be a definitive
condition. Order, harmony, equilibrium reign throughout the physical
world, and it must be that the same are to be found again in the moral
world. If, on looking around us, we are forced to acknowledge that
suffering is the common and constant rule, that injustice and violence
dominate, that force triumphs, that victims tremble and die under the
iron hand of cruelty and oppression; then it must be that this is only
a temporary order of things. It cannot be otherwise than a moment of
transition, an intermediary period which Providence condemns us to pass
through rapidly, on our way to a better state.

But, what is this new condition, what is this second existence which is
to succeed to our terrestrial life? In other words, what becomes of the
human soul after death has broken the bonds which held it to the body?
This is what we have to investigate.

That being, superior to man in the scale of the living creatures
which people the universe, has no name in any language. The _angel_
acknowledged by the Christian religion, and honoured by an especial
_cultus_, is the only approach we have to a realization of the idea.
Thus Jean Reynaud calls the superior creature, who is, he believes, to
succeed to man after his death, an _angel_. But we will put aside the
word altogether, and call the perfected creature who, in our belief,
comes after man in the ascending series of nature, the _superhuman
being_.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[2] Rambosson. "The Laws of Life." _Paris_, 1871. P. 121.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE THIRD.

WHERE DOES THE SUPERHUMAN BEING DWELL?


WE have seen that of the three elements which compose the _human
aggregate_, one only, the soul, resists destruction. After the
dissolution of the body, after the extinction of the life, the soul,
detached from the material bonds which chained it to the earth, goes
away, to feel, to love, to conceive, to be free, in a new body, endowed
with more powerful faculties than those allotted to humanity. It goes
away to compose that which we call the superhuman being. But where does
this new creature dwell?

All students of nature know that life is spread over our globe in
prodigious proportions. We cannot take a step, our eyes cannot glance
around us, without everywhere encountering myriads of living beings.
The earth is nothing but a vast reservoir of life. Examine a blade
of grass in a field, and you will find it covered with insects, or
inferior animals. But your eyes will not suffice for this examination;
you must have recourse to the microscope. With the aid of the
magnifying glass, you will discover that this blade of grass is the
refuge of an active population, which are born, multiply, and die with
prodigious rapidity on their almost imperceptible domain.

From this blade of grass you may draw inferences and conclusions
respecting the vegetation of the entire globe.

The fresh waters which flow upon the surface of the earth are also
the receptacle of a prodigious quantity of organic existence. Without
mentioning the plants, and the animals which live in the waters of
the rivers and streams, and are visible to the naked eye, if you take
a drop of water from a pool, and place it under the microscope, you
will see that it is filled with living beings, who, though so small
that they escape our unassisted vision, are none the less active,
and all hold their appointed place in the economy of nature. We know
how thickly peopled with inhabitants is the great drop; but, without
speaking of beings visible to all, the fishes, the crustacea, and the
zoophytes, or of the marine plants, creatures, invisible except under
microscopical examination, abound to such an extent in sea water, that
one single drop of it, so examined, displays innumerable quantities of
these microscopic animals and plants.

From this drop of water you may draw inferences and conclusions
respecting the entire mass of waters which occupy the basins of the
seas, and form three-fourths of the surface of our globe.

In order that some conception may be reached of the enormous numbers
of the living beings contained in the seas now, and formerly, we may
fitly recall in this place a fact well known to geologists. It is, that
all building stone, all the calcareous earth of which chalk hills
and banks are formed, are entirely composed of the pulverized and
agglomerated remains of the shells of mollusca, visible or microscopic,
which, in the most remote ages of the existence of the globe, peopled
the basin of the seas. The whole of this formation is composed of the
accumulation of shells. If life has been lavished with such profusion
in the waters during the geological periods, it must be equally
lavished now, in almost similar ways, because the actual conditions of
nature do not differ from what they were in the primitive ages of the
globe.

The air which surrounds us is, like the earth and the seas, a vast
receptacle of living creatures. We see only a few animals cleaving the
aërial space, but the _savant_, who looks beyond the simple appearance
of things, discovers myriads of existences in the air.

The air seems to us very pure, very transparent, but only because it
is not sufficiently illumined by light to enable us to perceive the
particles, or foreign bodies, which are floating about in it. When
we allow one ray of daylight to penetrate into a closed room, one
thread of solar light, we can discern a luminous streak flung across
the chamber, while the remaining portion is still in darkness. We all
know that, thanks to the powerful light, and its contrast with the
surrounding obscurity, the luminous streak is seen to be filled with
light, slender floating bodies, rising, descending, fluttering with the
motion of the air. That which is perceptible in the atmosphere of a
brightly-lighted room is necessarily existent in the entire atmosphere
surrounding our globe, so that the air is everywhere filled with these
specks of dust.

Of what are these specks of dust formed? Almost entirely of living
creatures, of the germs of microscopic plants (cryptogamia), or of the
eggs of inferior animals (zoophytes). So-called spontaneous generation,
so largely discussed of late in France and other countries, is merely
due to these organic germs which fill the atmosphere, and which,
falling into the water, or into the infusions of plants, give birth to
forms of vegetation, which have been imputed to spontaneous generation;
that is to say, to a creation without a germ, a generation without a
cause, which is an error. Every living thing has parents, which are
always discoverable by science and attention.

Those animals and plants which are called parasites furnish another
example of the extraordinary profusion with which life is distributed
over the earth. Animals and plants which live on other animals or on
other plants, and which feed on the substance of their involuntary
entertainers, are called _parasites_. Each of the mammals has its
parasites, such as fleas, lice, &c., and man has the flea, the louse,
and the bug. So each vegetable has its parasite. The oak gives shelter
and food to lichens and various cryptogamia, and even on its roots we
find particular kinds of cryptogamia, such as the truffle. Thus we see
that life plants itself, grafts itself upon life.

But, more than this, these parasites in their turn have their smaller
parasites, so minute as only to be microscopically discerned. Take
a lichen off an oak and examine it with a magnifying glass, and also
examine a flea, or a nit, and you will behold the curious spectacle of
a parasite attached to another parasitical creature, and living upon
its substance. From the great vegetable the alimentary substance passes
to the visible parasite, and from that to the invisible. In this little
space life is superposed and concentrated. Such a fact proves with what
prodigious abundance life is spread over our globe.

Thus, then, we see that the surface of the globe, the fresh waters, and
the salt seas, and, finally, the atmosphere, are inhabited by immense
numbers of living beings. Life abounds on the earth, in the waters,
and in the air. Our globe is like an immense vase, in which life is
accumulated, pressed down, and running over.

But, the earth, the air, and the waters are not the only places at the
command of nature. Above the atmosphere there extends another region,
with which astronomers and physicists are acquainted, and which they
call _ether_ or _planetary ether_. The atmosphere which surrounds our
globe, and is drawn with it in its course through space, as it is
drawn with it in its rotation upon its own axis, is not very high. It
does not extend beyond thirty or forty leagues, and it diminishes in
substance in proportion to its elevation above the earth. At three
or four leagues in height the air is so rarefied that it becomes
impossible for men or animals to breathe it. In aërostatic ascents it
is impossible to go beyond seven or eight kilometres, because at that
height the air loses so much density, is so highly rarefied, that it
no longer serves for purposes of respiration, nor counterbalances the
effect of the interior pressure of the body on the exterior. After that
height, the density of the air decreases more and more, until there is
absolutely no air. At that point begins the fluid which astronomers and
physicists call _ether_.

This ether is a true fluid, a gas, analogous to the air we breathe,
but infinitely more rarefied and lighter than air. The existence of
the planetary ether cannot be disputed, since astronomers take account
of its resistance in calculating the speed of heavenly bodies, just
as they take account of the resistance of the air in calculating the
motions of bodies traversing our atmosphere.

Ether is, then, the fluid which succeeds to atmospheric air. It is
spread, not only around the earth, but around the other planets. More
than this, it exists throughout all space, it occupies the intervals
between the planets. It is, in fact, in ether that the planets, which,
with their satellites, compose our solar world, revolve. The comets,
too, in their immense journeys through space pass through ether.

The uneducated mind is disposed to believe that above the air which
surrounds the terrestrial globe, there is nothing more, that all is
void. But no void exists anywhere in nature. Space is always occupied
by something, whether it be by earth, by water, by atmospheric air, or,
finally, by _planetary ether_.

It has just been said that life abounds upon the globe, swarms upon
the earth, clusters in the air and in the waters. Is the ethereal
fluid which succeeds to our atmosphere, and which fills space, equally
inhabited by living beings? This is a question which no _savant_ has
ever yet asked himself. In our opinion, it would be very surprising
that life, which we may say overflows in the waters and in the air,
should be absolutely wanting in the fluid which is contiguous to the
air. Everything, then, indicates that the ether is inhabited. But who
are the beings who dwell in the planetary ether? We believe that they
are those _superhuman beings_, whom we consider to be resuscitated men,
endowed with every kind of moral perfection.

The chemical composition of planetary ether is not known. Astronomical
phenomena have taught us its existence, but not its components. We
believe it may safely be asserted that the ether does not contain
oxygen. In fact, oxygen is the fundamental element of atmospheric air;
and as, in proportion as they ascend into that air, the respiration
of men and animals becomes more and more difficult, it is, in our
opinion, presumable, that this difficulty is caused by the approach
of a description of gas impossible to breathe; and which, therefore,
excludes human life from the superior regions of the air. A man, rising
in a balloon towards the ether, is like a fish half drawn out of the
water, half exposed to the air. The fish is breathless and palpitating
in a place which is fatal to him; thus it is with man, when he rises by
degrees through our nether atmosphere, and draws near to the ether. It
seems to us that we may, at once, conclude, from this, that there is no
oxygen in planetary ether.

It seems not unlikely that the planetary ether may be composed of
hydrogen gas, excessively rarefied, that is to say, of an extremely
light gas, still further rarefied, and rendered infinitely more subtle
by the absence of all pressure. We are induced to conclude that
the ether in which the planets revolve is hydrogen, because, from
observations made of late years during the solar total eclipses, it has
been ascertained that the sun is surrounded by burning hydrogen gas.

In the language of every nation, the space which lies beyond our
atmosphere is called by the same name, that of _heaven_. It is, then,
in the universally recognized _heaven_ that we place our superhuman
beings. In this we are in accord with popular belief and prejudice,
and we recognize this argument with satisfaction. These prejudices,
these presentiments are frequently the outcome of the wisdom and the
observation of an infinite number of generations of men. A tradition
which has a uniform and universal existence, has all the weight of
scientific testimony.

In accordance with this phrase, and the immemorial tradition, the
most widely-spread modern religions, Christianity, Buddhism, and
Mahometanism, assign _heaven_ as the sojourn of the elect of God.

Thus, we find science, tradition, and religion at one on this point;
and that it was a scientific truth which found utterance by the lips
of the priest who said to the martyred king upon the scaffold: "Son of
Saint Louis, ascend to heaven."




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE FOURTH.

DO ALL MEN, WITHOUT DISTINCTION, PASS, AFTER DEATH, INTO THE
CONDITION OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING?--RE-INCARNATION OF IMPENITENT
SOULS.--RE-INCARNATION OF CHILDREN WHO HAVE DIED IN INFANCY.


DEATH is not a termination, it is a change. We do not die; we
experience a metamorphosis. The fall of the curtain of death is not the
catastrophe, it is only a deeply moving scene in the drama of human
destiny. The agony is not the prelude to annihilation, it is only the
obligatory suffering which, throughout all nature, accompanies every
change. Every one knows that the insect world, the cold and motionless
chrysalis, rends itself asunder that the brilliant butterfly may come
forth. If you examine the butterfly a moment after it has left its
temporary tomb, you will find it trembling and panting with the pain
of bursting through the trammels which had held it. It needs to rest,
to calm itself, and to collect its strength before it soars away into
the air which it is destined to traverse. This is a symbol of our death
agony. In order that we may cast aside the material covering which we
leave behind us here below, and rise to the unknown spheres which
await us beyond the tomb, we must suffer. We suffer, in the body,
from physical pain, and in the soul, from the anguish with which we
contemplate our approaching destiny, wrapped, as it is, in the most
appalling darkness.

But here a difficulty presents itself. Do all men, without distinction,
pass into the condition of the superhuman being? An infinite range
of qualities and of moral perversion is an attribute of humanity.
To it belong good and evil, the honest man and the criminal. Let us
inhabit whatsoever spot of earth we may, let the culture of our minds
be what it may, whether we be savages or civilized men, learned or
ignorant, whether we contemplate contemporary generations or those of
far distant times, there exists one universal morality, one law of
absolute equity. Everywhere, in all times, it has been a bad action
to kill one's neighbour, to take another's goods, to ill-treat one's
children, to be ungrateful to parents, to live on bad terms with one's
wife, to conspire against the liberty of others, to lie, and to commit
suicide. From one end of the earth to the other, these actions have
been esteemed evil.

There exists, therefore, in the sphere of nature, and in the absolute
meaning of the words, good souls and perverse souls. Must we believe
that both the good and the wicked are called, without distinction, to
undergo the change of nature which elevates us to the condition of
superhuman beings? Are both classes admitted, upon the same footing,
to the felicity of the new life, which is reserved for us beyond the
tomb? Our conscience, that exquisitely accurate sentiment which dwells
within us, and which never deceives, tells us that this could not be.

But how is the separation of the good grain from the tares to be
effected by natural forces only? How is the process of sorting, in
itself extremely difficult to explain, when one takes into account
the complication of the natural question by the mingling of moral
and physical influences, to be carried out? We can only state our
individual sentiment, not in the dogmatic sense of imposing it on any
one, but simply as a testimony to be registered.

It seems to us that the human soul, in order to rise to the ethereal
spaces, needs to have acquired that last degree of perfection which
sets it free from every besetting weight; that it must be subtle,
light, purified, beautiful, and that only under such conditions can it
quit the earth and soar towards the heavens. To our fancy, the human
soul is like a celestial aërostat, who flies towards the sublimest
heights with swift strength, because it is free from all impurity.
But the soul of a perverse, wicked, vile, gross, base, cowardly man
has not been purified, perfected, or lightened. It is weighed down by
evil passions and gross appetites, which he has not sought to repress,
but has, on the contrary, cultivated. It cannot rise to the celestial
heights, it is constrained to dwell upon our melancholy and miserable
earth.

We believe that the wicked and impenitent man is not called to the
immediate enjoyment of the blessed life of the ethereal regions. His
soul remains here below, to re-commence life a second time. Let us
remark, at once, that he re-commences this life without preserving any
recollection of his previous existence.

It will be objected to this, that to be born again without retaining
any remembrance of a past life, would be to fall into the nothingness
to which we are condemned by the materialists. In fact, it is identity
which constitutes the resurrection; and without memory there is no
identity. The individual, therefore, as an individual, would fall into
nothingness if he were born again without memory.

This remark is just. If, after our resurrection to the state of
superhuman beings, we were to lose, absolutely and irreparably, all
remembrance of our former life, we should be, indeed, the prey of
nothingness. But, let us hasten to add, that this loss of memory is
of but short duration. Oblivion of our past life is only a temporary
condition of our new existence, a sort of punishment. The remembrance
of his first terrestrial life will return to each individual, when,
by perfecting processes meet for the needs of his soul, he shall have
merited the attainment of the condition of a superhuman being. Then
he shall recall the evil actions of his first existence, or of his
numerous existences, if it has been his lot to have several probations,
and the thought of those evil deeds will still be his chastisement,
even in the blissful abode to which he shall at length have attained.

To such persons as refuse assent to these views, we would remark that
the question of rewards and punishments after death is the rock upon
which all religions and all philosophers have split. The explanation of
the punishment of the wicked which we offer, is at least preferable
to the hell of the Christian creed. A return to a second terrestrial
life is a less cruel, a more reasonable, and a more just punishment
than condemnation to eternal torment. In the one case the penalty is
in proportion to the sin. It is equitable and indulgent, like the
chastisement of a father. It is not eternal punishment for a sin of
short duration, it is a merciful form of justice, which places beside
the penalty the means of freedom from the sin. It does not shut out all
return to good by a condemnation without appeal to all eternity, it
leaves to man the possibility of retracing the road to happiness from
which his passions have led him astray, and of recovering, by deserving
them, the blessings which he has forfeited.

Thus, in our opinion, if the human soul, during its sojourn here below,
instead of perfecting, purifying, and ennobling itself, has lost its
strength, and its primitive qualities,--if, in other words, it has
been misused by a perverse, gross, uncultivated, mean, and wicked
individual,--then, in that case, it will not quit the earth. After the
death of that individual, the soul will tenant a new human body, losing
all recollection of its previous existence. In this second incarnation
the imperfect and earth-laden soul, deprived of all noble faculties and
bereft of memory, will have to re-commence its moral education. This
man, born again as an infant, will recommence his existence with the
same uncultivated and feeble soul which he possessed at the moment of
his death.

These _re-incarnations_ in a human body may be numerous. They must
repeat themselves until the faculties of the soul are sufficiently
developed, or until its instincts are sufficiently ameliorated and
perfected for the man to be raised above the general level of our
species. Then only the soul, purified and lightened of all its
imperfections, can quit the earth, and after the death of the flesh
soar into space, and pass into the new organism which succeeds that of
man in the hierarchy of nature.

We must add, here, that the fate of children who die young, either
while at the breast or only a few months old, before the soul has
undergone any development, is analogous. Their souls pass into the
bodies of other children, and re-commence a novel existence.

[Illustration]




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE FIFTH.

WHAT ARE THE ATTRIBUTES OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING?--THE PHYSICAL FORM,
SENSES, DEGREE OF INTELLIGENCE, AND FACULTIES OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING.


NOTWITHSTANDING the daring of such an attempt, let us now endeavour to
form some idea of the radiant creatures which float in the mysterious
and sublime regions of that empyrean which hides them from our view.
Let us try to discern the attributes, form, and qualities of the
superhuman being.

Like the human, the superhuman being possesses the three elements of
the aggregate, the body, the soul, and the life. In order to gain some
idea of him, we must examine each of these three elements separately.

_The Body of the Superhuman Being._--We might perhaps conceive a
superhuman being without a body; we might imagine that the soul, purely
spiritual, constitutes the blessed dweller in ethereal space. But it
is not thus that we do conceive him. Absolute immateriality appears to
us to apply only to a being much more elevated in the moral hierarchy
than the superhuman one--a being of whom we shall speak hereafter. We
believe that the inhabitant of the ethereal spaces has a body; that the
soul, leaving its terrestrial dwelling, incarnates itself in a body,
as it did here below. But this body must be provided with qualities
infinitely superior to those which belong to the human body. First,
let us inquire what the form of this body may be. The painters of the
Renaissance, whom modern artists follow in this respect, give to the
angel the form of a young and handsome man, furnished with white wings,
which bear him through the air on his celestial missions. This image is
both coarse and poetic. It is poetic because it responds to the idea
which we have of the radiant creature who dwells in ethereal space;
and it is coarse, because it gives to a being far superior to man the
physical attributes of man, which is inadmissible.

Painters who, like Raphael, represent the angel by the head of a child,
with wings, give a far more profound expression to the same thought. By
suppressing the larger portion of the body, and reducing the seraphic
being to the head, the seat of intelligence, they indicate that in
the angel of the Christian belief the spiritual dominates, in immense
proportion, over the material part.

We shall not be expected to delineate the form of the dwellers in the
realms of ether. We can only say, that, as ether is an excessively
subtle and rarefied fluid, it necessarily follows that the superhuman
being who is to float and fly in its light masses, must be wonderfully
light, must be composed of extraordinary subtle substances. A slight
material tissue, animated by life, a vaporous, diaphanous drapery of
living matter, such do we represent the superhuman being to our fancy.

How is this body supported? Does it need food for its maintenance, like
the bodies of men and of animals? We may reply with confidence that
food--that tyrannous obligation of the human and the animal species--is
spared to the inhabitants of the planetary ether. Their bodies must be
supported and refreshed by mere respiration of the fluid in which they
exist.

Let us consider the immense space occupied in the lives of animals by
their need of alimentation. Many animals, especially those which live
in the water, have an incessant need of food. They must eat always,
without intermission, or they die of inanition. Among superior animals,
the necessity for eating and drinking is less imperious, because the
respiratory function comes to their aid, bringing into the body, by the
absorption of oxygen and a small proportion of azote, a certain amount
of reparative element, as a supplement to alimentary substances. Man
profits largely by this advantage. Our respiration is a function of
the highest importance, and it bears a great share in the reparation
of all our organs. The oxygen which our blood borrows from the air
in breathing, contributes largely to our nutrition. The respiratory
function in birds is very active, and the organs which exercise it are
largely developed, and in their nutrition also oxygen counts largely,
and takes the place of a certain quantity of food.

It is our belief that the respiration of the ether in which he lives,
suffices for the support of the material body of the superhuman being,
and that the necessity for eating and drinking has no place in his
existence.

I do not know whether my reader forms an exact conception of the
consequences which would result from the theory, that the superhuman
beings whom we are contemplating are exempted from all need of
food. Those consequences will be most readily comprehended, if we
consider that it is the pressing obligation of procuring food which
renders the lives of animals so miserable. Forced incessantly to seek
their subsistence, animals are entirely given up to this grovelling
occupation; thence come their passions, their quarrels, and their
sufferings. It is much the same in the case of man, though in a less
degree. The necessity for providing for the aliment of every day,
the obligation of earning his daily bread--as the popular phrase has
it--is the great cause of the labours and the sufferings of the human
species. Supposing that man could live, develop himself, and sustain
his life without eating--that the mere respiration of air would supply
the waste of his organs--what a revolution would be effected in human
society. Hateful passions, wars, and rivalries would disappear from the
earth. The golden age, dreamed of by the poets, would be the certain
consequence of such an organic disposition.

This blessing of nature, refused to man, assuredly belongs to the
superhuman being. We may conclude also that the evil passions, which
are a sad attribute of our species, would be unknown in the home of
these privileged creatures. Released from the toil of seeking their
food, living and repairing their functions by the mere effect of
respiration--an involuntary and unconscious act (as the circulation of
the blood and absorption are unconscious acts in men and animals)--the
inhabitants of the ethereal spaces must be able to abandon themselves
exclusively to impressions of unmixed happiness and serenity.

The forces of our body become rapidly exhausted; we cannot exercise our
functions for a certain time without experiencing fatigue. In order to
transport ourselves from one place to another, to carry burthens, to go
up or down any height, to walk, we are obliged to expend these forces,
and lassitude immediately ensues. We cannot exercise the faculty of
thought for more than a certain time. At the end of a short period
attention fails, and thought is suspended. In short, our corporeal
machine, beautifully ordered, is subject to a thousand derangements,
which we call diseases.

From the sense of fatigue, from the continual menace of illness by
organic derangement, the dwellers in the ether are free. Rest is not
for them, as for us, a necessity ensuing on exercise. The body of
the superhuman being, inaccessible to fatigue, does not need repose.
Unembarrassed by the mechanism of a complicated machine, it subsists
and sustains itself by the unaided force of the life which animates it.
Its sole physiological function, probably, is the inhalation of ether,
a function which, it is easy to conceive, may be exercised without
the aid of numerous organs, if we see a whole class of animals--the
Batrachian--for whose respiration the bare and simple skin suffices.

If we admit, that the only function which the superhuman being has
to exercise is that of respiration, the extreme simplicity of his
body will be easily understood. The numerous and complicated organs
and apparatus which exist in the bodies of men and animals, have
for their object the exercise of the functions of nutrition and
reproduction. These functions being suppressed in the creature whom we
are considering, his body must be proportionably lightened. Everything
is reduced to respiration, and the preservation and maintenance of the
faculties of the soul; all is in harmony with those ends. We admire,
with good reason, the wise mechanism of the bodies of men and animals;
but, if human anatomy reveals prodigies in our structure, marvellous
provision in securing the preservation of the individual and his
reproduction, what infinitely greater marvels would, if we were but
permitted to study it, be revealed by the organization of the body of
the superhuman being, in which everything is calculated to secure the
maintenance and the perfection of the soul. With what astonishment
should we learn the use and the purpose of the different parts of that
glorious body, discover the relations of resemblance or of origin
between the living economy of the human, and the living economy of the
superhuman being, and divine the relations which might exist between
the organs of the superhuman being and those which he should assume in
another life, still superior, in which he should be the same being,
again resuscitated in new glory and fuller perfection!

The special organization of the being whom we are describing would
give him the power of transporting himself in a very short space of
time from one place to another, and of traversing great distances
with extraordinary rapidity. We are but simple human beings, and yet
by thought we devour space, and travel, in a twinkling, from one end
of the globe to another; may we not therefore believe that the bodies
of superhuman beings, in whom the spiritual principle is dominant,
are endowed with the privilege of passing from one point in space to
another, with a rapidity which the speed of electricity enables us to
measure?

The superhuman being, who does not require to eat or drink, or rest,
who is always active, and incessantly sensible, has no need of sleep.
Sleep is no more necessary for the reparation of his forces, than
food for their creation. We know that man is deprived of one third of
his existence, by the imperious necessity for sleep. A man who dies
at thirty years of age, has in reality lived for twenty only; he has
slept all the rest of the time! What a poor notion this conveys of the
condition of man! Whence arises this need of sleep? It arises from the
fact that our forces, impaired by their exercise, require inaction
and motionlessness for their repair--this is attained in the kind of
temporary death produced by the suspension of the greater portion of
the vital action, in sleep. During sleep, man prepares and stores up
the forces which he will require to expend during the ensuing period.
He devotes the night to this physical reparation, as much in obedience
to what he observes in all the other portions of creation, as in
obedience to the customs of civilization. But it is probable that all
the forces of the superhuman being are inexhaustible, and that they do
not require sleep, which is one of the hardest conditions of human
existence. Everything leads us to believe that perpetual wakefulness is
the permanent state of the superhuman being, and that the word "sleep"
would have no meaning for him.

Darkness must be equally unknown to all those beings who float in the
ethereal spaces. Our night and day are produced alternatively by the
rotation of the earth upon her axis, a rotation which hides the sun
from her view during one half of her revolution. This rotatory motion
draws our atmosphere with it, but its influence extends no further, the
ether which surmounts our atmosphere is not subject to it. That fluid
mass remains motionless, while the earth and its atmosphere turn upon
their axis. The superhuman beings, who, according to our ideas, inhabit
the planetary ether, are not drawn into this motion. They behold the
earth revolving beneath them, but, being placed outside its movements,
they never lose sight of the radiant sun-star.

Night, we repeat, is an accidental phenomenon, which belongs to the
planets only, because they have a hemisphere now illumined, and then
not illumined by the sun; but night is unknown to the remainder of the
universe. The superhuman beings, who people the regions far above the
planets, never lose sight of the sun, and their happy days pass in the
midst of an ocean of light.

Let us pass on to the consideration of the senses which these
superhuman beings probably possess, premising:

1. That the superhuman being must be endowed with the same senses
which we possess, but that those senses are infinitely more acute and
exquisite than ours.

2. That he must possess special senses, unknown to us.

What are the new senses enjoyed by the superhuman being? It would be
impossible to return a satisfactory reply to this question. We have no
knowledge of any other senses than those with which we ourselves are
endowed, and no amount of genius could enable any man to divine the
object of a sense denied to him by nature. Try to give a man born blind
an idea of the colour, red; and he will answer: "Yes, I understand!
It is piercing, like the sound of a trumpet!" Try to give a man born
deaf an idea of the sound of the harp, and he will answer: "Yes! It
is gentle and tender, like the green grass of the fields!" Let us
renounce, once for all, any attempt to define the senses with which
nature endows the beings who people the ethereal plains; these senses
belong to objects and ideas the mere notion of which is forbidden to us.

There is a well-known story of a man born blind, upon whom the famous
surgeon Childesen operated. Having recovered his sight, the patient
was a long time learning the use of his eyes; he was obliged to
educate those organs, step by step, and by slow degrees to form his
intelligence. Equally well known is Condillac's beautiful fiction,
in which he imagines a man born into the world without the senses
of sight, speech, and hearing, and who is, therefore, destitute of
ideas. By degrees, he is endowed with each of these senses, and the
philosopher thus composes, bit by bit, a soul which feels, and a mind
which thinks. This philosophical idea has been greatly admired. Like
the man-statue of Condillac, we are only, while here below, imperfect
statues, endowed with but a small number of senses. When, however,
we shall have reached the superior regions destined to our ennobled
condition, we shall be put in possession of new senses, such as our
reason dimly perceives, and our hearts long for.

We cannot, as we have previously said, divine what the new senses
which shall be granted to the superhuman being are to be, because they
belong to objects and ideas of which we are ignorant, and to forms
which are exclusively proper to worlds at present hidden from our eyes.
The kingdom of the planetary ether has its geography, its powers, its
passions, and its laws; and the new senses of men, resuscitated to that
glorious existence, will be exercised upon those objects.

The only thing which we can safely prognosticate is that all the senses
which we now possess will then exist in their full perfection--sight,
hearing, touch, taste, and smell. It is allowable to deduce this
process of future perfection by reasoning from the extraordinary
development of certain senses in the case of animals.

The sense of smell is developed in the hunting dog to a degree which
surpasses our imagination. How can we understand this quite ordinary
fact, that the dog perceives the scent which has emanated from a hare
or a partridge which has passed by the place at which he is smelling
many hours previously, and is now several leagues away! The perfection
of sight in the eagle and other birds of prey astonishes us equally.
These birds, floating at an immense height, see their prey upon the
earth, creatures much smaller than themselves, and descend upon them
without deviating from the perpendicular line of their flight. The
bat, accidentally deprived of sight, supplies this deficiency so
well by the sense of touch, by means of his membranous wings, that
he guides himself through the air, and finds his way to the interior
of human dwellings, as unerringly as if he had the full use of his
eyesight. To such a degree of exquisite sensibility has the sense of
hearing attained among native Indian tribes, that a man, laying his ear
against the earth, will detect the tread of an enemy at the distance
of a league. Among musicians, also, how must the sense of hearing be
cultivated by a man, who, partly by a natural gift, and partly by
practice, comes to be able to detect the most minute difference in
the tone of one instrument among fifty different kinds, all played at
once, in an orchestra. Supposing that the senses of the superhuman
being should have acquired the degree of extraordinary activity which
is common to animals, and, in certain cases, to man, we can form some
estimate of the power and extent of such a sensorial system.

We can also arrive at some idea of the perfection of the senses
attained by resuscitated man, by considering the accession of power
which our own senses may receive by the assistance of science and art.
Before the invention of the microscope, no one ever imagined that the
eye could penetrate the mysteries of that world in miniature well named
the _Infinitely Little_, until then absolutely unknown; no one had
ever divined, for instance, that in one drop of water might be seen
myriads of living beings. These beings have existed throughout all
time, but man has been able to contemplate them for only two centuries.
Our visual power over microscopic beings was until then unknown. The
least enlightened, the most careless student of this day, regards with
indifference things which Aristotle, Hippocrates, Pliny, Galienus,
Albertus Magnus, and Roger Bacon could not have contemplated, or even
suspected to exist. The discovery of the telescope, in the days of
Kepler and Galileo, hurled back the boundaries of the human intellect
and threw open to its investigation a domain hitherto sealed from its
sight. There, where Hipparchus and Ptolemy had seen nothing, Galileo,
Huyghens, Kepler, made, in a few nights, by the aid of the telescope,
discoveries of hitherto unsuspected celestial splendour. The satellites
of Jupiter and Saturn, a multitude of new stars, the phases of Venus,
and, at a later period, the discovery of new planets only to be seen by
the telescope, the observation of spots on the sun, and the revolution
of the nebulæ into collections of stars, were the almost immediate
consequences of the invention of the telescope. Thus we learned that,
by the aid of art, the human eye can penetrate the most distant regions
of heaven.

Let us now suppose all the powers of the telescope and all those of the
microscope concentrated in the sense of vision; that is to say, that in
addition to all objects placed at ordinary distances, it can discern
all microscopic objects, and at the same time all the celestial bodies
invisible to the naked eye, and you will have an idea of what the
sense of sight is, in the superhuman being.

There is no occasion to dwell upon the extraordinary proportions which
our accumulated knowledge would assume, if our sight could enjoy those
extraordinary powers of extension, if it could perform simultaneously
the functions of the telescope and the microscope. Science would
march forward with the tread of a giant. What enormous progress would
be made by chemistry if our eyes could penetrate into the interior
of all bodies, beholding their molecules, estimating their relative
volume, their arrangement, and the form and colour of their atoms. A
glance would reveal to us secrets of chemical solutions such as the
genius of a Lavoisier could not penetrate. Physics would contain no
further mysteries for us, for we should know, by simply using our eyes,
everything which we are now painfully striving to divine by reason, and
by the aid of difficult and uncertain experiments. We should _see_ why
and how bodies are warmed and acquire electricity. We should have the
explanation of the mathematical laws in obedience to which the physical
forces, light, heat, and magnetism are exercised. Our eyes would
suffice for the solution of those physical and mechanical problems
before which the genius of such men as Newton, Malus, Ampère, and
Gay-Lussac stands still.

We do not doubt that the superhuman being is endowed with sight thus
marvellously perfect.

We might carry this argument out in detail, applying it to all the
other senses, but enough has been said to illustrate the exaltation
and perfecting of those senses which man possesses only in their
rudiments, in the favoured dwellers in a superior sphere. We will only
add, that the result of such a degree of perfection of the senses is,
that the superhuman being can move with a rapidity, of which light
and electricity only can give us some notion, that is to say, that
these perfected senses can be used at great distances, and with great
promptitude. If the entire body of the superhuman being can transport
itself with wonderful rapidity from one place to another, as we have
already admitted, his senses can also act from, and at great distances.
We do not think we can err in comparing the actions of the dwellers in
the invisible world which we presume to investigate, with the phenomena
of light and electricity.

Does sex exist in the superhuman being? Assuredly not. The Christian
religion defines its absence in the angel. The angel of the Christian
creeds has the features of either man or woman, the mild face of
a youth, or the pathetic beauty of a girl. Sex is suppressed, the
individual is androgynous. Thus, too, it must be in the case of the
superhuman being. The reciprocal affection which reigns among the
blessed dwellers in the ether does not require diversity of sex.

The affections undergo a purifying process, according as they are
elevated, from those of the animals to those of man. The animals have
but little of the sentiment of friendship. Love, with its material
impulses, is almost all they know. The sentiments of affection
possessed by animals, apart from their carnal instincts, reduce
themselves to those of maternity, which are strong and sincere, but
of short duration. Their young are the objects of attentive care and
caresses while their helplessness demands such aid, but as soon as they
can live on their own resources they are abandoned by the mothers, who
no longer even recognize them. There is no constant, lasting affection
in animals, except the sentiment of love, which is caused by their
sexual necessities. The sentiments of affection entertained by man are
numerous, and frequently noble and pure. We love our mothers and our
sons as long as our hearts beat in our breasts. We love our brothers,
our sisters, and our relations with a sentiment in which there is
nothing carnal, and which is deeply rooted in the soul. If love is
often inseparably attached to physical desires, it can, nevertheless,
shake itself free from them, and a disinterested friendship frequently
survives the extinction of sensual feeling. In this respect we are
far superior to the animals. Let us go a step further, even to the
supernatural being, the next link in the chain to ourselves, and we
shall find the sentiment of affection entirely detached from the
consideration of sex. In that sublime and blessed realm which they
inhabit, superhuman beings are all of the same organic type. They need
not, in order to love one another, to belong to two opposite sexes, or
different groups of organization: their tenderness is the result of the
serenity of the infinite purity of souls, of the sympathy evoked by
common perfections.

On the other hand, the ethereal region which awaits us is the scene of
the reunion of those who have loved one another in this world. There
the father will find the son, and the mother will rejoin the daughter,
torn from each by death, there husbands and wives will meet, and the
separation of friends come to an end. But, under their new form, in the
perfected body wherein their regenerated souls shall dwell, there is
no more sex, and love is for all an ideal, noble, and exquisitely pure
sentiment.

How blind and self-interested is love here below! How narrow and
egotistical a sentiment is friendship. It cannot enlarge itself without
pain and difficulty, to embrace the totality of the human kind. Why
is it so hard for it to lift itself up to the sublime Creator of the
worlds? Why do we not love God as we love our neighbours? In the
upper world it will be far otherwise. Our faculty of loving, limited
here by fleshly bonds, will be set free there, from every sensual
restraint. Man, resuscitated to glory, will love his wife as he loves
his children, his friends, and his brethren. His affections will never
more be degraded by his senses. The happiness which this purified
sentiment, constantly received from ever living sources, will afford
him, will suffice to fill and satisfy his soul. His power of loving
will be extended to all nature, it will be spread abroad over the most
elevated spheres; his soul will be exalted by the sublime sensations of
this universal love, this wide sympathy with the whole creation. True
charity, comprehending the entire universe, will burn in all hearts.
The love of God will rule over all these multiplied affections, from
the height of His infinite power, and the fervour of our sentiments
of love for our kind will be crowned by our sublime adoration of the
Creator of all.

But, it will be said, if superhuman beings are of no sex, how
are they to be reproduced, how is the species to be kept up, and
multiplied? There will be no need of reproduction, the species of the
superhuman being will not require to be maintained, or multiplied.
The reproduction, the preservation of his species is the business of
the inhabitants of the inferior worlds, of the earth and the planets.
Such is their lot, such the task imposed upon them by nature. But
reproduction is unknown and unnecessary to the fortunate beings who
dwell in the planetary ether. From the earth and the other planets
fresh and ever fresh phalanxes are despatched to them. The battalions
of the elect are recruited by arrivals from the lower worlds. Below
is the multiplication of individuals; above is the sojourn of blessed
beings, who have no need of maintaining their species, because the laws
of their destiny differ from those which rule the lot of terrestrial
man. Reproduction is the task of inferior worlds, permanence is the
inheritance of the world above.


_The Soul of the Superhuman Being._ In an excellent volume of popular
science, the _Universe_, by Dr. Pouchet, director of the Museum
of Natural History at Rouen, we find a striking definition. Dr.
Pouchet informs us that a German naturalist, Bremser, lays down, as a
principle, that, in man, matter and spirit exist in almost equal parts;
that is, to say, that man is half spirit and half matter. Bremser, in
advancing this proposition, takes his stand upon the fact that, in man,
it is sometimes spirit which governs and subdues matter, and sometimes
matter which dictates laws to spirit, with equal power and success on
the side of each.[3]

Admitting, with the German philosopher, that this relation is true, we
would say, that, while in man the proportion of the soul is fifty in
one hundred, this proportion, in the superhuman being, is undoubtedly
from eighty to eighty-five in one hundred. Of course we only employ
this valuation to make our idea comprehensible, and give these figures
only to prove that facts in the intellectual order may be submitted to
weight, measure, and comparison, all which the world supposes to be
impossible.

The soul has a preponderating share in the superhuman being. That is
what we need to know, and to remember. Let us now endeavour to analyze
the soul of the superhuman being, as we have analyzed his senses.

If the senses of the superhuman being are numerous and exquisitely
acute, the faculties of his soul, which are intimately allied to the
exercise of the senses, and depend on their perfection, must also be
singularly active and powerful. We know that in men the faculties of
the soul are feeble and limited. We have so short a time to pass upon
the earth, that very powerful faculties would be of no use to us; they
would not have time to be developed, or efficaciously employed. But
everything is magnified and elevated in the superior world which awaits
us; consequently the faculties of the thinking creature who inhabits
the realms on high must be numerous and of vast extent.

We must repeat, concerning the faculties of the soul of the superhuman
being, what we have just said concerning his senses. The superhuman
being must be provided with new faculties, and also those faculties
which he has brought with him from the earth must be singularly
perfected. To determine the nature and the object of the new faculties
bestowed upon the superhuman being would be impossible, because
those faculties belong to the superior world which is unknown to us;
they respond to moral wants of which we have no conception. Let us,
therefore, renounce all idea of discovering the nature of those
new faculties, and content ourselves with examining the degree of
perfection which may be attained by those faculties of the soul which
actually belong to man.

Attention, thought, reason, will, and judgment, all which render us
what we are, must acquire special force and sureness in the superhuman
being. La Bruyère has said that there is nothing more rare in this
world than the _spirit of discernment_; which means that judgment and
good sense are excessively rare. When we have lived for a while among
men, we recognize how thoroughly well founded the saying is. We may
safely assert, without being over-misanthropical, that among a hundred
men there will be not more than one or two possessed of sound judgment.
In the majority of instances, ignorance, prejudices, and passion
contend with judgment, so that, as La Bruyère says, good sense is much
more rare than pearls and diamonds. This great and precious faculty of
judgment, in which the majority of human beings are deficient, cannot
be wanting in the inhabitants of the other world; there it must be the
universal rule, here it is the exception.

The most precious of all faculties, enabling us to form large and lofty
ideas and comparisons, whose outcome is knowledge, is memory. But how
imperfect, changeable, weak, and, one may say, sickly, is our memory!
It is absolutely mute respecting the whole period which preceded our
birth, and during which, nevertheless, we existed. It is also as silent
respecting all that concerns the early portion of our life. We retain
no recollection of the care which was lavished upon our childhood. A
child who loses its mother in infancy has never known a mother; for
it, the mother has never existed. If those who saw us in the cradle
did not recount our actions during that period, we should be entirely
ignorant of them. We have to witness the successive stages of infancy,
the sucking child, the long clothes, the staggering steps, the little
go-cart, in order to realize that we too have been like that infant,
have gone through those stages of being. Memory, which is not developed
at all in man until he is a year old, and which becomes extinct in old
men, is subject, even when it is at its highest point of activity, to
innumerable weaknesses, caused by illness or the want of exercise, so
that in fact our hold of this faculty is always precarious. We cannot
doubt that in the other life it will have the power, the certainty, and
scope which it lacks here below.

At the same time, our memory will be enriched by a number of new
subjects. The soul, beholding and understanding the worlds which
surround it, will be able to fix the geography of all those different
places in its memory. It will know the physical revolutions, the
populations, and the legislation of these thousand countries. The
superhuman being will know what exists in such planets and their
satellites as come within his reach, or as he shall visit. Just as,
in order to gain information, we visit America or Australia, so the
superhuman being visits Mars or Venus, and furnishes his memory with
millions of facts, which it retains and reproduces at will. What
immense power must memory, always supplied and always ready at call,
bestow on the mind and reason!

Languages are only the expression and the assembling of ideas.
Condorcet has said that a science always reduces itself to a
well-constructed language. The mathematical sciences employ a language
which is perfect, because the science of mathematics is perfect. The
language spoken in the planetary spaces must be perfect, because it
expresses all the knowledge of superhuman beings, and this knowledge
is immense. The more the mind knows, the better it expresses:--the
superhuman being, who is highly informed, will have a very expressive
language, which will also be universal.

The language of mathematics is understood by the peoples of both
hemispheres. Algebra can be read by a Frenchman or a German, as well
as by an Australian or a Chinese, on account of the simplicity and
perfection of the conventional signs which it uses. The language of
mathematics, which is truly universal, makes us infer that the language
spoken in the planetary space must be also universal, and common,
without distinction, to all the inhabitants of the ethereal worlds.

Owing to the immense scope of their faculties, and to the perfection of
their language, in itself a certain means of increasing and exalting
their knowledge, superhuman beings have a power of reasoning, and a
clearness of judgment, which, added to the immense number of facts
stored in their memory, place them in possession of absolute science.
Arduous questions, before which the mind of man humbly confesses its
powerlessness, or which drive him mad if he persists in the effort to
solve them, such as the thought of the Infinite, the idea of the First
Cause of the Universe, the Essence of Divinity, all these problems,
forbidden to us, are easily accessible to these mighty thinkers. He who
is regarded by mankind as a genius of the first order, an Aristotle,
a Keppler, a Newton, a Raphael, a Shakespeare, a Molière, a Mozart, a
Lavoisier, a Laplace, a Cuvier, a Victor Hugo, would be among them a
babbling child. No science, no moral idea is above their conception.
Beneath their feet rolls the earth, with the splendid train of the
planets, its sisters; they behold the planets of our solar system
gravitating in harmonious order round the great central star, which
deluges them with its light. From the height of their sublime abode
they witness the infinitely various spectacles furnished by the
elemental strife of our poor globe, and those which resemble it; and,
happier than terrestrial humanity, they admire the works of God, while
knowing the secret of their mechanism. In the moral order they have
penetrated the great _Wherefore_! They know why man exists, and why
they themselves exist. They know whence they come, and whither they
are going; and we, alas! know neither. Where, to our eyes, there is
only confusion, they perceive harmony and order. The designs of God
are distinctly apparent to them, and also the events of the lives of
nations and individuals, which often seem to us cruel, unjust, and bad
on the part of God; but they understand that these events are just and
useful, and worthy of our heartfelt gratitude.

We also think, that in the ethereal spaces time is an element which
does not count. We believe this, because time does not exist for God,
and all superhuman beings approach, by their perfections, the entirely
spiritual nature, and consequently approach God. We are confirmed in
this belief by the fact, that very profound grief resists time, that
there is no limit in duration to the great blows struck at the human
soul, that the loss of a beloved being is felt as keenly after a long
interval as when he was taken away.

Thus, time, which is everything to man, which is not only, according
to the English adage, "money," but is also the instrument of our
wisdom, our studies, and our attainments--far otherwise precious
than money--time does not count in the life of the superhuman being.
He awaits, without impatience and without suffering, the arrival of
the beings whom he has loved and left upon the earth at his peaceful
abode; and when their re-union takes place, he and they enjoy happiness
which no inquietude concerning the future can ever trouble. Enabled to
despise, to put aside the idea of time, the superhuman being looks on
with unutterable serenity, tranquillity, and majesty, at the majestic
spectacle, always new and always marvellous, of the revolutions of the
stars, and the great movements of the universe.

_The Life of the Superhuman Being._--In completion of our speculation
upon the attributes of the superhuman being, we shall consider the life
which animates him and gives his body its active qualities.

We have said that, in our belief, the superhuman being proceeds from
the soul of a man which has domiciled itself afresh, in a new body, in
the bosom of the world of ether. Is this body destined, at the end of
a more or less prolonged period to perish, to be dissolved, to restore
its elements to matter, as they are restored by the human body? Shall
life be withdrawn from the body of the superhuman being, and shall the
soul take flight thence?

We believe that it will be so. Life everywhere implies death, and is
its necessary term. We do not cast anchor in the current of the waters
of life. If the soul of the superhuman being resides in a living body,
this body must die, and its material elements must return to the common
reservoir of nature. The torch of life is extinguished in the spaces,
as it is extinguished upon earth.

We believe the superhuman being to be mortal. After an interval, whose
duration we shall not attempt to fix, he dies; and the soul which dwelt
within him escapes, like a sweet perfume from a broken vase. What
becomes of the soul which has torn itself away from the body, cold in
death? We shall seek after the answer to this question in our next
chapter.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[3] "We must consider," says Bremser, "that man is not a spirit, but
only a spirit limited, in different ways, by matter. In a word, man
is not a god, but, notwithstanding the captivity of his spirit in his
corporality, it retains sufficient freedom to enable him to perceive
that he is governed by a spirit more exalted than his own, that is to
say, by a God.

"It is to be presumed, in the supposition that there will be a new
creation, that beings far more perfect than those produced by preceding
creations will see the light. In the composition of man, spirit holds
to matter the proportion of fifty to fifty, with slight occasional
differences, because it is now matter, and again spirit which
predominates. In a subsequent creation, should that which has formed
man not prove to be the last, there will apparently be organizations
in which spirit will act more freely, and be in the proportion of
seventy-five to twenty-five.

"It results from this consideration that man, as such, was formed
at the most passive epoch of the existence of our earth. Man is a
wretched intermediary between animal and angel, he aspires to elevated
knowledge, and he cannot attain to it; though our modern philosophers
sometimes think so, it is really impossible. Man wishes to make out the
primary cause of all that exists, but he cannot get at it. With less
intellectual faculty, he would not have had the presumption even to
desire to know these causes; and, if he were more richly endowed, they
would have been clear to him."--_L'Univers_, pp. 760-761.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE SIXTH.

WHAT BECOMES OF THE SUPERHUMAN BEING AFTER DEATH?--DEATHS,
RESURRECTIONS, AND NEW INCARNATIONS IN THE ETHEREAL SPACES.


IN the living nature which surrounds us, there is a continually
ascending scale of gradual perfection, from the plant to man. Taking
mosses and algæ, which represent the rudimentary condition of vegetable
organization, as our point of departure, we pass on through the whole
series of the perfecting processes of the vegetable kingdom, and we
reach the inferior animals, zoophytes and mollusca. From thence we
ascend to the superior animals by insensible degrees, and thus fully
attain to man. Each step of this ladder is almost imperceptible, so
finely arranged are the transitions and the shades; so that there is
a really infinite chain of intermediate beings, at one end of which
are the algæ, and at the other ourselves. And yet we think it possible
that between us and God there should be no kind of intermediate being!
that in this scale of continual progress, there should be an immense
void between man and the Creator! We think it possible that all nature,
from the lowest vegetable to mankind, should be arranged in successive
and innumerable degrees, and that between man and God there should
exist only a desert, an immeasurable hiatus. Evidently, this is
impossible, and that such an error should ever have been countenanced
by religion and philosophy is only to be explained by ignorance of
natural phenomena. It is impossible to doubt that between man and God,
as between the plant and the animal, the animal and man, there exist a
great number of intermediate creations, which establish the transition
of humanity into the divinity which governs it, in infinite power and
majesty.

That these intermediate beings exist, we are certain. They are
invisible to us, but, if we refused to admit the existence of
everything which we cannot see, we should be very easily refuted. Let
a naturalist take a drop of water from a pond, and, shewing it to
an ignorant person, tell him, "this drop of water, in which you do
not see anything, is filled with little animals, and with miniature
plants, which live, are born and die, like the animals and plants,
which inhabit our farms." The ignorant person would probably shrug up
his shoulders, and consider the speaker crazy. But if he were induced
to apply his eye to the magnifier of a microscope, in order to examine
the contents of the drop of water, he must acknowledge that the truth
had been told him; because, in this drop of water, in which he could
at first see nothing, his eye, when assisted by science, would discern
whole worlds.

A great number of living beings can therefore exist where we see
nothing, and it is feasible to science to open the eyes of the
multitude in this respect.

We desire to assume the position of the naturalist of whom we have
spoken. Between man and God, the ignorant crowd and a blind philosophy
perceive nothing; but, when we replace the eyes of the body by those of
the spirit, that is to say, when we make use of reason, analogy, and
education, these mysterious beings come to light.

We have already, in studying the superhuman being, described one
of those intermediate creations between man and the divinity, and
defined the existence of one of those landmarks placed by nature on
the high-road of infinite space. But the ladder does not break off at
its first step, and we are convinced that numerous living hierarchies
intervene between the superhuman being and the radiant throne of the
Almighty. We have said elsewhere, that, in our belief, superhuman
beings are mortal. What becomes of them after their death? Let us now
take up the thread of our deductions.

We believe that--the superhuman being having died at the end of a term
whose duration we have no means of knowing--his soul, perfected by
the exercise of the new faculties which it has received, and the new
senses with which it has been endowed, enters into a new body, provided
with senses still more numerous and more exquisite, and endowed with
faculties of still greater power, and thus commences a fresh existence.

We call the being who succeeds to man _angel_, or superhuman; we
may call his succession in the ethereal realm, _arch-angel_, or
_arch-human_.

The actual moment of the passage from one life to another, must be,
as it is in the case of man, a time of moral and physical pain. The
supreme periods at which a metamorphosis takes place in a sensible
being are crises full of anguish and torment.

We will not endeavour to penetrate the secrets of the organization
of the new being whose existence we thus trace, and who is superior
to the superhuman being in the natural hierarchy; because our means
of investigation fail us at this point. We have ventured to form
some conjecture respecting the body, the soul, and the life of the
superhuman being, because in that case, however adventurous our
excursion into unknown spheres, we had a point of comparison and
induction in the human species. But all induction respecting the
arch-human being who succeeds the superhuman, is wanting, for we could
only perceive the latter by means of conjectures and analogies which we
must not carry farther.

We will, therefore, abstain from pursuing this kind of investigation,
permitting the reader to exercise his own imagination upon the form
of the body, the number and perfection of the senses, and the extent
of the faculties of the happy creature who succeeds to the superhuman
being, and who dwells, like him, in the immensity of ethereal space.
We will only add that we do not think a second, a third, or a fourth
incarnation arrests the succession of the chain of sublime creations,
which float in the infinitude of the heavens, and which proceed from
a primitive human soul, which has grown in perfection and in moral
power. It surpasses our faculty to define, by the unassisted light of
our reason and our knowledge, the number of these beings who go on
succeeding one another in ever-increasing perfection. We can only say
that we believe the creatures, which compose this ladder of perfections
in succession, must be very numerous.

At every stage of his promotion in the hierarchy of nature the
celestial being beholds the growth of those wings which symbolize his
marvellous power to us. Each time his organs become more numerous, more
flexible, have greater scope. He acquires new and exquisite senses.
He acquires more and more power of extending his beneficent empire,
of exercising his faculty of loving his fellows and all nature, and,
above all, of comprehending and reading the designs of God. Deeper and
deeper affections engage his soul, for the tenderness and the happiness
engendered in its pure satisfaction, are granted to him to console him
for the sufferings of death, to which he is always condemned. It is
thus that the happiness of the elect is augmented. It is thus that the
beings who inhabit the boundless plains of the invisible world employ
each of their lives in preparing for the life which is to follow, in
securing by a wise exercise of their freedom, industrious culture
of their faculties, strict observance of morality, and continuous
beneficence, a more noble, more animated, and happier destiny in the
new spaces which await them, in the development of their sublime
destiny.[4]

Nevertheless, as everything comes to an end in this world, so must
everything have an end in the surrounding spheres. After having
traversed the successive stages and rested in the successive stations
of their journey through the skies, the beings whom we are considering
must finally reach a defined place. What is this place, the ultimate
term of their immense cycle across the spaces? In our belief, it is the
sun.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[4] On this subject see the book of Dupont de Nemours, "_Philosophie de
l'Univers_," quoted by M. Pezzani in his "_Pluralité des existences de
l'âme_," pp. 216-218.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE SEVENTH.

PHYSICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION OF THE SUN.


ACCORDING to our system of thought the sun is the central place in
which souls which come from the ethereal spaces are finally gathered
together. After having undergone the successive incarnations which we
have described, souls, primitively human, finish by reaching the sun,
by dwelling within the borders of the star-king.

This, then, is a fitting place for a description of the sun from the
physical and astronomical point of view. Such a description will at
once reveal the entirely sovereign part played by that globe which
has no fellow. The astonishing attributes which belong to it, the
unimaginable power which it wields, will sufficiently explain the place
at the summit of the ascending scale of nature, which we assign to the
sun.

In the first place, the sun is totally different from the other stars
of our world. He resembles nothing, and nothing can be compared with
him. Neither planets, satellites, asteroids, nor comets can give us
any idea of him. His immense volume, his physical constitution, his
exceptional properties place him in a totally separate rank, and afford
full justification to those who claim for him a separate and sovereign
place.

The enormous mass of the sun at once proclaims his supremacy. The sun
is sufficiently vast to receive everything which could come to him from
all the other planets. He surpasses in volume the united size of all
the celestial bodies which revolve around him. He is six hundred times
larger than the entire assemblage of the planets with their satellites,
of the asteroids and the comets which compose what is called the
solar world; that is to say, the world of which we form a part. The
proportion in which the sun exceeds the earth in volume is, then,
necessarily enormous; since he is larger than all the other stars put
together. He is _one million three hundred thousand_ times larger than
our globe.

It is only by drawing that we can give an exact idea of the comparative
sizes of the sun and the other planets. The reader will find in the
accompanying illustration (Fig. 1) a figure which exactly represents
the comparative dimensions of the sun, and the largest planets of our
world. The earth, represented by a dot, gives an idea of what Mars,
Mercury, and Venus, which are smaller than the earth, must be.

It takes three years to circumnavigate the earth. To circumnavigate the
solar globe, under similar conditions, would take three hundred years.
If human life be not more prolonged in the sun than on the earth, an
existence would not suffice to enable a traveller to become acquainted
with the surface of the globe he inhabits.

[Illustration: Fig. 1.--Comparative Dimensions of the Sun and the
Planets.]

Weight is thirty times more intense on the surface of the sun than on
the earth. We know that a body which falls upon the earth traverses, in
the first second of its fall, a space of four metres, nine centimetres.
In the sun a falling body traverses 144 metres in the first second of
its fall. It follows from this, that a human body, if transported to
the sun, would weigh about 2000 kilogrammes, the weight of an elephant.
The body of a dog or of a horse would weigh twenty-eight times as much
as upon our earth, so that these animals would remain fixed to the
surface. The conditions of nature must therefore be entirely different
in the sun from what they are in the group of planets to which the
earth belongs.

The sun sheds rays from perpetual fire, a characteristic that
appertains to him alone among all the stars of our world. Of himself
he burns, and sheds abroad light and heat. The other stars are neither
warm nor luminous, and if the sun did not exist, they would be plunged
into eternal darkness and eternal cold. This privilege alone ought to
make us comprehend the immense importance of the central star.

The light and heat which emanate from the sun are constant; they are
never interrupted, and they never lose their force. Thus, a second
characteristic--constancy of illumination--separates the sun from all
the other celestial bodies of our world.

The intensity of the real heat of the sun has been measured by the
physicists. This result was attained in an endeavour to determine by
experience the quantity of heat which accumulates in a given time,
upon a certain portion of the earth's surface, exposed to the sun's
rays, and adding to that element the quantities of heat which would be
absorbed by the atmospheric air, the ethereal spaces, and the soil.

Pouillet, the French physicist, who undertook this critical
investigation, arrived at certain results, which he states as follows:

    "If the total quantity of heat emitted by the sun was exclusively
    employed to melt a layer of ice applied to the solar globe, and
    covering it completely in all its parts, that quantity of heat
    would be able to melt, in one minute, a layer of eleven metres,
    eighty centimetres, and in one day a layer of seventeen kilometres
    in thickness."

    "'This same quantity of heat,' says Professor Tyndall, 'would boil
    2900 milliards of cubical kilometres of water, at the temperature
    of ice.'"

The astronomer Herschel found, that, in order to extinguish the sun, to
prevent his "giving out caloric," according to the scientific phrase,
it would be necessary to dash a stream of iced water, or a cylindrical
column of ice, eighteen leagues in diameter, against its surface, at
a rate of speed of 70,000 leagues per second. A comparison adopted
by Professor Tyndall gives us an amazing view of the intensity of
the calorific force of the sun. "Imagine," says he, "that the sun is
surrounded by a layer of peat, seven leagues in thickness, the heat
produced by its combustion would be the same as that produced by the
sun in one year." The physicists have measured the intensity of the
sun's light with exactitude, as they had previously measured his heat.

It is known that the solar light is 300,000 times stronger than that
of the full moon, and 765,000,000 stronger than that of Sirius, the
most brilliant of the stars.

Bouguer discovered, by experiments made in 1725, that the sun, at a
height of 31° above the horizon, gives a light equal to that of 11,664
candles, placed within 43 centimetres of the object to be lighted, and
equal to 62,177 candles placed within one metre.

According to this result, if we take account of atmospheric absorption,
and of the law of the variation of the intensity of light, which
decreases in inverse ratio to the square of distance, the light given
by the sun at its zenith would be 75,200 times greater than that of
a single candle, placed within one metre. Wollaston had arrived at
a similar conclusion. By means of experiments of another kind, made
during the months of May and June, 1799, Wollaston found that 59,882
candles, at one metre, give as much light as the sun. Supposing the sun
to be in the zenith, the lightening power of that great star would be
equivalent to 68,009 candles.

There is but little difference between this valuation and that of
Bouguer, who states the result at 75,200 candles.

Whatever may be the intensity of the light of the sun, we now possess
other sources of light which approach to it. Such is the oxhydric
light, produced by burning hydrogen gas by means of a current of
oxygen gas, or air, a method of lighting which has recently been
employed in Paris and in London. This light is equal in power to more
than 200 candles. A thread of magnesium burning in the air, develops
a prodigious quantity of light, which may be taken as equivalent to
that of 500 candles. The electric light produced by a voltaic battery
of from 60 to 80 coils, produces a luminous arc equal to the light of
800 or 1000 candles. In the latter instance the voltaic arc, according
to Bouguer and Wollaston, would give 75 times less light than the sun,
supposing the luminous electric point to be placed at a distance of one
metre.

With very powerful batteries, it has been possible to go further, and
produce a light not much inferior to that of the sun. Messieurs Fizeau
and Foucault, by comparing the light of a voltaic arc, produced by the
action of three series of Bunsen's coils, of forty-six couples each,
with the light of the sun in a clear sky in April, have established
that the light-giving power of the sun is not more than twice and a
half that of the electric light.

The preceding numbers represent the light-giving power of the sun
upon our globe, taking into account atmospheric absorption. Arago, on
endeavouring to determine the intrinsic light-giving power of the sun,
found that the intensity of the solar light is 52,000 times greater
than that of a candle placed at one metre. But, according to more
recent researches for which we are indebted to Mr. Edmond Becquerel,
the result obtained by Arago is greatly inferior to the truth, and
the light of the central star is 180,000 times greater than that of a
candle placed at one metre.

All the planets, attended by their satellites, and all the comets which
accidentally manifest themselves to us, turn round the sun. The sun
remains motionless in the midst of this imposing procession of stars,
which circulate around him, like so many courtiers paying him homage.

Thus, the sun is the heart of our planetary system; everything is
drawn, everything converges towards him.

Half-informed persons will exclaim, "What can be more simple! The sun
being six hundred times the size of all the other stars put together,
the phenomenon of the condition of all those stars around the sun is
explained by the law of attraction, which prescribes that bodies shall
attract in proportion to their mass. If the sun attracts the stars of
our world to itself, it is because his mass is greater than that of all
the other stars collectively." But such an answer would be erroneous,
involving the common error of taking a word for a thing, an hypothesis
for an explanation, of putting a term of language in the place of a
logical consideration. When Newton conceived the hypothesis (and the
phrase) of _reciprocal attraction of matter_, he was careful to state
that he only proposed to characterise by a name a phenomenon which in
itself is entirely inexplicable, and of which we know nothing but the
exterior mode of its manifestation, that is to say, the mathematical
law. We know that bodies go towards each other in the ratio of their
masses, and in the inverse ratio of the square of their distances; but
why do they go towards each other? This is what we do not know, and
what we probably never shall know. If, for the word _attraction_ we
were to substitute the word _electrization_, or, as Keppler did, the
words _affection_, _sympathy_, _obedience_, &c., we should have a new
hypothesis, with a new name, but the mathematical law would remain the
same, the hypothesis only would be changed. The real cause which makes
small bodies rush towards large ones, and the stars of lesser magnitude
revolve round the stars of greater magnitude, is an impenetrable
mystery to mankind.

Whatever may be the hypothesis by which we seek to explain the fact,
it is certain that the sun holds the planets with their satellites,
the asteroids and the comets, suspended above the abysses of space,
and that they journey through the heavens in unintermitting obedience
to his guiding influence. The sun draws with him all the stars which
follow and surround him, like flatterers of his power, like humble
slaves of his universal preponderance. Like the father of a family
in the midst of his progeny, the sun peacefully governs the numerous
children of sidereal creation. Obedient to the irresistible impulsion
which emanates from the central star, the earth and the other planets
circulate, roll, gravitate, around him, receiving light, heat and
electricity from his beneficent rays, which are the first agents of
life. The sun marks out for the planets their path through the heavens,
and distributes to them their day and night, their seasons and their
climate.

The sun is, then, the hand which holds the stars above the unfathomable
abysses of infinite space, the centre from which they obtain heat, the
torch which gives them light, and the source whence they derive the
principle of life.

From all time the immense and unique task fulfilled by the sun in the
economy of nature has been understood. But this great truth has only
been deeply studied in our days. Science has gone far beyond all the
imagination the poets had conceived relative to the preponderance of
the sun in our world. By means of numerous experiments and abstruse
calculations, modern physicists have proved that the sun is the first
cause of almost all the phenomena which take place on our globe, and
that, without the sun, the earth and no doubt all the other planets
would be nothing but immense wastes, gigantic corpses, rolling about,
frozen and useless, in the deserts of infinite space.

Professor Tyndall, who has added largely to the discoveries of physics
and mechanics, has brought out this truth very strongly, and the
results to which he has been led may be said to form the most brilliant
page of contemporary physical science.

We shall now endeavour to explain how it is that everything on the
earth, and no doubt on all the other planets also, is derived from the
sun, so entirely, that we may affirm that vegetables, animals, man, in
short, all living beings, are but the productions, the children of the
sun; that they are, so to speak, woven out of solar rays.

In the first place, the sun is the primary cause of all those movements
which we observe, in the air, in the water, or in the ground under our
feet, and which keep up life, feeling, and activity on the surface of
our globe.

Let us consider the winds, which have such important relations with
all the physical phenomena of our globe. Whence proceed the winds?
From the action of the sun. The sun heats the different portions of
the earth very unequally, bestowing much more warmth on the tropical
and equatorial regions than on the other latitudes, which he leaves
exposed to cold. On each point of the earth which is struck by the rays
of the sun, the layers of air near the ground are dilated and raised,
and immediately replaced by colder layers from the temperate regions.
Thus the periodical winds are produced. Across the hemispheres two
great aërial currents are perpetually blowing, going from the equator
to each of the poles; one, the upper current, towards the north-east
in the northern hemisphere, and towards the south-east in the southern
hemisphere; the other, the lower current, in a contrary direction.

The movement of the earth gives rise to other regular winds. The action
of heat and of evaporation, added to the unequal distribution of the
continents and the seas, produce others, which are irregular. Thus,
for example, in the great valleys of the Alps, as in those of the
Cordilleras, the warmth of the air regulates the afflux of the cold
air of the mountains, and brings on tumultuous winds, and, in fact,
hurricanes.

The sea breezes arise from the difference in the temperature of the
shore during the day and the night. By day, the sun has warmed the
shore and produced a considerable dilatation of the air. When the sun
quits the horizon, this hot air is replaced by cool currents from the
inland. The same phenomenon is reversed in the morning, when the sun
returns; the shore is warmed, the hot air rises, and is replaced by
the colder air of the sea, which then goes inland. Thus, the evening
breeze comes from landward, and the morning breeze from seaward.

We see, therefore, that the great atmospheric movements which we call
the winds, are due to the successive appearances and disappearances
of the sun, as are also the lesser movements which we call breezes.
The position of the sun, constantly varying according to the period
of the year, and the hour of the day, explains the inequality and the
continuous existence of the aërial current.

The general cause of the winds which preserve the homogeneity of the
air in all the terrestrial regions, is the heat of the sun dilating the
atmospheric air; its absence, on the other hand, causes that gaseous
mass to contract.

The _watering of the globe_, that is to say the rain, an element
indispensable to the exercise of life, is another consequence of solar
heat. The waters of the seas, the rivers, and the lakes, those which
steep the soil, or are exhaled from vegetable matter, are gradually
transformed into vapour by the action of the sun's heat, and form
clouds and invisible vapour. When the sun has quitted the horizon,
these vapours grow cold in the bosom of the atmosphere in which they
floated, and fall down upon the earth again in the form of dew, of fog,
and of rain.

When the cooling of the watery vapour in the bosom of the atmosphere
is more intense, instead of rain we have snow, that is to say, a fall
of congealed water. It is chiefly on the summit of mountains that snow
falls and accumulates, because the temperature of elevated places is
always cold. In very great altitudes the snow, remaining for long
periods on the tops of the mountains, passes into an intermediate
condition, between snow and pure ice, and ends by forming those great
expanses of congealed water which are called glaciers. During the
hot seasons the glaciers melt by degrees; the water resulting from
this melting process, flows down the slopes of the mountains into the
valleys, and gives rise to springs, rivers, and streams. These streams
and rivers run into the ocean, from which they are again evaporated by
the action of solar heat, and reconstitute clouds and invisible vapour.

Thus is established and maintained that incessant circulation of
the waters which lie on the surface of the earth, their continual
exchange with the aërial masses, whose effect is to water the globe,
a phenomenon necessary to the exercise of the functions of organized
beings.

The regular currents which furrow the waters of the ocean are also the
result of the action of solar heat. From the poles to the equator the
waters of the sea are unequally heated, and this absence of equilibrium
in the temperature of the sea occasions a regular furrow, or line
from the poles to the equator, resulting from the displacement of the
waters, the cold waves rushing in to replace the hot. The unequal
evaporation caused by the unequal distribution of heat at the equator
and the poles, concurs to produce a similar result, by augmenting the
degree of saltness at the equator, without augmenting it at the poles,
occasioning a certain difference in density, and finally displacement
for want of equilibrium. The currents of the sea are thus entirely
produced by the action of the sun.

We see, therefore, that the winds, the watering of the globe, and the
currents of the sea are the consequence of solar heat.

The movement of the magnet is another physical result of the action
of the sun, if it be true, as Ampère says, that the magnetic currents
which traverse the terrestrial globe are nothing but _thermo-electric_
currents engendered by the unequal distribution of heat on the surface
of the globe.

In addition to being the agent of powerful physical forces, the sun is
a valuable agent of chemical forces,--indeed, this is the greatest part
which he plays in the phenomena of nature. The light and heat of the
sun produce the most important chemical actions on the earth's surface;
those on which the exercise of vegetable and animal functions depend.
If the sun did not exist, life would be banished from the terrestrial
globe. Life is the child of the sun, as I shall endeavour to prove to
you.

The operations of photography serve to make us understand how it is
that the sun presides over chemical action in the vegetable world. What
is photography? What does that curious phenomenon which fixes a drawing
formed by light upon a sheet of paper, consist of? A paper steeped in
chloride or iodide of silver is placed in the focus of the lens of a
dark camera, and the image formed by the lens is made to fall upon
paper sprinkled with water. The portions of the picture not exposed to
light produce no effect upon the salt of silver, which is incorporated
with the paper, but the portions exposed to light decompose the salt
of silver, and turn it black, or dark violet colour. On withdrawing
this paper from the apparatus, where the operations have been carried
on in darkness, we have a drawing which reproduces, in black, the
luminous image formed by the lens. By certain means this image, solely
produced by the chemical action of light, is rendered fixed and
unalterable.

All the salts of silver thus exposed to light undergo an analogous
decomposition. Nor are they the only salts which light modifies.
Compounds of gold, platinum, and cobalt, properly prepared, may also be
altered under the influence of direct or indirect rays, when exposed to
the sun, or to his diffused light.

The light of the sun possesses the power of bringing about the
combination of several other bodies. This is the case with hydrogen
and chloric gas. If you mix equal parts of chloric gas and hydrogen in
a bottle, and expose the mixture to the sun, an immediate combination
will take place between the two gases, and chlorohydric acid gas will
be formed. The combination will take place with so much force that it
will be attended by a considerable escape of heat. If you throw the
bottle containing the mixture up into the air, towards a space where
the sun is shining, the bottle will break before it falls, with a
violent explosion, at the moment of its contact with the light.

We might multiply examples of the chemical action produced by light
only on substances belonging to the mineral kingdom, but it is
sufficient for our purpose to say that the chemical action of light
is still more powerful and more general in the vegetable than in the
inorganic realm. This is a phenomenon of such importance that it is
impossible to believe it otherwise than a premeditated design of nature.

One of the most fruitful discoveries of modern science is the
recognition of the fact, that the respiration of plants depends upon
the presence and the direct action of light, that is to say, that the
decomposition of the carbonic acid which circulates in the tissue of
vegetables, and which has been breathed up from the soil by the roots,
takes place only when the plants are exposed to the sun. The labours of
Priestley, Charles Bonnet, Ingenhouz and Sennebier, have taught us that
the decomposition of carbolic acid into carbon, which remains fixed in
the tissue of the plant, and into oxygen, which disengages itself from
it, can take place only under the direct or indirect influence of the
sun's rays. Our readers may easily convince themselves of this fact.
Place a handful of green leaves in a glass full of water, and expose
the glass to the sun. At the close of the day the upper portion of the
glass will be filled with gas, which is nothing but pure oxygen, the
result of the breathing of the leaves.

All the importance, all the value of such a phenomenon will be evident,
if we reflect that it takes place over the whole extent of the globe,
and that the respiration, which means the life of all the vegetable
masses which cover the earth, depends solely upon the light of the
sun. It is by means of the respiration of the plants, which restores
oxygen to the atmospheric air, that nature makes up for the withdrawal
of oxygen by the respiration of animals, by the continual absorption
of that gas by numerous mineral substances, and by the frequent
combustions, natural and artificial, which occur in the world. The
result of these combustions would be the disappearance of the greater
portion of the oxygen contained in the air, if there did not exist a
permanent machinery for the restitution of that oxygen. This permanent
machinery is the respiration of plants, produced by solar light. So
absolute is the dependence of plants for their respiration on the
action of the sun's light, that if it be intercepted by clouds, the
escape of oxygen from them suffers a marked diminution. If the light of
the sun be suddenly stopped, which occurs during a total solar eclipse,
the escape of oxygen ceases, and the plants transpire carbonic acid
only, as they always do during the night.

It is for this reason that a plant kept in complete darkness loses its
colour, and becomes white. It does not respire, it emits carbonic acid
gas without retaining carbon, it becomes etiolated, according to the
scientific phrase, which means that the plant no longer lives at the
cost of the external air, or of gas furnished by the soil, but consumes
its own substance. The whitened salads which we prefer are not green
only because they are grown in darkness, and the mushrooms brought to
table are white only because they are reared in cellars.

M. Boussingault, who has studied vegetation in darkness, finds that
the leaves of a vegetable which has never had any light at all, in
its first appearance and development, never exhales oxygen, its
respiration furnishes carbonic acid gas only. The plant, therefore,
breathes just as an animal does. We must observe in this case that the
substance of the seed only supplies this product. The plant borrows
nothing from without, consumes nothing but the elements which were
contained in the seeds, and dies when those nutritive elements are
exhausted. The duration of its existence depends entirely on the
weight of the seed whence it has sprung. If a well-developed plant be
kept in darkness, the same fact may be observed. The plant gives out
nothing but carbonic acid, and, as it borrows nothing from without,
it perishes when it has thus devoured its own substance. M. Sachs
says, in his _Physiologie Végétale_, that the movements proper to the
leaves of many vegetables cannot take place if the plant is kept in
darkness. Plants so kept remain always in the condition which Linnæus
defined as _sleep_. Flowers contained in natural coverings, which in a
great measure debar them from the light of the sun, do indeed produce
colours, but those flowers are formed inside their natural coverings,
at the expense of substances contained in their leaves, which could not
be produced except under the influence of light. The same truth applies
to fruits.

Leaves, flowers, fruits, are then, as the German physiologist,
Moleschott, has said, "beings woven of air by light." The same author
adds: "When we contemplate the brilliant colours of the flowers, and
when their delicious perfume gives serene satisfaction to that poetic
faculty which exists, though it may slumber deeply, in the soul of
every man it is still the light which is the mother of colour and of
perfume."

The influence of the sun on vegetation is of fundamental importance.
Without the sun no plant would grow upon our globe. In those regions
which are permanently deprived of the powerful and beneficent torch
of nature, towards the extreme north, all vegetation is stunted, and
higher still, it does not exist. Absence of light, and cold, are the
causes of the complete disappearance of the natural adornment, and the
useful tribute, which elsewhere vegetation furnishes to the earth. In
the hot regions, vegetation is vigorous and extensive, in proportion
to the abundance of sunshine poured upon them. There is nothing to be
compared to the luxuriant vegetation of the tropical countries in both
hemispheres. The vegetation of Brazil, of equatorial Africa, and the
inter-tropical regions of India, is renowned for its abundance and
variety.

Agriculture, enlightened by modern chemistry, has brought to light the
special importance of the sun in promoting the activity of vegetation,
and producing combinations of substances not to be attained by any
action except that of the sun. M. Georges Ville, a professor at the
Museum of Natural History in Paris, states, as the result of numerous
experiments, that the activity imparted to vegetable production by the
sun is truly miraculous. No chemical fact, no theory, according to the
learned professor, can explain the mystery of solar influence, and its
prodigious power over the development and produce of vegetables.

Let us remark, before we leave this subject, that by a providential
circumstance the present generations of mankind are profiting by
the chemical force of the sun which nature has stored in her great
vegetable _depôts_ for thousands of centuries. For instance, what is
coal, which feeds all our industries, supplies our steam machines,
ships, engines, and locomotives? It is the residue of those gigantic
forests which covered the earth during the geological periods. The
substance of the trees of the forests of the ancient world was at first
changed into peat, which, becoming more and more compact by the action
of ages, was finally pressed into the hard and heavy body which we call
coal. But what was the cause, what was the first agent, which produced
the trees of those forests, in the antediluvian times? It was the
chemical force of the sun. This force, or, if the term be preferred,
the products of the chemical force of the sun, have been accumulated
and preserved in the wood, and then in the coal which that wood has
become. We find it thus, and we use it, to our present profit.

Thus, the glowing sunshine which lighted and warmed the ancient world,
is not lost to us. Contemporary generations inherit those very rays,
and that same chemical force. The power of the sun, which has slumbered
in the coal for millions of years, arouses itself for us, comes forth
into the day, and transforms itself in our hands into a mechanical
agent.

The light and heat of the sun, which play so great a part in the
vegetable kingdom, exercise influence of a similar kind over the animal
kingdom. If we reflect that plants are indispensable to the food of
the majority of animals, that the creation of vegetables necessarily
preceded that of terrestrial animals (since vegetables constitute their
food), and that animals must inevitably disappear from the earth if
plants ceased to exist; we shall be led to acknowledge that animals
originate as certainly, though indirectly, from the force of the sun as
the plants themselves.

Besides, it can be proved that the action of the sun is directly
indispensable to the maintenance of animal life. In the first place,
is it not the fact that solar light and heat exercise an immense
influence on the health of animals and of man? To convince ourselves
of that, we need only compare men who pass the greater part of their
lives in the air and sunshine, with men who live in dark houses, in the
narrow streets and lanes of great cities. Not only are these dwellings
unwholesome because they are damp, but they are fatal to health because
they are not enlivened by the presence of the sun.

Light, altogether indispensable to the exercise of respiration in
plants, is not indispensable in the same degree to the respiration of
animals. It is, however, certain that the products of the respiration
of man and animals are less abundant by night than by day. Moleschott
has found that the quantity of carbonic acid gas exhaled by an animal
is augmented by the intensity of the light of day, and is at its
minimum in complete darkness; "which amounts to this," adds that
author, "that the light of the sun accelerates molecular action in
animals."

Thus, the rays of the sun are a primary condition of the existence of
animals, because they produce the formation of plants, the essential
basis of the alimentation of animals and of man, and because they
preside over the fulfilment of many of their physiological functions.
We find views of precisely the same order as those we have endeavoured
to express, eloquently put forward in Professor Tyndall's work on
"Heat:"

    "And as surely as the force which moves a clock's hands is derived
    from the arm which winds up the clock, so surely is all terrestrial
    power drawn from the sun. Leaving out of account the eruptions
    of volcanoes and the ebb and flow of the tides, every mechanical
    action on the earth's surface, every manifestation of power,
    organic and inorganic, vital and physical, is produced by the sun.
    His warmth keeps the sea liquid, and the atmosphere a gas, and all
    the storms which agitate both are blown by the mechanical force of
    the sun. He lifts the rivers and the glaciers up the mountains;
    and thus the cataract and the avalanche shoot with an energy
    derived immediately from him. Thunder and lightning are also his
    transmuted strength. Every fire that burns and every flame that
    glows dispenses light and heat which originally belonged to the
    sun. In these days, unhappily, the news of battle is familiar to
    us, but every shock and every change, is only an application or
    misapplication of the mechanical force of the sun. * * * * The sun
    comes to us as heat; he quits us as heat; and between his entrance
    and departure the multiform powers of our globe appear. They
    are all special forms of solar power; the moulds into which his
    strength is temporarily poured, in passing from its source through
    infinitude."--p. 431.

The mechanical force which the heat of the sun represents has been
calculated, and the numbers thus ascertained are curious. In order to
understand how a heat agent can be expressed by figures of mechanical
force, we must have a general idea of that theory which constitutes
the most valuable creation of natural philosophy in our day; we allude
to _the mechanical theory of heat_, or the doctrine of the _mutual
transformation of physical forces_.

Experience has proved that heat changes, under our eyes, into a
mechanical force. See how, by the action of the steam engine, watery
vapour becomes cold, and the dispersed heat immediately produces a
mechanical force, and you will understand how it is that we maintain
that heat transforms itself into force. This being admitted, it is
easily explicable that one of those elements may be represented by
the others, or that at least we may represent the value of both force
and heat by a common unit. This common unit is called a _calorie_,
and expresses the quantity of heat requisite to raise the temperature
of a kilogram of water one degree. On the other hand, the term
_kilogrammeter_ is used to express the quantity of force requisite to
raise a kilogram to the height of one yard (_métre_) in a second.

Physicists have succeeded in solving the difficult problem, which
consists of ascertaining how many kilogrammeters may be produced by
a _calorie_, transformed into mechanical labour. The works of Mayer,
Joule, Helmholtz, Hirn, Regnault, &c., establish that a calorie is
equivalent to 425 kilogrammeters, that is to say that the quantity
of heat requisite to raise the temperature of a kilogram of water
to 1 degree centigrade produces a mechanical action represented by
the elevation of a weight of 425 kilograms 1 yard (_métre_) in height
in the space of a sound. 425 kilograms are called the _mechanical
equivalent of heat_.

With this information at our service, we are enabled to calculate in
units of mechanical force the work done by solar heat, by transforming
itself into mechanical force. And, if we calculate the total heat of
the sun diffused over the earth, during a given time, we can calculate
the sum of the forces which all this distributed heat would develop on
the surface of the earth, if it were all employed in mechanical labour.
In one year every square yard of the surface of the earth receives
2,318,157 calories, that is to say, more than 23,000,000,000,000 of
calories to each space of 2 acres, 1 rood, 35 perches.[5]

To understand the intensity of this force, we must conceive a steam
engine, which, instead of working at 200 or 300 horse-power, like the
engines of our larger steamers, should work at 4,163 horse-power.
And this, we must bear in mind, refers only to the small space above
mentioned. If we calculate the entire surface of the earth, we arrive
at the astounding total of 217,316,000,000,000 horse-power. In order to
conceive such a force, we must picture to ourselves 543,000,000,000,000
steam engines each working without relaxation day and night, at 400
horse-power. That is the amount of work which the heat of the sun does
for our globe alone.

The physical and mechanical actions which take place on our planet,
vegetation, the phenomena of animal life, industrial and agricultural
operations absorb only a very small quantity of this enormous mass of
forces. Professor Tyndall says on this subject, in the book we have
already quoted:--

    "Look at the integrated energy of our world--the stored power
    of our coal-fields; our winds and rivers; our fleets, armies,
    and guns. What are they? they are all generated by a portion of
    the sun's energy which does not amount to 1/2300000000th of the
    whole. This, in fact, is the entire fraction of the sun's force
    intercepted by the earth, and in reality we convert but a small
    fraction of this fraction into mechanical energy. Multiplying all
    our powers by millions of millions, we do not reach the sun's
    expenditure."--p. 433.

In this chapter we have analyzed the different physical and vital
effects produced upon our globe by the light and heat given out by the
sun. We have considered its action upon animate and inanimate nature.
We have seen that the sun is really the great cause of physical action
on our globe, and that he is also the first principle of both vegetable
and animal life. Without the sun life would be banished from the
terrestrial globe; as we have already said, life is the offspring of
the sun.

We know that in speech, heat and life are almost synonymous words. In
every language we find it said that persons are _frozen by death_, in
_the icy sleep of death_, that _cold is death-like_, &c. This image
is an exact expression of the reality. An animal or a plant, when
deprived of life is necessarily cold. A shiver is the precursor of
every malady, and the sure forerunner of death. Every dead body is
a cold body. It may be said that in the animal form cold takes the
place of life, as in inanimate bodies cold succeeds to heat. Let us
now consider the following facts. It is solely by the prolonged action
of heat that plants can germinate, grow, and develop themselves; in
order to come to perfection, every plant requires an ascertained
number of degrees of heat, and botanists and agriculturists know quite
accurately the total number of degrees of heat requisite to ripen their
cereals, and make their fruit-trees bear. A prolonged and undisturbed
accumulation of heat is indispensable to produce life in the
impregnated egg of a bird, so that by employing caloric in a hatching
machine, the process of hatching may be artificially perfected. The
eggs of viviparous animals are sustained by the heat of the mother's
body, and besides, as Hervey says, everything that has life proceeds
from an egg (omne vivum ex ovo). If we recall to mind that, after the
development of the germ in mammiferous animals, the unvarying maternal
heat is indispensable to the formation of the organs of the fœtus,
we shall be led to inquire whether heat does not directly produce
life, whether heat does not transform itself into vital force. Modern
philosophers who have propounded the _Mechanical Theory of Heat_, that
is to say the profound and admirable doctrine of the mutual conversion
of forces, the professors who have proved by mathematical evidence
that heat converts itself into mechanical force, and the converse,
might perhaps complete their brilliant synthesis by adding that heat,
which converts itself into mechanical force, can also transform itself
into life, or into vital force, and that the splendid theory of the
transformation of forces does not apply to inanimate bodies only, but
finds an astonishing confirmation in animate bodies.

Thus heat and life would be the manifestation of one and the same
power, and the cause of life would be found to dwell, like the cause of
mechanical force, in the sun.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[5] Represented by the French word _hectare_.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE EIGHTH.

THE SUN THE DEFINITIVE ABODE OF SOULS WHO HAVE ATTAINED THE HIGHEST
RANK IN THE CELESTIAL HIERARCHY.--THE SUN THE FINAL AND COMMON DWELLING
OF SOULS WHO HAVE COME FROM THE EARTH.--THE PHYSICAL CONSTITUTION OF
THE SUN.--THE SUN IS A MASS OF BURNING GASES.


THE fundamental importance of the sun in the general economy of our
world being finally established, our readers will not be surprised to
hear that we assign that radiant and sublime abode to the human souls
released from the earth, and successively purified and perfected by
the long series of their multiplied incarnations in the bosom of the
interplanetary spaces. Some philosophers have perceived this truth.
The astronomer Bode placed the most elevated intelligences in the sun.
"The happy creatures which inhabit this privileged abode," he says,
"have no need of the alternate succession of day and night; a pure and
unextinguishable light illumines it for ever. In the centre of the
light of the sun, they enjoy perfect security, under the shelter of the
wings of the Almighty."[6] Under what form may we picture to our fancy
the inhabitants of the sun? We cannot answer this question without
being acquainted with the _geography of the sun_, or as astronomers
call it, his _physical constitution_, which differs essentially from
that of the planets, of their satellites, and of the comets. He is
unique in his position and office in the planetary system,--he must
therefore be specially constituted. What is this special constitution?
What is the geography of the sun?

Would that it were in our power to reply to this question with
precision; would that we could describe the configuration of the sun.
Unhappily, science has not yet reached that point. The problem of the
sun's true nature is full of uncertainty. Astronomers are divided
between two opposite theories, and that which seems to be the best
supported, is too recent to be set forth in a dogmatic fashion. We can
only summarize the actual condition of our knowledge on this question,
explain the theory which seems conformable to ascertained facts, and
applying it to the subject on which we are engaged, endeavour to deduce
the physical condition, which, in our opinion, would belong to the
inhabitants of the king-star.

Until the great epoch of the discovery of the telescope, at the
beginning of the seventeenth century, in the time of Keppler and
Galileo, only vague and arbitrary ideas respecting the sun prevailed.
The educated, as well as the vulgar, beheld in it merely a globe of
fire; the most learned declared that they found in it _pure fire,
elementary fire, the principle of light, and of fire_. But as no means
existed of examining the surface of the sun, and as his real distance
from the earth was either unknown, or very imperfectly understood,
a prudent reserve was maintained on this question. The discovery of
the telescope immediately placed the astronomers in possession of the
celestial realm; it enabled them to sound the depths of space, and
to study the apparent configuration of the stars, including the sun
himself. A few hours' observation with the astronomical spy-glass, and
more was learned of the nature of the sun, than in the two thousand
years of more or less philosophical reverie which preceded the
discovery of the telescope.

With a glass which magnified the apparent diameter of the sun only
twenty-sixfold, Galileo, repeating the observations of Fabricius,
discovered the spots on the sun. Although Galileo did not use the
smoked glasses which have since been found so useful, and although he
limited his observations to the horizon, watching the great star at
its rising and its setting, or when it was veiled by slight clouds, he
studied its spots carefully, and described them faithfully.

We may observe that this discovery astonished the philosophers of that
period, who were entirely submissive to the authority of Aristotle.
The _incorruptibility of the sun_ was held in the schools as a sacred
principle, according to Aristotle, and these unfortunate spots
perplexed the philosophers. The peripatetics vied with each other in
proving to the Florentine astronomer that the purity of the sun was
an unassailable principle, and that the spots which he had perceived
existed only on his eyes, or on the lens of his glasses.

But Galileo had seen correctly, and soon every one could convince
himself of the reality of the phenomenon he had proclaimed. Not only
do spots exist upon the disc of the sun, but they furnish the only
means which we possess of becoming acquainted with the physical and
astronomical peculiarities and properties of the great star. The
examination of these spots led to the discovery that the sun revolves
like the other planets, and that he accomplishes the entire revolution
upon his axis in a period of twenty-five days. The sun's days are
therefore twenty-five times as long as ours. Here, however, we must
remark upon the word _day_. To us, the _day_ signifies the periodical
return of the earth to the same point, after a complete revolution
upon its axis, with an alternation of light and darkness. It is quite
otherwise in the case of the sun, which, being self-luminous in all his
parts, can never have any night.

We have said that the examination of the sun's spots established his
rotation upon his axis. In fact, if we patiently observe the motion
of a spot, or of a group of spots, we remark that it advances slowly
from one edge of the solar disc to the other; for instance, if the
point of departure be the eastern edge, the spot or group will advance
with uniform speed towards the western edge, taking fourteen days
to accomplish the distance. If we wait fourteen days more, we shall
again perceive the same spot making its appearance on the eastern
edge of the disc, the interval having been consumed in passing over
the opposite and, of course, invisible side of the sun. The spot has
therefore taken twenty-eight days to reappear, which twenty-eight days
do not, however, represent the exact duration of the revolution of the
sun himself. It must not be forgotten that the earth has not remained
motionless during this long observation; she, too, has gone round in
the sun, as the spots have done. This sort of advance, which causes us
to see the same spot for a longer time than we should have seen it, if
the earth remained motionless, is of three days' extent, the deduction
of which from the twenty-eight given days, allows twenty-five days for
the real duration of the sun's rotation upon his axis.

In the sun seasons are unknown as well as days. Time seems to have no
existence for the beings who occupy that radiant dwelling-place. The
changes, and the succession of things for us which constitute time,
are unknown to their sublime essence. Duration has no measure in that
blessed world.

The dweller in the sun must behold the revolution of the planets around
him, performed according to the same laws, but with different rates of
speed. The phases of the planets and their satellites, the phases of
Mars and Venus, or those of the moon, which we perceive from the earth,
are unknown to them; they see only the hemisphere of those globes which
is illumined by their own immense country. They behold, in larger
dimensions, the globes of Mercury and Venus, and in lesser dimensions
the Earth and Mars. The distant planets, Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus,
must seem very small to them. Neptune they probably cannot see at
all. The comets must be for a long time invisible to the inhabitants
of the sun, who behold their flaming mass rushing towards them in
ever-increasing size. They also see some comets sinking away into
space, and others falling on the surface of the sun himself, to be lost
and absorbed in his substance.

Thus, the spots on the sun have revealed to us an important peculiarity
of his astronomical character, his revolution upon his axis. They have
also given us the only exact ideas which we possess of the physical
constitution of the sun.

The accompanying plate conveys an idea of what the spots on the sun
consist of. Figures 2 and 3 represent the general aspect of these
appearances. In the centre is a black space perfectly marked. To this
succeeds a space in grey tinting, whose outlines melt by degrees into
the rest of the luminous mass. The first region is called the Umbra;
the second, the Penumbra.

These words must be distinctly understood. The part indicated by the
term _Umbra_ is only dark relatively to the illumined portion. This
Umbra is very luminous, its brilliancy is two thousand times that
of the full moon. We are merely dealing with comparisons here. The
solar spots are often of very considerable dimensions. They have been
found 30,000 leagues in breadth, and could swallow up the earth,
which is only one-tenth of that magnitude. They are not permanent,
sometimes they remain for months, or even years, but the greater
number increase and decrease rapidly, and disappear in a few weeks.
They are incessantly changing in form and in extent, and they grow
and diminish. It is evident that they are regulated by a violent
interior movement, and that they are the seat of tumultuous motion.
Something like whirlwinds are seen to sweep across the regions occupied
by the spots, and to carry them away, like the waves of a furious
sea, or the flames of a conflagration. Gigantic bridges of apparently
burning matter have been observed, thrown from one edge to the other
of adjacent spots, uniting them by a shining band, and then this same
band has stretched itself out and caught hold of other spots. Of a
sudden the whole edifice has been seen to be swept away by fresh
whirlwinds. Signs of a prodigious commotion, of gigantic perturbation,
are always evident. These hurricanes, these tempests of flame, are of
a widely different grandeur from the hurricanes and the tempests of
our atmosphere, because the atmosphere of the sun is several thousands
of yards in height, and covers an extent of surface 1,300,000 times
greater than ours.

[Illustration: Fig. 2.--Group of Solar Spots observed in 1864 by
Nasmith.]

[Illustration: Fig. 3.--Another Solar Spot observed by Nasmyth.]

We have just said that the sun has an atmosphere. Such is the
conclusion to which the careful examination of the great star has led.

From the earliest times at which the sun was observed, a theory of its
constitution was formulated, which was perpetuated down to the present
age, without receiving authoritative contradiction. In the eighteenth
century the astronomers Herschel and Wilson developed this theory,
which was popularized in our time by the writings of Humboldt and Arago.

According to this theory, the sun is composed of a dark nucleus, and
a burning atmosphere, which is the only source of the light proper to
this star. Arago and Humboldt called the incandescent atmosphere of the
sun, the _photosphere_. Heat and light would not, therefore, come to us
from the nucleus, but only from the photosphere.

The spots are explained, according to this theory, by admitting that
they are openings accidentally formed in the sun's atmosphere by
gases discharged from volcanic craters, or in some other way. Through
these openings the dark nucleus of the sun is seen. The _penumbra_ of
the spots are formed by the lower parts of the atmosphere of the sun,
which is either hot or luminous. This lower portion of the atmosphere,
reflecting the light emitted by the upper portion or photosphere, is
slightly warm, and only partially illumined.

This theory of the constitution of the sun, and of the solar spots,
seemed for a long time satisfactory. A similar explanation, that is to
say, by partial eruptions of gas from volcanic craters, was assigned
to the kind of black dotted appearance observed on the surface of the
solar disc, and which is exactly reproduced in the two figures here
given.

The brilliant spots scattered over the surface of the sun, which
touched here and there with points of intense luminosity, are called
_faculæ_. These brilliant points are said to proceed from local
accidents, which cause an escape of light and heat from certain parts
of the solar atmosphere.

Thus, according to this theory, the sun would be a solid body, opaque
and dark like the planets, surrounded by an atmospheric layer, which
would prevent any heat in the nucleus. Outside that layer would be a
second atmosphere, the _photosphere_, which only would be luminous,
and capable of emitting light and heat. Dark nucleus, dark atmosphere,
luminous photosphere, such would be the constituent elements of the
sun, according to Wilson, William Herschel, Humboldt, and Arago. To
any who hold this theory, it is not impossible to believe that the
sun may be inhabited by beings who differ but slightly to man, or who
are endowed with an organization similar to that of the inhabitants of
the earth. If the body of the sun be preserved by the interposition of
a cold, and but slightly conducting atmosphere from the rays of the
photosphere which burns at an immense distance, we can believe that
creatures organized almost like ourselves could live within it. The
heat of the burning photosphere can reach it through the thickness of
the lower atmosphere with only the degree of heat necessary to maintain
life. The light thus filtered is brilliant, but not dazzling, and
admits of the existence of beings of organization similar to those who
live on the earth.

To this conclusion Arago came:

    "If I were asked," said the astronomer, "is the sun inhabited? I
    must reply that I do not know. But, if I were asked whether the
    sun can be inhabited by beings of organization similar to that of
    dwellers upon our globe, I should not hesitate to reply in the
    affirmative."

At the present day Arago would hesitate, for science has made a great
advance in the question of the physical constitution of the sun. The
new method invented by MM. Kirchhoff and Bunsen, and known as analysis
of the luminous spectrum, being applied to the solar rays, has given
rise to an entirely new conception of the nature of the sun. We have
returned to the opinion of the physicists of the middle ages, who
regarded the sun as a globe of fire, a sort of gigantic torch.

It would be impossible to enter into the details of the optical
experiments which rendered accurate analysis of the solar rays
possible, and enabled us to deduce a new theory of the constitution of
the sun from their properties. We shall confine ourselves to explaining
this theory, as it evolves itself from the experiments of M. Kirchhoff.

According to the German philosopher, the sun is not, as it has hitherto
been supposed, a cold, dark, and solid body, surrounded by a burning
atmosphere; it is a globe, a sphere, probably liquid, which burns
throughout its whole mass, and in all its parts. This incandescent
globe is surrounded by a very heavy atmosphere, formed of the vapours
which proceed from the incandescent globe, and which are themselves
kept burning in consequence of the high temperature of all those masses
of fire.

How are the spots on the sun to be explained according to this
theory? M. Kirchhoff admits that, owing to unknown causes, a cooling
process may take place in the vaporous atmosphere which surrounds
the body of the sun. This cooling process would form at certain
points condensations of vapour analogous to the condensation of the
vapour of water, which on our globe produces clouds and rain. These
agglomerations of condensed vapours would form a species of cloud in
the atmosphere of the sun, and those clouds, which would intercept
the light of the solar disc from us, would produce the effect of a
spot on this disc. The cloud, once formed, cools portions of the
neighbouring vapours, and, by provoking a partial condensation, gives
rise to the _penumbra_ which surround the _umbra_. Thus, according
to M. Kirchhoff, the solar spots are clouds suspended in the sun's
atmosphere. Galileo had previously propounded an analogous hypothesis.
Without abandoning M. Kirchhoff's theory we may mention another
explanation of the spots. A German physicist considers the spots, not
as clouds in the sun's atmosphere, but as partial solidifications of
the liquid matter which forms the body of the sun; a kind of scoria,
analogous to those which may be observed in crucibles containing
matters in a state of fusion, and which come from particles of metal
not yet melted, or which are beginning to solidify. The penumbra of
the spots would be the half-molten, and consequently, half-transparent
pollicule which always surrounds the edges of metallic scoria with a
semi-liquid ring.

M. Faye, a French astronomer, has propounded a theory, which somewhat
modifies that of M. Kirchhoff. He thinks that the nucleus of the sun
is neither solid nor liquid, but entirely gaseous. The solar spot, he,
like M. Kirchhoff, takes to be an opening made accidentally in the
sun's atmosphere by the condensation of vapours on certain points of
that atmosphere. According to M. Faye, the spots are due to vertical
currents of vapour ascending and descending, and the interception of
the light of the sun's atmosphere by the predominant intensity of the
ascending current.[7]

The new theory, the result of the optical experiments of the German
physicists, appears to explain all the facts which have been observed,
and it has therefore been generally accepted. Some divergences exist
on questions of detail, but astronomers are nowadays almost unanimous
in regarding the sun as a great body, incandescent in all its parts, as
a globe in a state of fusion, surrounded by a burning atmosphere, or,
as M. Faye states it, a simple agglomeration of incandescent gases.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[6] Quoted by Flammarion in his "_Pluralité des mondes habités_."

[7] See "_Le Soleil_," by M. A. Guillemin, pp. 194-208.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE NINTH.

THE INHABITANTS OF THE SUN ARE PURELY SPIRITUAL BEINGS.--THE SOLAR RAYS
ARE EMANATIONS FROM THE SPIRITUAL BEINGS WHO LIVE IN THE SUN.--THESE
BEINGS THUS PRODUCE ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE LIFE UPON THE EARTH.--THE
CONTINUITY OF SOLAR RADIATION, INEXPLICABLE BY PHYSICISTS, EXPLAINED
BY THE EMANATION FROM THE SOULS OF THE INHABITANTS OF THE SUN.--THE
WORSHIP OF FIRE, AND THE ADORATION OF THE SUN AMONG DIFFERENT PEOPLES,
ANCIENT AND MODERN.


FROM the discussion of physical astronomy contained in the preceding
chapters, we have concluded, with MM. Kirchhoff and Faye, that the
sun is a mass of burning gases. But, our readers will ask, if this be
so--if the sun is a gaseous incandescent mass, or a globe of matter in
a state of fusion, surrounded by an atmosphere of burning gas, where do
you place its inhabitants, and under what form do you picture them?

We have already said, that at each step of their promotion in the
hierarchy, the creatures who live in the planetary spaces and have
succeeded to the superhuman being, grow in perfection, their senses
are multiplied, their intellectual power is considerably extended.
In proportion as the creature, who in the beginning was human, is
raised by successive deaths and resurrections in the scale of
inter-planetary being, the material substance, which, united to its
spiritual principle, formed its radiant individuality, is diminished.
In further exposition of our system, we must state our belief that this
superior being, when he has been sufficiently perfected and exalted, by
his different incarnations, by the multiplied stages in the immensity
of the heavens, finally becomes pure spirit. When he attains the
sun, he is free from all material substance, from all carnal alloy.
He is a flame, a breath; all is intelligence, sentiment, thought, in
him; nothing impure is mingled with his perfect essence. He is an
absolute soul, a soul without a body. The gaseous and burning mass of
which the sun is composed is, therefore, appropriate to receive these
quintessential beings. A throne of fire is a fitting throne for souls.

We might even go further, and maintain that not only is the sun the
asylum and receptacle of souls which have finished the course of their
peregrinations in this world, but that it is nothing else than a
collection of those souls which have come to it from the other planets,
after having passed through the intermediate states which we have
described. The sun may be only an aggregation of souls.

Since the sun is the first cause of life on our globe, since he is,
as we have proved, the origin of life, feeling, and thought, since he
is the determining cause of the existence of everything possessing
organization upon the earth, why may we not hold that the rays which
the sun pours upon the earth and the other planets are nothing else
than the emanations from these souls? that they are emissions from the
pure spirits dwelling in the central star, directed towards us, and the
other planets, under the visible form of rays?

If this hypothesis were accepted, what magnificent, what sublime
relations existing between the sun and the globes which gravitate
around him, would be revealed to us! A continual exchange would be
established between the sun and the surrounding planets, an unbroken
circle, an inexhaustible communion, radiant emanations which should
generate and maintain activity and motion, thought and sentiment, which
should keep the flame of life burning everywhere! Let us think of the
emanations from souls dwelling in the sun descending upon the earth in
solar rays. Light gives existence to plants, and produces vegetable
life, accompanied by sensibility. Plants, having received this sensible
germ from the sun, communicate it, aided by heat likewise emanating
from the sun, to animals. Let us think of the germs of souls, placed
in the breasts of animals, developing themselves, becoming perfected
by degrees, from one animal to another, and finishing by becoming
incarnate in a human body. Let us think, then, of the superhuman being
succeeding to man, springing up into the vast plains of ether, and
beginning the series of numerous transmigrations which, from one step
to another, will lead him to the summit of the scale of spiritual
perfection, from which every material substance has been eliminated,
and where the soul, thus exalted to the purest degree of its essence,
penetrates into the supreme abode of happiness, and of intellectual and
moral power--the sun.

Such may be this endless circle, such this unbroken chain, binding
together all beings in nature, and passing from the visible to the
invisible world.

To those persons who may declaim with severity against the system which
we have ventured to put forward, we shall put a question which cannot
fail to embarrass them, for science has never been able to solve it.
We shall ask them how the light of the sun, and the heat which results
from it, are maintained? It is evident that the enormous quantities of
heat and light which the sun sends out in torrents into space, must
come from a source which cannot be inexhaustible, which has need of
renewal, otherwise the sun would become extinct. As there is no effect
without a cause, it is plain that the inconceivable quantity of forces
which the sun distributes by his burning rays, must be derived from
some place. M. Guillemin, in his work on the sun, passes in review the
different theories which have been adopted, up to the present day, to
explain solar radiation. The following is an analysis of a chapter of
M. Guillemin's work on the "Maintenance of Solar Radiation."

Pouillet has calculated that if the sun were not supplied with
something to make up for the losses he sustains, he must cool at the
rate of one degree in a century. But this calculation falls short of
the truth. Pouillet supposed that the specific heat of the sun is the
greatest which can be conceived. The specific heat of the sun is, it is
true, unknown, but instead of placing it at the maximum power, which it
is not proved to be, we might suppose it, by an allowable hypothesis,
to be equal to that of water, which is well known. Now if we grant to
the sun the specific heat of water, we rectify Pouillet's calculation,
and we arrive at the conclusion that the sun, if not furnished with any
resources from which to repair his losses, would be entirely extinct at
the end of 10,000 years. Professor Tyndall, whose experiments are more
recent than those of Pouillet, and inspire greater confidence, says:
"If the sun were a block of coal, and it were supplied with sufficient
oxygen to enable it to burn at the degree of heat proper to that star,
it would be entirely consumed at the end of 5000 years." Now the sun
has existed for millions of years, for the transition periods of our
globe, in which the first living beings were manifested, are traced
back to millions of years. And yet his heat has not sensibly diminished
since those distant ages. The proof that it has not diminished, is that
the climates of the globe at the present time are the same as they were
in the tertiary or quaternary epoch. In the tertiary or quaternary
strata the same plants and the same animals which exist at present are
found. Speaking of times nearer to our own, we may observe that the
productions of the soil remain unchanged during the 2000 or 3000 years,
whose traditions and historical archives we possess.

The sun has lost none of his heat during millions of years. Where has
he gotten this heat from? Where does he get it from now? By what means
is that unquenched fire kept up.

To this question neither astronomy nor physics has ever furnished a
satisfactory reply. Treatises, whether astronomical or physical, give
us nothing but hypotheses, which we cannot accept.

At first it was said that the sun, turning on his axis in twenty-five
days, produced by this movement a perpetual friction of his surface
against the element in which he moves, in other words, against the
ether. But if that were the case, this friction ought to engender a
similar heat on the surface of the planets, whose rotatory motion, and
especially the motion of translation in their orbit, is much more rapid
than that of the sun turning on his axis. Besides, if we calculate the
elevation of the temperature which would result from the friction of
the sun against the ether, we shall find that the heat would hardly
suffice to maintain the radiation of the solar star during one century.
This hypothesis is therefore untenable.

Another theory, better supported, has been put forward by the
physicists Mayer, Watterston, and Thompson; it explains the maintenance
of the solar heat by a constant fall of meteors on the surface of the
solar star.

A multitude of corpuscles gravitate round the sun, and approach him
with sufficient nearness to be attracted by his surface, and fall upon
it. These are _asteroids_, which turn in whirling swarms around the
sun. A shower of corpuscles, of meteorolites, may be always falling on
his surface. Their fall would cause a great development of caloric,
in consequence of the transformation of their enormous speed into
heat, and this caloric would suffice, according to the authors of this
theory, for the maintenance of solar radiation. Let us quote Professor
Tyndall on this point:

    "It is easy to calculate both the maximum and the minimum velocity
    imparted by the sun's attraction to an asteroid circulating round
    him. The maximum is generated when the body approaches from an
    infinite distance, the _entire pull_ of the sun being then exerted
    upon it. The minimum is that velocity which would barely enable
    the body to revolve round the sun close to its surface. The final
    velocity of the former, just before striking the sun, would be
    390 miles a second, that of the latter 276 miles a second. The
    asteroid, on striking the sun with the former velocity, would
    develop more than 9000 times the heat generated by the combustion
    of an equal asteroid of solid coal; while the shock, in the latter
    case, would generate heat equal to that of the combustion of
    upwards of 4000 such asteroids. It matters not therefore whether
    the substances falling into the sun be combustible or not; their
    being combustible would not add sensibly to the tremendous heat
    produced by their mechanical collision. Here then we have an agency
    competent to restore his lost energy to the sun, and to maintain
    a temperature at his surface which transcends all terrestrial
    combustion.

    "The very quality of the solar rays--their incomparably penetrative
    power--enables us to infer that the temperature of their origin
    must be enormous; but in the fall of asteroids we find the means of
    producing such a temperature."--P. 423.

The fall of these asteroids on the surface of the sun would be followed
by an increase in the bulk of that star, and there has been no such
increase since the earliest period of its observation. Also, the
augmentation of the sun's bulk by these foreign bodies, would have
produced an accelerant motion in the orbits of all the stars, which,
however slight, would be distinctly perceptible; whereas, for the 2000
years of celestial observation, whose records we possess, unbroken and
perfect regularity in the progression of the stars of our solar world
is registered.

There is another objection to this hypothesis. It is that it
presupposes a solid and resistant medium in the sun. This medium does
not exist, according to the new solar theory, which considers this star
to be formed of vapour and of gas, or, at most, of a liquid sphere.
Another proof that this resistant medium does not exist, is to be found
in the fact that several comets, among others those of 1680, and of
1843, have passed so close to the sun at their perihelion, that their
movements must have been greatly disturbed by the resistance of a dense
medium. The movements of these comets, were, however, quite unaffected
by this cause; they were observed to reappear at the moment indicated
by the regular curve of their orbit.

The absence of a resistant medium in the sun has been regarded as so
grave an objection by one of the authors of this theory, Mr. Thompson,
that he has abandoned it, as incompatible with facts.

Another hypothesis has been proposed, for explaining the maintenance of
solar heat. The substances which now form the sun have not always been
collected together in their present state of aggregation. At first,
his molecules were, relatively, extremely distant from one another,
and formed a _chaotic_, or confused mass. Under the influence of
attraction, they drew together by degrees, and agglomerated themselves
into a nucleus, which has become the centre of attraction of the whole
mass. This simply amounts to saying that the sun began by being in the
state of nebulosity, and passed at a later period into the condition of
adherent and continuous matter.

    "The molecules of solar nebulosity," says Balfour Stewart,
    "precipitating themselves upon one another, produced heat; as, when
    a stone is thrown with force from the top of a precipice, heat is
    also the ultimate form into which the potential energy of the stone
    is converted."

This system of explanation of the primary origin of the planets is in
general favour. Having drawn themselves together to form a continuous
whole, the elements of the sun would have changed their physical
condition, and the result of this change would have been an enormous
escape of heat, sufficient to explain the origin of the solar focus.
We know, in fact, that condensation of matter always accompanies an
escape of heat; and it has been calculated that a diminution of only
a thousandth part from the actual bulk of the sun would suffice to
maintain the solar heat for 20,000 years.

M. Helmholtz, the author of this ingenious theory, has also calculated
that "the mechanical force equivalent to the mutual gravitation of
the particles of the nebulous mass would have been originally equal
to 454 times the quantity of mechanical force actually disposable
in our system," 453/454 of the force coming from the conatus to the
gravitation would therefore have been already expended. The author adds
that the 1/454 which remains of this original heat, would suffice to
raise the temperature of a mass of water equal to the combined birth of
the sun and the planets, to 28,000,000 of degrees centigrade; this is
a quantity of heat equal to 2500 times that which would be engendered
by the combustion of the entire solar system, supposing it to be turned
into a mass of coal.

These calculations are, doubtless, most interesting, but their defect
is that they rest upon the conception of the sun's nebulosity, an
hypothesis which requires closer examination before it ought to be
accepted as the basis of so important a deduction. Besides, if the sun
were warmed by a physical cause not in action at the present time,
his heat, however great it may be estimated to be, must necessarily
have been diminishing as long as the sun has been in existence. Now,
we repeat that it does not appear that the heat of the sun has ever
suffered any diminution. The theory of nebulosity is therefore no more
securely founded in principle than the other hypotheses which have
preceded it.

Thus, we find that neither astronomy nor physical science offers us
any satisfactory explanation of the constant maintenance of solar
radiation. Common sense tells us that this furnace, constantly in
activity, must be as unceasingly fed; but science is as yet unable to
discover the nature and source of its aliment.

There, where science places nothing, we venture to place something. In
our belief solar radiation is maintained by the continuous, unbroken
succession of souls, in the sun. These pure and burning spirits are
perpetually replacing the emanations perpetually sent through space
by the sun, to the globes which surround him. Thus we complete that
uninterrupted circle of which we have previously spoken, which binds
together all the creatures of nature by the links of a common chain,
and attaches the visible to the invisible world. We may venture to put
forward this explanation of the maintenance of solar radiation with
some confidence, since science can give us no exact information upon
the point, and philosophy in this case only fills up the void left by
astronomy and physics.

In short, the sun, the centre of the planetary aggregation, the
constant source of light and heat, which sends forth motion, sensation,
and life upon the earth, is, in our belief, the final sojourn of
purified perfected souls, which have attained their most exquisite
subtlety. They are entirely devoid of material alloy, they are pure
spirits who dwell in the midst of the blazing atmosphere and the
burning masses which compose the sun. That star, whose size far
surpasses the bulk of all the others put together, is sufficiently
vast to contain them. From their throne of fire, these souls, all
intelligence and activity, behold the marvellous spectacle of the march
of all the planetary globes which compose the solar world, through
space. Placed in the centre of this vast world, understanding the
secrets of nature, and all the mysteries of the universe, they are in
possession of perfect happiness, of absolute wisdom, and of illimitable
knowledge.

The Genoese naturalist, Charles Bonnet, was the first to bring forward
general ideas upon the philosophy of the universe, in the same
order as those which we have just developed. In his _Palingénésie
Philosophique_, published in 1771, he introduces the doctrine of divers
existences for the human soul, outside that of the earth. In a chapter
appended to that work, and entitled, "Conjectures on the blessings to
come," he draws a picture of the perfect happiness which we shall enjoy
in that abode, and dwells, in the following eloquent words, on the
transcendent knowledge which we shall possess, which will unfold to our
view all the secrets of the physical and moral worlds:--

    "If the Supreme Intelligence," says Charles Bonnet, "has varied
    all His works here below, so that nothing created is identical
    with anything else, if harmonious progression reigns among all
    terrestrial beings; and one common chain unites them; is it not
    probable that this marvellous chain is prolonged throughout all the
    planetary worlds; that it unites them all, and that they are only
    constituent and infinitesimal parts of the same series?

    "At present we can see only a few links of this great chain; we
    are not even certain that we observe them in their habitual order;
    we can only follow this admirable progression very imperfectly,
    and through innumerable windings in which we meet with frequent
    interruptions, but we always know that the breaches are not in the
    chain, but in our knowledge.

    "When it shall have been granted to us to contemplate this chain,
    as I have supposed the intelligences for whom our world was chiefly
    made to contemplate it; when, like them, we shall be able to
    follow its coils in other worlds, then, and then only, we shall
    understand their reciprocal dependence, their secret relations,
    the exact meaning of every link, and we shall rise by a scale of
    relative perfection to the most transcendent and luminous truths.

    "With what feelings shall our souls be filled, when, having studied
    to its depths the economy of a world, we shall fly to another,
    and compare the two! How perfect shall our cosmology be then! How
    wide the generalization and great the fecundity of our principles,
    the succession, the mass, the exactness of our knowledge! What
    light shall be shed from so many different objects upon the other
    branches of our studies; upon physics, geometry, astronomy,
    rational science, and especially upon that divine study whose
    object is the Supreme Being.

    "All these truths are chained together, and the most distant
    are held to the nearest by hidden links, which it is the end of
    understanding to discover. Newton, no doubt, exulted in having
    discovered the secret relation between the fall of a stone and the
    motion of a planet; when he shall be one day transformed into a
    celestial intelligence, he will smile at this child's play, and his
    profound geometry will be to him only the first elements of another
    Infinite.

    "Man's reason has already penetrated beyond all the planetary
    worlds; it has raised itself up to heaven, where God dwells; it
    contemplates the august throne of the Ancient of Days, it beholds
    all the spheres rolling beneath His feet, and obeying the impulse
    of His hand, it hears the acclamations of all the intelligences,
    and, mingling its adoration and its praise with the majestic song
    of the hierarchies, it cries with the deepest consciousness of its
    own nothingness: 'Holy, holy, holy, is He who is eternal, and the
    All Good; glory be to God in the highest, and good-will towards
    man!' Oh! the depth of the riches of the Divine Goodness, which
    is not satisfied with manifesting itself to men on the earth
    by countless means, but will bring him one day to the celestial
    dwelling-places, and satisfy the thirst of his soul with the
    fulness of delight. There are many dwellings in our Father's home;
    had it not been so, He whom He sent to us would have told us, and
    He is gone thither to prepare a place for us. He will come back and
    take us with Him; that where He is we may be also. Where He is, not
    in the outer court, not in the vestibule, but in the sanctuary of
    universal creation, in the holy of holies. _Where He is_, who is
    the King of angels and of men, the Mediator of the new covenant,
    the Author and Finisher of our Faith, who has made the new way for
    us which leads to life, who has made us free to enter into the Holy
    Place, who has brought us near to the city of the living God, to
    the heavenly Jerusalem, to the innumerable multitude of angels, to
    God Himself, who is the Judge of all.... In this eternal dwelling,
    in the bosom of light, of perfection and happiness, we shall read
    the general and particular history of Providence. Initiated, to
    a certain extent, in the profound mysteries of His government,
    His laws, His dispensations, we shall admiringly recognize the
    secret reasons of the many general and particular events which
    astonish us, confound us, and throw us into a state of doubt which
    philosophy does not always dissipate, but which religion never
    fails to allay. We shall ceaselessly meditate upon the great book
    of the destinies of the worlds. We shall dwell particularly on the
    pages which concern this little planet; the cradle of our infancy,
    and the first monument of the paternal goodness of the Creator
    towards man. We shall discover, with astonishment, the numerous
    revolutions which this little globe has undergone before it assumed
    its actual form, and we shall follow with our gaze those which it
    is destined to undergo in the course of ages; but our admiration
    and our gratitude will be chiefly excited by the wonders of that
    great redemption, in which there are so many things beyond our
    feeble reach, which have been the objects of the studious research
    and the profound meditation of the prophets, and which the angels
    have desired to look into. One line on this page will contain our
    own history, and will develop to our view the why and the how
    of those calamities, trials, and privations which in this world
    try the patience of the just man, purify his soul, and enhance
    his virtues, while they crush and destroy the weak. When we have
    reached so elevated a degree of knowledge, the origin of physical
    and moral evil will no longer embarrass us; we shall confront them
    distinctly at their source, and in their most distant effects, and
    we shall acknowledge, from the evidence before us, that all which
    God does is well done.

    "In this world we see effects only; and we even observe them in
    a very superficial manner; all the causes are hidden from us:
    then we shall see effects in their causes, consequences in their
    principles, the history of the individual in that of the species,
    the history of the species in that of the globe, the history of the
    globe in that of the worlds, &c. Now we see things only confusedly,
    and in a glass darkly; but then we shall see face to face, and
    shall know in some sort as we have been known; in short, because we
    shall have an infinitely more complete and distinct knowledge of
    the work, we shall also acquire an incomparably deeper sense of the
    perfections of the workman. And this knowledge, the most sublime,
    the most vast, the most desirable of all, will be incessantly
    perfected by intimate intercourse with the eternal source of all
    perfection! I cannot express this sufficiently, I do but stammer
    over it; words are wanting; would that I could know the language
    of the angels. If it were possible to a finite intelligence ever
    to exhaust the universe, it would still find the treasures of
    truth from eternity to eternity in contemplation of its author;
    and, after a thousand myriads of ages consumed in such meditation,
    it would only have touched the edges of that science of which it
    may be even the highest intelligences possess no more than the
    rudiments. There is no true reality except in Him who _is_, for
    all which is, is by Him, before being out of Him; there is but
    one existence, because there is but one Being whose essence it is
    to exist; and all which bears the inappropriate name of being had
    remained shut up in necessary existence as the consequence in the
    principal."[8]

Before concluding this chapter, let us remark that the deductions
of science concerning the sovereign part played by the sun in the
general economy of nature, are in perfect harmony with the religious
conceptions of the most ancient peoples. The worship of fire has
reigned from time immemorial in Asia, and especially in ancient Persia.
From the Persian shores sailed the first peoples, the Aryas, or Aryans,
who occupied and peopled Europe. Fire worship was the first religion
of ancient Asia. M. Burnouf dwells on this fact in his _Etudes sur la
Science des Religions_, from which we quote the following passages:

    "The men of that time (the Aryas) perceived that all the movements
    of inanimate things which take place on the earth's surface proceed
    from heat, which manifests itself, either under the form of fire
    which burns, or under the form of thunder, or under the form of
    wind; but the thunder is fire hidden in the cloud, and rises with
    it into the air;--fire which burns is, before it manifests itself,
    shut up in the vegetable matters which supply it with aliment; wind
    is produced when the air is stirred by heat, which rarefies it or
    condenses it on its withdrawal.

    "Vegetables, in their turn, derive their combustibility from the
    sun, which makes them grow, by storing up his heat in them, and
    the air is warmed by the rays of the sun, the same rays which
    reduced the terrestrial waters to invisible vapours, and then
    to thunder-bearing clouds. The clouds spread the rain, make the
    rivers, feed the sea which the agitated winds trouble. Thus all
    this mobility which animates nature around us is the work of heat,
    and heat proceeds from the sun, which is at the same time "the
    celestial traveller," and the universal motor.

    "Life also seemed to them to be closely allied to the idea of fire.
    The grand phenomenon of the accumulation of solar heat in plants, a
    phenomenon which science has since elucidated, was early perceived
    by the ancients. It is frequently pointed out in the Veddas in
    expressive terms. When they lighted the wood on the hearth they
    knew that they only 'forced' it to give out the fire which it
    had received from the sun. When their attention was directed to
    animals, the close bond which exists between heat and life, struck
    them in all its force; heat maintains life, they found no living
    animals in whom was life without heat; on the contrary, they saw
    that vital energy displayed itself in the proportion in which the
    animals shared in heat, and diminished in the same proportion. Life
    exists and perpetuates itself on the earth on three conditions
    only, that fire should penetrate the body under its three forms, of
    which one resides in the sun's rays, one in the ignited aliments,
    and the third in respiration, which is air renewed by motion. Now
    these two latter proceed, each after its own fashion, from the
    sun (sûrya); his celestial force is the universal motor, and the
    father of life: that which he first engendered, is the fire here
    below (agni) born of his rays, and his second eternal co-operator
    is air put in motion, which is also called wind, or spirit
    (vâyu)."[9]

The worship of the sun still exists among all the negro tribes which
inhabit the interior of Africa; it may even be said that it is the only
religion of the African tribes, and this religion has existed among
them in all times.

The ancient inhabitants of the new world had no other worship than
that of the sun. This fact is established by the historical archives
of the Indian races which we possess; such as the Aztecs or ancient
inhabitants of Mexico, and the _Incas_ or ancient Peruvians. Manco
Capac, who subjugated Peru, and imposed his own laws upon the country,
passed for the son of the sun.

Did not all these primitive people, whose customs extend back to the
origin of humanity, when they rendered religious homage to the sun,
obey a mysterious intuition, a secret voice of nature? However that may
be, it is very remarkable that the religious conceptions of the most
ancient people should be in such complete harmony with the most recent
and most authoritative deductions of modern science.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[8] "Palingénésie Philosophique," vol. ii. pp. 427 and following.

[9] "_Revue des Deux Mondes_," 15th April, 1868.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE TENTH.

WHAT ARE THE RELATIONS WHICH SUBSIST BETWEEN US, AND SUPERHUMAN BEINGS?


HAVING drawn a picture of the transmigrations of souls which, having
belonged to men, attain, according to our belief, to the sublime
dwelling-place of the solar spaces, we will now return to the
superhuman being, and endeavour to find out whether that being, who
immediately succeeds to man, who is a resuscitated man, incarnate in
a new body, and living in the plains of ether, can place himself in
relation with the inhabitants of the earth, notwithstanding the immense
space which divides them. We have already endeavoured (ch. iv.) to
discern the attributes of the superhuman being. Considering the number
and extent of the faculties with which we believe him to be endowed,
we cannot hesitate to accord to this mighty creature the power of
communicating with our earth, and of exerting a certain influence there.

But how and by what means can such a communication be established?
What is the agency whose existence we must presuppose, in order that
beings floating in the ethereal spaces can produce an impression here
below? What transcendent system of electric telegraphy does the
superhuman being employ? On this point we are absolutely ignorant, but
the fact that communication does exist between these beings and our
globe appears to us to be certain; a conviction which we base upon the
following grounds.

First, let us address ourselves to the popular feeling. As we have
already said, we are not afraid of invoking vulgar prejudices and
opinions, because they are almost always the expression of some great
moral truth. Observations repeated thousands of times, traditions
transmitted from generation to generation, and which have resisted the
control of time, without being either altered or destroyed, cannot
deceive. Only, when the people amidst whom this tradition has been
formulated and preserved, are unenlightened, they translate their
observations into a coarse form.

Let us inquire into the origin of those ghosts in which many civilized
people firmly believe! Take away the absurd white sheet, and the human
form with which the simple superstition of the peasantry invest them,
and you will find in ghosts the idea of communication between the souls
of the dead and the living, you will find the thought which we are
endeavouring to put before you in a scientific form.

This popular notion about ghosts has extended to persons who appear to
be educated and enlightened, but who are, in reality, as ignorant in
matters of philosophy as the simple peasants, and who are, in addition,
addicted to mysticism, which obscures their reason. We allude to
_spiritualists_.

The term _spiritualists_ is applied to the partisans of a new
superstition which sprung up in America and Europe in 1855, as a result
of the moral malady of _table-turning_. These good people imagine that
they can, by their will, and according to their fancy, cause the souls
of the dead, of great men, or of their own relatives and friends, to
descend to the earth. They evoke the soul of Socrates or Confucius,
as easily as that of a defunct relative, and they are so simple as to
imagine that these souls come at their call to converse with them. A
person who is called a _medium_ is the intermediary between the invoker
and the soul invoked. The medium, under the influence of an unconscious
and habitual hallucination, writes down on paper all the answers made
by the spirit, or rather he writes down everything that comes into
his own foolish head, imagining himself to be faithfully transmitting
messages from the other world. The people who listen to him take these
things, which are simply the thoughts of the ignorant medium, for
revelations from beyond the tomb.

In spiritualism there exists only one true and rational idea; it is the
possibility of man's placing himself in relation with the souls of the
dead; but the coarse means resorted to by the partisans of this mystic
doctrine, cause every enlightened and educated man to repudiate any
fellowship with them. We merely mention spiritualism in this place as a
vulgar and foolish phase of the popular belief in ghosts. It has higher
pretensions, but science and reason alike forbid us to admit them.

The fact of communication between superhuman beings and the dwellers
upon the earth being, it seems to us, proved, we shall now consider
how those superhuman beings and men who live on the earth or on the
other planets may be brought into relation with each other. It appears
to us that this communication is chiefly in action during sleep, and
through the medium of dreams. Sleep, that curious and ill-explained
state, is the condition of our being during which a portion of our
physiological functions, those which establish our connection with the
external world, are abolished, while the soul preserves a part of its
activity. In this condition, the body being seized by a kind of death,
the soul, on the contrary, continues to act, to feel, and to manifest
itself by the phenomena of dreams. Now, in the superhuman being, the
spiritual portion, the soul, dominates immensely over the material
portion. The superhuman being is, so to speak, all intelligence. Man,
when he is in the condition of sleep and dreaming, approaches nearer to
the superhuman being than when he is in a waking state; there is, then,
more resemblance, more natural affinity between them. Consequently
communications can be more easily established between these two beings
who are drawn together by analogy of condition.

There is a saying, the result of repeated observation, which is
logical and true. It is, _the night brings counsel_. Is not this as
much as to say that it is during the night we receive the secret
communications and the solitary advice of those beloved invisible
beings who watch over us, and inspire us with their supreme wisdom? It
is certain that when we have to make a decision, to unravel a thought,
it often happens that we fall asleep in the midst of perplexity and
uncertainty, and that the next day we awake, having taken our decision,
unravelled our thought, which explains the phrase, _the night brings
counsel_. Ancient times, and the middle ages, accorded an extraordinary
importance to dreams. They were considered to be sent by God, as His
warnings, hence the importance attached to their interpretation.
"During sleep," says Tertullian, "the honours which await men are
revealed to us; during sleep, remedies are indicated, thefts revealed,
treasures discovered."[10]

_Visions_ played a great part among Christians in mediæval times. It
was during sleep that saints, inspired persons, and devotees received
communications of an extraordinary order. We are far from believing
that it is during sleep and dreams only that we can feel the presence
and the influence of superhuman beings. There are few persons who have
not felt, while waking, an unaccountable influence of this kind. We
feel a soft, gentle impression, a sort of vague, mysterious push, which
excites a spontaneous resolution, a sudden inspiration, an unhoped-for
suggestion.

We must observe that all men are not recipients of these mysterious
impressions. The superhuman being cannot manifest himself except to
those whom he loves, and who remember him; to those whom he wishes to
protect against the dangers and difficulties of this terrestrial life.
A father, or a mother, snatched away from filial love by death, comes
to speak to the soul which remains and mourns here below. A son,
torn in the dawn of life from the tenderness of his parents, comes
to console them for his loss, to enlighten them with his advice, to
furnish them, by the inspiration of his lofty wisdom, with the means of
sustaining all the trials of this lower life. Two friends are united,
despite the barrier of the tomb. Two lovers, whom death has sundered,
are again brought together. An adored wife, taken by death from her
husband, reveals herself to his heart. Then all those sentiments of
mutual affection which subsisted between them spring up again; death,
which has appeared to sever the ties between these souls, does no more
than veil them from the eyes of strangers. Death is conquered; the
phantom is laid low, and we may cry with the prophet in the Scripture,
"Oh, Death! where is thy sting? Oh, Grave, where is thy victory?"

In order to receive these communications, a man must possess a pure
and noble mind, and he must have preserved the cultus of those whom he
has lost. A mother who has been indifferent to her child during his
life, or has forgotten him after his death, cannot expect to receive
secret manifestations from him for whom she has felt but little
tenderness. The friend from whose heart the image of the friend removed
by death has been effaced, must renounce such priceless manifestations.
The man who is abandoned to low and vicious instincts and perverse
inclinations, must not flatter himself, however faithfully he may
have preserved the memory of the dead, that these messages shall come
to him. A pure and noble creature only can communicate with these
privileged beings.

There exists in our hearts a moral force which no philosophy has been
able to explain, which no science has been able to analyze, which is
called _conscience_. Conscience is a sacred light burning within us,
which nothing can obstruct, obscure, or extinguish, and which has the
power of giving us sure and certain enlightenment on every occasion
in our lives. Conscience is infallible. Notwithstanding everything,
in spite of our real or apparent interest, at all times, and in all
places, speaking to the great and the small alike, to the powerful and
to the weak, it always teaches to discern good from evil, the honest
from the dishonest way. In our belief, conscience is the impression
transmitted to us by a beloved being, snatched from us by death. It is
a relative, a friend, who has left the earth, and who deigns to reveal
himself to us, that he may guide us in our actions, trace out the path
of safety for us, and labour for our good. Cowardly, perverse, base,
and lying men exist, of whom we say that _they have no conscience_.
They do not know how to distinguish good from evil; they are entirely
wanting in moral sense. It is because they have never loved any one,
and their souls, base and vile, are not worthy to be visited by any of
those superior beings, who only manifest themselves to men who resemble
them, or who have loved them. A man _without a conscience_ is, then,
one who is rendered unworthy, by the vicious essence of his soul, of
the lofty counsels and the protection of those who are no more.

Our readers will have perceived that this idea of a supreme and
invisible protector of man, who guides his heart, and enlightens
his reason, has already been formulated by the Christian religion,
which has derived it from Holy Scripture. It is the _Guardian Angel_,
a mysterious and poetic type, a seraphic creature, whom God has
charged to watch over the Christian, to guard him against snares, and
constantly to direct him to the ways of sanctity and virtue. We observe
this argument without having sought it. In short, we register our ideas
as they deduce themselves logically from each other, without any bias.
And when we find ourselves led into agreement with a dogma of the
Christian religion, we note that concord with pleasure.

We would ask those persons who have read these pages to question
themselves, to summon up their recollections, to reflect upon what
has passed around them, and we are convinced that they will discover
many facts in harmony with what we advance. The moral phenomenon of
the impressions made by the dead on the mind of the living who have
loved them, and who keep up the cultus of their memory, is one of those
truths which every one holds by intuition, and whose entire verity he
acknowledges when he finds it curtly formulated and put forward. We
will not give our readers second-hand information by invoking facts
of this kind which they may know; we can only recall a few which came
under our observation, briefly, as follows:

One of our friends, an Italian Count, B----, lost his mother nearly
forty years ago. He has assured us that he has been in communication
with her every day since, without intermission. He adds that he owes
the wise ordering of his life, his labours, his career, and the good
fortune which has always accompanied his enterprizes, to the constant
influence and secret counsels of his mother.

Dr. V----, a professed materialist, one who, according to the popular
phrase, _believes in nothing_, believes, nevertheless, in his mother.
Like Count B----, he lost her early, and has never ceased to feel her
presence. He told us that he is more frequently with his dead mother,
than he used to be when she was living. This professed apostle of
medical materialism has, without being aware of it, conversations with
an emancipated soul.

A celebrated journalist, M. R----, lost a son, twenty years of age, a
charming, gentle youth, a writer, and a poet. Every day M. R---- has an
intimate conversation with this son. A quarter of an hour of solitary
recollection admits him to direct communication with the beloved being
snatched away from his love.

M. L----, a barrister, maintains constant relations with a sister who,
when living, possessed, according to him, every human perfection, and
who never fails to guide her brother in every difficulty of his life,
great or small.

Another consideration suggests itself in support of the idea which
occupies us at present. It has been remarked that artists, writers, and
thinkers, after the loss of one beloved, have found their faculties,
talents, and inspirations increased. We might surmise that the
intellectual faculties of those whom they have loved have been added
to their own. I know a financier who is remarkable for his business
capacities. When he finds himself in a difficulty, he stops, without
troubling himself to seek for its solution. He waits, knowing that the
missing idea will come to him spontaneously, and, sometimes after days,
sometimes after hours, the idea comes, just as he has expected. This
happy and successful man has experienced one of the deepest sorrows
the heart can know; he has lost an only son, aged eighteen years, and
endowed with all the qualities of maturity, combined with the graces of
youth. Our readers may draw the conclusion for themselves.

This last example may instruct us concerning a peculiarity of the
superior manifestations which we are studying. We have just said
that sometimes a certain time, some days for instance, are required
for the production of the manifestations. The cause of this is that
the superhuman being, to whom they are due, has much difficulty in
putting himself in relation with the inhabitants of our globe. There
are many beings on the earth whom he loves, and whom he would fain
protect, and he cannot be in two different places at the same time.
We may even suppose that the difficulties which human beings feel in
putting themselves in relation with us, added to the spectacle of the
sufferings and misfortunes which overwhelm their friends here below,
are the causes of the only sorrows which trouble their existence, so
marvellously happy in other respects. Absolute happiness exists nowhere
in the world, and destiny has the power to let fall one drop of gall
into the cup of happiness quaffed by the dwellers in ether, in their
celestial abode.

Persons who receive communications from the dead have remarked that
these communications sometimes cease quite suddenly. A celebrated
actress, now retired from the stage, had manifest communications with
a person whom she had lost by a tragical death. These communications
abruptly ceased. The soul of the dead friend whom she mourned warned
her that their intercourse was about to cease. The assigned reason
serves to explain why such relation cannot be continuously maintained.
The superhuman being who was in relations with the terrestrial
person had already risen in rank in the celestial hierarchy, he had
accomplished a new metamorphosis, and he could no longer correspond
with the earth.

Among the French peasantry communication with the dead is a general
habit. In the country death does not involve the lugubrious ideas which
accompany it among the dwellers in cities. People love and cultivate
the memory of those whom they have loved, they hold as most happy those
whom the favour of Providence has early removed from the misfortunes,
the failures, the bitterness of terrestrial life, they call on them,
they confide in them, and the dead, grateful for this pious memory of
them, respond to the simple prayers of these hearts. All the Orientals
have that serene aspiration towards death which in Europe exists
exclusively among country people. The Mussulmans love to invoke death,
to spread the idea of death everywhere. Every one knows the melancholy
proverb of the Arabs, "It is better to be seated than standing; it
is better to be lying down than seated; it is better to be dead than
living."

The preceding chapter terminated with a quotation from Charles
Bonnet, the first of the naturalists who discerned the doctrine of
the plurality of existences above the globe. We shall terminate
this chapter with a quotation from another naturalist philosopher,
a contemporary of Charles Bonnet, who defended that doctrine very
cleverly. Dupont de Nemours, in his _Philosophie de l'Univers_,
expresses himself thus, on the subject of the communications which
may be established between us, and the superior beings, invisible
inhabitants of other worlds, whom he calls _angels_, or _genii_.

    "Why," said Dupont, "have we no evident knowledge of these beings,
    the necessity, convenience, and analogy of whom strike our
    reflective faculties which only can indicate them? of those beings
    who must surpass us in perfections, in faculties, in power, as much
    as we surpass the lower animals and the plants?--who must have a
    hierarchy as various, as finely graduated as that which we admire
    among the living and intelligent beings over which we dominate,
    and which are subordinate to us?--several others of whom may be
    our companions on earth, as we are of animals which, destitute
    of sight, hearing, and the sense of smell, of hands and of feet,
    do not know what we are even when we are doing them good, or
    harm?--some of whom are perhaps travelling from globe to globe, or,
    more excellent still, from one solar system to another, more easily
    than we go from Brest to Madagascar?

    "It is because we have neither such organs or such senses as would
    be necessary to enable our intelligence to communicate with them.

    "Thus do the worlds embrace the worlds, and thus are classified
    intelligent beings all composed of matter which God has more or
    less richly organized and vivified.

    "Such is the probability, and, speaking to vigorous minds which do
    not shrink from novel suggestions, I will dare to say that such is
    the truth.

    "Man is capable of calculating that it is frequently for his
    own interest to be useful to other species; and, which is more
    valuable, more moral, and more amiable, he is capable of rendering
    them services for his own satisfaction, and without any other
    motive than the pleasure which it affords him to do so.

    "That which we do for our lower brethren, we, whose intelligence
    is circumscribed, and whose goodness is very limited, the genii,
    the angels,--permit me to employ terms in general use to designate
    beings whom I only divine but do not know,--these beings who are so
    much more worthy than we, ought to do, and doubtless do, the same
    for us, with much more beneficence, frequency, and extent on all
    occasions which concern them.

    "We know perfectly well that these intelligences exist, and it is
    of little importance to us whether they are, as some persons think,
    formed of a sort of matter, composed of mixed material, or not.
    Their quota of intelligence is very brilliant, very remarkable,
    and evident; in strong contrast with the properties of inanimate
    nature, which can be measured, weighed, calculated, and analyzed.

    "In order to comprehend what is the action of superhuman
    intelligences, who can only be known to us by induction, reason,
    and comparison between what we ourselves are to even the most
    intelligent animals, which are efficiently served by us, but have
    not the smallest idea of us, we must pursue analogy farther. These
    intelligences are above us, and out of the reach of our senses
    only because they are endowed with a greater number of senses, and
    with a more developed and more active life. These beings are more
    worthy than we are, they have many more organs and faculties, they
    must therefore, in employing their disposable faculties according
    to their will, just as we employ ours according to our will, be
    able to dispose, to work, to manœuvre all inanimate matter, and to
    do all this among themselves, and also with respect to intelligent
    beings who are their inferiors, with much more energy, rapidity,
    enlightenment, and wisdom than we possess, we who nevertheless do
    it for the beasts subordinate to us. It is, then, in harmony with
    the laws and the ways of nature that the superior intelligences
    should have power to render us, when it pleases them, most
    important services of which we are quite ignorant.

    "These unknown protectors who observe us, unperceived, have not our
    imperfections, and must prize all that is good and beautiful in
    itself more highly than we can.

    "We cannot, therefore, hope to please intelligences of a superior
    grade by actions which men themselves would condemn as odious.
    We cannot flatter ourselves with a hope of deceiving them, as we
    may deceive men, by exterior hypocrisy which only renders crime
    more despicable. They can behold our most secret actions, they can
    overhear our soliloquies, they can penetrate our unspoken thoughts.
    We know not in how many ways they can read what is passing in our
    hearts, we, whose coarseness, poverty, and unskilfulness limit our
    means of knowing to touch, sight, hearing, and sometimes analysis
    and conjecture.

    "A celebrated Roman wished to have a house built, which should
    be open to the sight of the citizens. This house exists, and we
    inhabit it. Our neighbours are the chiefs and the magistrates of
    the great republic, who are invested with right and power to punish
    even our intentions, which are no mystery to them. And those who
    most completely penetrate them in their smallest variations, in
    their lightest inflections, are the most powerful and the most wise.

    "Let us then try, in so far as it depends on us, to keep in accord
    with those in comparison with whom we are so small, and, above all,
    let us understand our littleness. If it be very important to us
    to admit to our complete friendship, to our entire confidence, to
    our constant society, none but men of the first rank of mind and
    character--if the sweet competition of affection, zeal, goodness,
    and capacity which is always going on between them and us,
    contributes to our improvement every day, what shall we not gain by
    giving them adjuncts, so to speak, higher and more perfect, who are
    not subject, either to our ignoble interests, our passions, or our
    errors, and before whom we cannot but blush. They do not vary, they
    do not abandon us, they never go away, so soon as we are alone we
    find them. They accompany us in travel, in exile, in prison, in a
    dungeon; they are always floating above the peaceful and reflecting
    brain.

    "We can question them, and every time we do so, we may be sure that
    they reply. Why should they not do so? Our absent friends render us
    such service, but only those of their number who inspire us with
    great respect. We can even experience something of the kind with
    regard to an imaginary personage, if he presents himself to our
    minds as uniting several good and heroic qualities. How often, in
    difficult circumstances and in the midst of the strife of different
    passages, I have asked myself,--In this case, what would Charles
    Grandison have done? What would Quesnay have thought? What would
    Turgot have approved of? What advice would Lavoisier have given me?
    How shall I gain the approval of the angels? What line of action
    will be most conformable to the order, the laws and the beneficent
    views of the wise and majestic King of the universe? For the
    homage, the aspirations of a soul eager to do good, and careful to
    avoid debasement, may also be raised to God, in salutary and pious
    invocation."[11]

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[10] "Liber de animâ," ch. xlvi

[11] Pezzani: "_Pluralité des Existences de l'âme_," pp. 206-210.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE ELEVENTH.

WHAT IS AN ANIMAL?--THE SOULS OF ANIMALS.--MIGRATIONS OF SOULS THROUGH
THE BODIES OF ANIMALS.


HITHERTO we have left animals out of our plan, although, owing to their
immense number, and their influence upon the places which they inhabit,
they play a highly important part in the world. It is now time to
define the place in nature which our system assigns to them.

Have animals souls? Yes, in our belief, animals have souls; but among
animals of all classes the soul is far from being endowed with an
equal degree of activity. The activity of the soul is different in
the crocodile and in the dog, in the eagle and in the grasshopper.
In inferior animals, zoophytes and mollusca, the soul exists only
in the condition of a germ. This germ develops itself, and becomes
amplified according to the elevation of animals in the series of
organic perfection. The sponge and the coral are zoophytes (animal
plants). In these beings, the characteristics of animality, although
they exist very positively, are obscure and hardly discernible.
Voluntary motion, which is the distinctive characteristic formerly
demanded for animals, is wanting in them; they are motionless, like the
plants. Nevertheless, their nutrition is the same as that of animals,
therefore they belong to the animal world. We cannot, however, grant
to them a complete soul, but only the germ, the originating point of
a soul. Among mollusca (such as marine and land shells, the oyster,
the snail, &c.), the motions and the conduct of life are dictated by
the will, and that suffices, in our belief, to reveal their possession
of a soul, imperfect and very elementary, but certainly existent.
Among articulated animals, the insects especially, will, sensibility,
acts which denote reason, deliberation, and action resulting from
deliberation, are numerous, and recurrent at every moment. They denote
intelligence already active.

The smallness of the bodies of these animals is not an argument to
be used against the fact of their intelligence. In nature nothing is
great, and nothing is little; the monstrous whale and the invisible
gnat are equal in the presence of its laws; both one and the other
have received as their inheritance the degree of intelligence which is
suitable to its need, and it is not by the scale of grandeur that we
must measure the degrees of mind among living creatures. Every one is
familiar with the prodigies of intelligence performed by associated
bees, and by the ants, in their camps and hills. The habits of these
two species of insects, which have been studied and expounded only
in our age, fill us with wonder, almost with awe. But the bees and
the ants do not constitute an exception among the insect class. It
is very probable that in the entire class intelligence exists to the
same degree as in bees and ants, for we do not see why two species of
hymenopterous insects should exclusively possess this privilege, to
the exclusion of other species of the same order, and all the other
orders of the insect class. The fact is, that the bee has been studied
profoundly, because that insect is an object of agricultural industry,
and that, in consequence, it was for man's interest to understand
its customs. This accounts for the successful surmounting of the
difficulties attendant on the study of bees.

We may add, that the observer to whom our knowledge of bees is due,
Pierre Huber, of Geneva, who published his fine works at the end of the
last century, was blind, and that he was obliged to have recourse for
all his observations to the eyes of an illiterate servant, François
Burnens, which is a proof that this kind of study was not inordinately
difficult.

The habits of other species of insects, still unknown to us, must,
according to this, conceal marvels quite as great as those which the
Hubers have revealed in the case of bees and ants.

Let us conclude that insects have souls, since intelligence is a
faculty of the soul.

We may apply the same reasoning to fishes, reptiles, and birds.
In these three classes of animals intelligence progresses towards
perfection, the faculty of reason is manifest, and the degree of
intelligence seems to march at a progressive rate from the fish to the
reptile, and from the reptile to the bird.

In mammiferous animals we observe a degree of advance in intelligence
upon the classes of animals we have just named. But, ought we to
calculate the degree of intelligence of the different mammifers
according to the order in which naturalists have classed these animals?
Ought we to say that the strength of intelligence increases as we
follow the zoological distribution of Cuvier, that is to say, that it
rises from cetacea to carnivora, from carnivora to pachyderms, and from
pachyderms to ruminants, &c.? No, evidently not.

It would be absurd to apportion the intellect of animals to the place
which they occupy in zoological classification. We do not possess
any certain method by which to form such an appreciation in detail.
We remain within the terms of a very acceptable philosophical thesis
in advancing our belief, in a general manner, that the intellectual
faculties of animals augment from the mollusk to the mammifer,
following almost exactly the progressive scale of zoological
classification, but to enter into the peculiarities of these orders
would be to expose ourselves to certain contradiction. In zoophytes the
soul exists as a germ; this germ develops itself and grows in mollusca,
and then in articulated creatures and fishes. The soul acquires certain
faculties, more or less obscure and dim, when it enters the body of a
reptile, and these faculties are manifestly augmented in the body of
a bird. The soul is provided with far more perfected faculties when
it reaches the body of a mammifer. Such is the general outline of our
system.

Let us now follow this system out to the end. In the first pages of
this book, we have advanced our theory that the soul of man, at the
close of its terrestrial existence, passes into the planetary ether,
where it is lodged in the body of a new being, superior to man in
intelligence and morality. If this theory be correct, if this migration
of the soul of man into the body of the superhuman being be real,
analogy obliges us to establish the same relation between the animals,
and then between the animals and man.

We firmly believe that a transmigration, a transmission of souls, or
of the germs of souls, throughout the entire series of the classes of
animals takes place. The germ of a conscious soul which existed in
the zoophyte and the mollusk passes, on the death of those beings,
into the body of an articulated animal. In this first stage of its
journey, the animate germ strengthens and ameliorates itself. The
nascent soul acquires some rudimentary faculties. When this rudiment of
a conscious soul passes out of the body of an articulated animal into
that of a fish or a reptile, it undergoes a new degree of elaboration,
and its power increases. When, escaping from the body of the reptile
or the fish, it is lodged in the form of the bird it receives other
impressions, which become the origin of new perfections. The bird
transmits the spiritual element, already much modified and aggrandized,
to the mammifer, and then, the soul, having again gained power, and the
number of its faculties being augmented, passes into the body of man.

It is probable that in the case of the inferior animals many animate
germs are united to form the superior being. For instance, the
principal animators of a certain number of little zoophytes, of those
beings who live in the waters by millions, may, probably, on quitting
the bodies of those beings, be united in one in order to form the soul
of a single individual of a superior order.

It would be impossible to specify from what particular mammifer the
soul must escape, in order to penetrate a human organism. It would
be impossible to decide whether, before reaching man the soul has
successively traversed the bodies of several mammifers, of more or less
complicated organism; if it has passed through the body of a cetacian,
then of a carnivorous creature, then of a quadrumane, the last term of
the animal series. A pretension to detail would be a stumbling block to
such a system as ours.

To maintain, for instance, that our soul is transmitted to us by the
quadrumane, would be incorrect. The intelligence of the quadrumane is
inferior to that of many animals more highly placed than he in the
zoological scale. Apes, which compose only one family in the very
numerous order of quadrumana, are animals of middling intelligence.
They are malicious, cunning and gross, and possess only a few features
of the human face, and even these belong to but few species. All the
other quadrumanes are bestial in the highest degree.

It is not, therefore, in the quadrumana that we must look for the
soul to be transmitted to man. But there are animals endowed with
intelligence which is both powerful and noble, who would have a
title to be accredited with such an honour. Those animals would vary
according to the inhabited parts of the earth. In Asia, it may be
that the wise, grave, and noble elephant is the depositary of the
spiritual principle which is to pass into man. In Africa, the lion,
the rhinoceros, the numerous ruminants which fill the forests may,
perhaps, be the ancestors of the human race. In America, the horse,
the wild ranger of the pampas, the dog, the faithful friend, the
devoted companion of man, everywhere are, it may be, charged with
the elaboration of the spiritual principle, which, transmitted to
the child, is destined to develop itself, to increase in that child,
and become the human soul. A writer in our time has called the dog a
candidate for humanity. He little knew how true his definition is.

It will be urged, in objection, that man cannot have received the soul
of an animal, because he has not the smallest remembrance of such a
genealogy. To this we reply that the faculty of memory is wanting
in the animal, or is so fugitive that we may consider it _nil_. The
child can therefore receive from the animal only a soul unendowed with
memory. And, in fact, the child itself is totally destitute of that
faculty. At the moment of his birth he differs not at all from the
animal as regards the faculties of his soul. It is not until twelve
months have elapsed that the soul makes itself evident in him, and it
is afterwards perfected by education. How, therefore, should the child
remember an existence prior to his birth? Have we any memory of the
time which we passed in our mother's womb?

Let us observe here that the progressive order which we have indicated
for the migration of soul through the bodies of different animals,
is precisely that which nature followed in the first creation of the
organized beings which people our globe. It will be seen in ch. xiv.,
pp. 196-200, that plants zoophytes, mollusca, and articulated animals
are the first living beings which appeared on our globe. After them
came the fishes, and then the reptiles. After the reptiles birds, and
at a later period mammifers appeared. Thus our system responds to the
routine which nature has followed in the creation of plants and animals.

Such is the system which we have conceived as explanatory of the part
assigned to animals on our globe. The basis of this system, as will be
seen, is the intelligence accorded to animals. We entirely repel the
generally held opinion, that beasts do not possess intelligence, and
that it is replaced by an obscure faculty which is called instinct. But
this theory gives no reason, it merely puts a word in the place of an
explanation. By a simple phrase people imagine they resolve one of the
great problems of nature. The timid and conventional philosophy of our
time has hitherto accommodated itself to this method of eluding great
difficulties, but the moment now appears to have come for a deeper
study of the problems of nature, and for no longer remaining content
with the substitution of words for things.

There was no hesitation in ancient times about according intelligence
to animals. Aristotle and Plato expressed themselves quite clearly
on this point: they admitted no doubt of the reasoning powers of
beasts. The most celebrated modern philosophers, Leibnitz, Locke, and
Montaigne; the most eminent naturalists, Charles Bonnet, Georges Leroy,
Dupont de Nemours, Swammerdam, Réaumur, &c., granted intelligence
to animals. Charles Bonnet understood the language of many animals,
and Dupont de Nemours has given us a translation of the "_Chansons
du Rossignol_" and the "_Dictionnaire de la Langue des Corbeaux_."
It is, therefore, difficult to understand how a contrary thesis
became prevalent in this age, how Descartes and Buffon, the declared
adversaries of animal intelligence, have succeeded in turning the scale
in favour of their ideas.

Descartes regarded animals purely as machines, as automata provided
with mechanical apparatus. It would be difficult to surpass our great
philosopher in absurdity when he treats of these animal machines.[12]
_Equidem bonus dormitat Descartes._ The systematic errors of Buffon on
the same subject are well known.

The partizans of Descartes and of Buffon have popularized the idea
of instinct put in the place of intelligence, of the word replacing
the thing. But, in simple truth, what difference is there between
intelligence and instinct? None. These two words only represent two
different degrees of the same faculty. Instinct is simply a weaker
degree of intelligence. If we read the writings of naturalists
of this country who have studied the question, Frederick Cuvier
(brother to George Cuvier), and Flourens,[13] who has but commented
upon Frederick Cuvier's book on the more profound work of a learned
contemporary writer, M. Fée of Strasbourg,[14] we shall easily find
that no fundamental distinction between intelligence and instinct
can be established, and that the whole secret of our philosophers and
naturalists consists in calling the intelligence of animals, which is
weaker than ours, _instinct_.

It is, then, the pride of mankind which has attempted to place a
barrier, which in reality has no existence, between us and the animal.
The intelligence of the animal is less developed than that of the man,
because his wants are fewer, his organs are less highly finished, and
because the sphere of his activity is more limited, but that is all.
And sometimes, even, we must not forget that the animal exceeds the
man in intelligence. Look at the rude and brutal waggoner, beside
his good and docile horse, which he mercilessly beats and abuses,
while his faithful auxiliary fulfils his task with patient exactness,
and say, is it not the master who is the brute, and the animal who
is the intelligent being? In kindness--that sweet emanation of the
soul--animals often excel men. Every one knows the horrid story of the
man who carried his dog to a river to drown him, but who fell into the
water himself, and was on the point of drowning. The faithful companion
whom he had flung in to die was there; he swam to his master, and
dragged him into safety. Then the dog's master, making his footing sure
this time, seized the creature who had just rescued him, and drowned
him.

According to our system, the human soul comes from an animal belonging
to the superior orders. After having undergone, in the body of this
animal, a suitable degree of perfecting and elaboration, it incarnates
itself in the body of a newly-born child of the human race.

We said, in a former chapter, "Death is not a termination, but a
change; we do not die, we experience a metamorphosis." We must add to
this, "Birth is not a beginning, it is a consequence. To be born is not
to begin, it is to continue a prior existence."

There is not, therefore, properly speaking, either birth or death for
the human species; there is only a continuous succession of existences,
extending from the visible world through space, and connecting each
with those worlds which are hidden from our view.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[12] This question is specially considered in Descartes' "_Discours sur
la Méthode._"

[13] "_De l'Instinct et de l'Intelligence des Animaux_," Paris, 1861.

[14] "_Etudes Philosophiques sur l'Instinct et l'Intelligence des
Animaux_," Strasbourg, 1853.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE TWELFTH.

WHAT IS THE PLANT?--THE PLANT IS SENSIBLE.--HOW DIFFICULT IT IS TO
DISTINGUISH PLANTS FROM ANIMALS.--THE GENERAL CHAIN OF LIVING BEINGS.


LINNÆUS has said, "The plant lives; the animal lives and feels;
man lives, feels, and thinks." This aphorism represented the state
of science in the times of Linnæus. But since the year 1778, that
is to say, since the death of the great botanist, Upsal, natural
science has progressed, botany and zoology have been enriched with
innumerable facts and fundamental discoveries, so that the Linnæan
formula no longer represents the present condition of the sciences
of organization. We believe that the following proposition may be
truthfully substituted: "The plant lives and feels; the animal and man
live, feel, and think."

To accord sensibility to plants, is to transgress the classic laws of
natural history, so that the considerations and facts which appear to
us to justify this proposition ought to be most carefully stated.

1. The plant feels the sensations of pleasure and pain. Cold, for
instance, impresses it painfully; it may be seen to contract itself,
as if shivering, under the influence of a sudden or excessive fall of
the temperature. An abnormal excess of temperature evidently causes
it to suffer; when the heat is very great, leaves may be observed to
hang down on the stems, curl up, and appear to wither; when the cool of
the evening comes, the leaves rise up again, and the plant resumes its
appearance of placid health. Drought also occasions manifest suffering
to plants. Those who study nature with loving attention know that when,
after a long period of drought, a plant is watered it exhibits signs of
pleasure. On the other hand, a wounded plant, one from which a branch
has been cut, appears to experience pain. A pathological liquid exudes
from the wound, like the blood from a hurt animal; the plant is sick,
and will die, if it do not receive the necessary succour. Thus persons
who love plants will not cut flowers off their stems, they prefer to
inhale their perfume, and contemplate their brilliant colours, on the
stalk, without inflicting a painful mutilation upon the beautiful
creatures which they admire.

The sensitive plant, if touched by the fingers, or even struck by a
current of harsh air, folds up its leaves, and contracts itself. The
botanist, Desfontaines, saw a sensitive plant, which he was bringing
home in a carriage, contract its leaves while the vehicle was in
motion, and expand them when it stopped, thus affording a proof that
the movement distressed the plant. A drop of acid, or acrid liquid,
placed on a leaf of a sensitive plant, will occasion a similar
constriction. All vegetables present an analogous phenomenon. Their
tissues contract when brought in contact with irritant substances. By
rubbing the tips of a lettuce, the juice may be made to exude.

Vegetable sensibility exists by the same right as animal sensibility,
since electricity kills plants as it kills animals, since narcotic
poisons kill or stupefy plants as they kill and stupefy animals. One
can narcotize a plant by watering it with opium dissolved in water, and
MM. Gopport and Macaire have discovered that hydrocyanic acid kills
plants as rapidly as animals.

2. Plants sleep at night. During the day they develop their vital
activity, and when the night comes, or when they are in darkness, their
leaves assume another position, that of repose; they fold themselves
up. In the day-time, the upper surface of the leaf is turned to the
sky, and the under surface towards the earth; this under surface,
pierced with holes, or _stomata_, is the part through which absorption
and exhalation take place, while the upper surface, in which there
are no such openings, is only a sort of screen for the protection of
the absorbing surface. It is therefore easy to understand that the
horizontal attitude of the leaves is a position of vital activity, and
that the refolding of those leaves during the night indicates a state
of repose. It is precisely the same case with ourselves, when during
the night we indulge our muscles, kept on the stretch during the day,
with complete relaxation.

The _sleep of plants_, said to have been discovered by Linnæus, and
which was certainly described for the first time in one of Upsal's
_Thèses de Botanique_, and thoroughly elucidated by Linnæus, is not a
phenomenon limited to certain families of plants. There are very few
vegetables which, during the night, or in darkness, do not fold their
leaves, and which do not present a different appearance by day and by
night. The Sensitive is the classic plant selected for its exhibition
of this phenomenon in all its intensity; but this small leguminous
creature only presents us with an exaggeration of a fact which exists
in a lesser degree among almost all vegetables with light leaves. We
may quote the following passage from a former work on the subject of
this phenomenon.

    "The sleep of plants vaguely resembles that of animals. It is a
    remarkable circumstance that the slumbering leaf appears to wish
    to return to the epoch of its infancy. It folds itself almost as
    it was when in the bud, before it burst out, as it was in the
    lethargic sleep of winter, sheltered beneath its strong scales, or
    wrapped up in its warm down. One would think that the plant was
    trying every night to resume the position which it occupied in its
    early time, just as the sleeping animal gathers himself together,
    and folds his limbs as they were folded in his mother's womb."[15]

Is it possible to deny the possession of sensibility to creatures
which give us alternate sign of repose and of activity, and who have
the power of accommodating themselves to various external impressions?
Fatigue cannot possibly be anything but the consequence of the
experience of an impression.

3. Numerous physiological functions are fulfilled by plants as well
as by animals; and when we consider the number and variety of these
functions, it is difficult to understand how, if animals be, as the
common consent of mankind declares them, possessed of sensibility,
plants can be destitute of it. An ancient philosopher defined plants
as _animals with roots_. We shall see, on examining the variety of
functions performed by vegetables, whether this philosopher was not a
far-seeing, wise man.

It would be difficult to name any function with which the animal
is invested that the vegetable does not possess in a less degree.
_Respiration_, for instance, is equally a property of plants and of
animals. Among the latter, respiration consists in the absorption of
the oxygen of the air and the emission of carbonic acid gas and watery
vapour; among plants it consists in the emission of carbonic acid gas
and watery vapour during the night, and during the day, under the
influence of sunlight, of the emission of oxygen proceeding from the
decomposition of carbonic acid. The function is evidently of the same
nature in both the natural kingdoms.

_Exhalation_ is a function common to vegetables and to animals. By
the stomata of leaves, as by the pores of the skin of animals, watery
vapour and various gases, according to the vital phenomena which take
place in the interior of the tissues, are constantly being disengaged.

_Absorption_ takes place in both kingdoms. If you pour water on the
lower surface of a leaf, you will see that it will be absorbed with
great rapidity. Sprinkle a bouquet of flowers with water, and the
freshness of the withered blossoms will revive. Absorption is even more
active in vegetable than in animal tissues.

The circulation of liquids in the interior of plants is accomplished
by a complicated system of channels and vessels of every order and of
every calibre, absorbent vessels, exhalant vessels.

Nothing is more varied than the disposition of these channels in the
interior of plants, and their multiplicity indicates a circulatory
function as complicated as that of animals.

It is then evident that vegetables have the same physiological
functions as animals, but as yet we know those functions very
imperfectly. It is very strange that while animal physiology is so far
advanced in our day, vegetable physiology is almost in its infancy.
We know very well how the digestion of food takes place in man and
animals, we know how our blood circulates in a double system of
vessels, called arteries and veins, and we know the central organ, the
heart, through which the two liquids are carried by this double system.
We see and we touch the organs of sensation and motion, that is to say,
the nerves. More than this, we distinguish the nerves which produce
sensation from those which rule motion. We know that the centre of
nervous action in man and animals is double; that its seat is equally
in the brain and in the spinal marrow.

Briefly, science has shed its brightest light on all the functions
belonging to animal organization, while vegetable physiology remains in
obscurity. Notwithstanding the labours of naturalists within the last
two centuries, we cannot explain the life of plants with certainty.
We cannot positively state how the sap, which is vegetable blood,
circulates in their channels. We do not even know with precision
whether a tree grows from the outside to the inside, or from the inside
to the outside. All the physiological functions in the vegetable
kingdom are hidden from us by a thick veil, and it is only by lifting
a corner of it with great difficulty that we can catch a few gleams
of light through the obscurity. Nevertheless, all unexplained though
they be as yet, physiological functions do exist in plants. Considering
these numerous functions, it appears entirely impossible that plants
should not have received the gift of sensibility. It is difficult to
believe, as Linnæus would have us believe, that they possess life, and
nothing more.

We shall be told that vegetables have no nerves, and that in the
absence of every organ of sensation, we cannot accord them the faculty
of sensibility. But, we reply, that the imperfect state of vegetable
anatomy and physiology forbids us to come to any conclusion touching
the existence or the absence of nerves in plants. We are convinced that
these organs exist, but that botanists do not know how to discern them,
or have no means of distinguishing between them and other organs.

4. The manner of multiplication and reproduction among plants and
animals is so analogous, that it seems impossible, when we consider
this extraordinary resemblance in the most important functions, to
refuse sensibility to plants, and accord it to animals.

Let us consider the various modes of reproduction proper to vegetables.
Reproduction, or rather the fecundation which precedes it, is executed
in certain vegetables, by means of an apparatus of the same typical
form as that of the animal kingdom. It is composed of a male organ,
the stamen, which contains the impregnating dust, pollen, and of a
female organ, the ovary, supported by a stalk, the pistil. The pollen
impregnates the ovula contained in the grains of pollen in the ovary,
as the seed of the male impregnates the ovula contained in the egg of
the animal. In both cases the fruit of the impregnation develops itself
afterwards with the aid of warmth and time. The vegetable egg grows and
ripens, just as the animal egg grows and ripens.

We may add that the analogy between the modes of reproduction, in the
two kingdoms, animal and vegetable, does not limit itself to these
conditions of likeness; we may observe resemblances in the specialities
of the function. Particular vitality, a turgid state of the tissues,
accompanied by elevation of the local temperature, occur in the case
of certain plants at the moment of impregnation, especially in the
species of the family of Aroïdes. On placing a thermometer, at that
time, in the great floral covering of the Arums, an excess of from 1°
to 2° on the temperature of the surrounding air will be denoted, an
extraordinary fact in vegetable life, for vegetables are always colder
than the external air. How can we believe that the plant in which this
excitement takes place has no feeling of its own condition? The plant,
like the animal, has its seasons of love, can it be that it has no
consciousness of them? Are we to believe that the plant which becomes
warm, in which life rises at the moment of impregnation, has no more
sensation than a stone? Such is not our opinion. We cannot understand
life without sensibility--the one appears to us to be the indication of
the other.

The analogy between the plant and the animal in their functions
of reproduction is nowhere more evident or more curious than in a
vegetable production which abounds in the waters of the Rhône, and has
received the name of _Vallisneria spiralis_. In this plant the male
and female organs are placed on different branches of the same plant.
The female flowers are fixed to the ground by long, twisted, spiral
stalks. But, when seeding time comes, the spirals of the stems unroll
themselves, and the female flowers come up to the surface of the water
and spread themselves out. The male flowers, not being placed like the
female on elastic stems, cannot come up to the surface of the water.
What do they do? They burst through their covering, and float around
their females on the surface of the water. After that the current
carries away the detached male flowers; and the female stem folds
itself up again, and sinks to the bottom of the river, there to ripen
its impregnated ovules.

The function of reproduction in plants is rich in conclusions in
support of our thesis. The plants called phanerogamous are not
reproduced only by impregnation by means of the visible sexual organs,
the pistil and the stamen, they are also multiplied by grafts, buds,
and cuttings. Cryptogamous plants, which have no sexual organs,
are multiplied either by effects which detach themselves from the
individual plant at a certain period of its vegetation as we see
in the case of fungi, algæ, mushrooms, &c., or by fragments of the
individual itself, which, being thrown into the ground, germinate and
multiply themselves.

Animals, in their several classes, represent all these modes of
reproduction; there is not one which does not exist among them. Animals
are not reproduced by eggs only, either interior or exterior, and by
living young ones, they are equally multiplied, like vegetables, by
offsets, by cuttings, and by ingraftment.

Multiplication by offsets may be observed in the fresh-water polype.
Little buds which grow and lengthen come out of the body of this
animal. While the bud is lengthening, he throws off other and smaller
offsets, which throw off still smaller ones. All these are so many
little polypes, which derive their nourishment from the principal
polype. Having attained a certain size, these offsets separate
themselves from the primitive individual, and constitute so many new
polypes. Coral multiplies itself in the same manner. From the principal
branch spring secondary branches which have originated in a bud or
shoot, and these branches, inserting themselves into the chief stem,
form new individuals. Thus the exterior aspect of the coral resembles a
ramified tree rather than an animal.

Madrepores, another kind of zoophytes, resemble trees so closely, that
for centuries they were supposed to be marine plants; they too, like
coral, are reproduced by offsets.

Multiplication by cuttings is seen in the fresh-water polype. Take a
fresh-water polype, and cut it into as many fragments as you choose.
Each of these fragments, left to itself, will become a polype. These
new individuals may be in their turn cut into pieces, which will
produce as many new ones. This is multiplication by cuttings, exactly
similar to the process in plants, so that the generation of fresh-water
polypes does not differ from that of one of our fruit-trees. It is not
only the entire polype which, thus cut to fragments, furnishes a new
polype; the skin of this animal can also produce one new individual or
several. Is not this a vegetable ingraftment?

A similar generation by ingraftment is to be observed in another
instance, in the case of the fresh-water polype. Take different
portions of the same polype, or those of different polypes, and join
them at the ends, or lay them upon one another, and you will combine
them so closely that they reciprocally nourish each other, and
ultimately form only one individual. Here is vegetable ingraftment
carried out in an animal.

5. Other points of resemblance exist between plants and animals. If
they are not generally remarked, it is because the authors of the
classics of natural history do not direct the attention of the reader
to these facts. We are about to supplement their silence, and to bring
the analogies between the two natural kingdoms into view.

Firstly, there exists in both a common and equally astonishing
fecundity. Among plants, as among animals, one individual can give
birth to thousands of individuals like himself. Vegetables are even
more fertile than the superior animals. Trees produce every year, and
sometimes for a century. Mammiferous animals, birds, and reptiles
produce infinitely less than trees; their pregnancy is less frequent,
and takes place during a certain period in the life of the animal only.
The elm produces every year more than 300,000 seeds, and this may
continue for a hundred years. Fish and insects approach most nearly to
trees in fecundity. A tench spawns 10,000 eggs yearly, a carp 20,000.
Among insects, a female bee produces from 40,000 to 50,000 eggs. To
these animals we may compare, among vegetables, the poppy, the fern,
the mustard plant, which produce incalculable quantities of seeds. We
must not forget, besides, that vegetables multiply themselves in many
ways, whereas each animal possesses but one mode of reproduction.

What we wish to establish, what is evident, is that among both animals
and plants fecundity is equal, and equally prodigious. From the point
of view of this analogy, we may also quote the size of the species,
which is extremely variable in both kingdoms, because both produce at
the same time giant species and dwarf species. Among animals, there
are some of monstrous size, such as the whale, the cachalot, and the
elephant, such as the gigantic reptiles of the ancient world, the
ichthyosaurus, which was longer than the whale, the megalosaurus and
the iguanadon, which were as large as the elephant.

To these colossi of the animal kingdom, we may oppose the colossi
of the vegetable kingdom; the monstrous baobab gourd, which covers
hundreds of square yards with its shade, the elm, whose trunk may
grow to the size of a whale's girth, the _Eucalyptus globulus_, an
Australian tree which is being acclimatized in Algeria and in the south
of France, the _Sequioœa gigantea_, the giant of Californian forests.

If the two kingdoms of nature have their colossi, they have also their
dwarfs, and their infinitely little. There are cryptogamic vegetables
which are only to be seen with the microscope, and there are animalculæ
equally invisible to the naked eye. If the animal kingdom can show,
in its scale of size, the whale, and the microscopic _acarus_, the
vegetable kingdom possesses a similar decreasing scale from the baobab
to the lichens.

The same places are inhabited or resorted to by plants and animals.
Both live on the same soil, as if for mutual aid. The two kingdoms
combine at all points of the globe. We might name a number of places in
which certain plants and certain animals thrive together. The chamois
and the maple tree love the same mountains, the same high places; the
truffle and the earth-worm dwell in the same underground region; the
birch and the hare are found in the same place; the water-lily grows in
the same fresh water with the aquatic worm; and the cod and the algæ
prosper in the same submarine depths.

All vegetables and animals have an original country, but they can
be acclimatized under other skies by human industry and skill. The
chestnut-tree and the Indian cock, the peach-tree and the turkey,
transported to Europe, has each forgotten its native land.

Among both animals and plants there are amphibious creatures. The frog,
and the other batrachians, live, like the reeds, on the earth and in
the water. Both animals and plants can live as parasites. The animal
world has the flea, the louse, the acarus; the vegetable world has its
lichens, and its mushrooms.

Thus, equal fecundity, similar variety in the scale of size, analogy
in habitation, which implies ideality of organization, possibility of
transplantation and of acclimatization out of their original country,
possibility of amphibious existence, parasitical life, all general
conditions which suppose a great analogy of organization; we establish
all these things in drawing the parallel between plants and animals.
How, then, if we grant sensibility to one of these kingdoms, can we
deny it to the other?

6. Plants, like animals, have their maladies. We do not now allude
to maladies caused by parasites, like the sickness of the vine, due
to the _oïdium Tuckeri_, the sickness of the petals, caused by other
small mushrooms, that of the rose-tree, the olive-tree, of corn,
&c., produced by parasitical cryptogams, which fix themselves on the
plant, and change the normal course of its life; we speak of morbid
affections, properly so called. The pathological condition and its
consequences exist in the plant as in the animal. Stoppage, or febrile
and abnormal acceleration of the sap in the vegetable, answer to
stagnation of the blood, or its acceleration during fever, in the
animal; various excrescences of the bark, analogous to affections
of the skin; the abortion of certain organs, and the capricious
development of others; the secretion of pathological liquids which flow
outside. This is a brief catalogue of the maladies to which trees,
shrubs, and herbaceous vegetables are subject. A plant which passes
too quickly and too often from intense cold to extreme heat, soon
becomes ill, and necessarily perishes, like an animal exposed to those
dangerous alterations. A shrub left in a current of cold air could
no more live than an animal if kept in a similar place. In a word,
the plant exhibits health or sickness, according to its conditions of
existence. How can we admit that the being in which such changes take
place, can be merely the passive subject of them, that it experiences
neither pain nor pleasure in passing from health to sickness, or from
sickness to health?

7. Sicknesses, or other causes, produce anomalies of form, or
irregularities of structure in plants, as in animals. Just as in the
animal kingdom _monstrosities_ exist, there are monstrosities in the
vegetable kingdom. The science which occupies itself with monstrosities
in animals is called _teratology_. Geoffrey St. Hilaire has made some
most interesting studies of the causes of the productions of monsters
in the different classes of animals; but it has been perceived of late
that an analogous science must be created, for the explanation of
monstrosities proper to the vegetable kingdom, and Moquin Tandon has
published a book upon _vegetable teratology_.

8. Old age and death are common to both plants and animals. Plants,
after having survived the various maladies which threaten them, do
not escape a slow old age, and death necessarily follows. With time,
their vessels become hardened, their size becomes reduced, they can
no longer give passage to the sap, or other liquids which ought to go
through them. Liquids are not aspired with the same regularity, they no
longer transude through the vegetable tissue with the same precision;
they remain stagnant in the vessels, become corrupt there, and transfer
their decomposition to the vessels which enclose them. Thenceforth
the vital functions cease to be performed, and the plant dies. Things
happen in a like manner among animals. The thickening of the vessels,
the decrease of their power bring on the condition of old age, in
which the functions are disturbed and slackened; then comes death, the
inevitable end of all, in each kingdom of nature.

Thus, when we compare animals and plants, and especially when we
consider the inferior beings in both kingdoms, it is impossible
to establish a precise line of demarcation between them. The
characteristics by which the old naturalists defined the distinction
between plants and animals, are now acknowledged to be without meaning,
and this distinction becomes more and more difficult in proportion as
we make progress in our knowledge of these creatures. Voluntary motion
was regarded as the principal distinctive characteristic between the
two kingdoms of nature; but at the present day this characteristic can
no longer be invoked. Elementary works on botany now tell us about
the fly-catching plant, which catches the insect that crawls over its
leaves, exactly as a spider catches flies, and about the oscillating
plant, whose leaves are endowed by voluntary motion, more distinct than
that belonging to many animals.

Apart from these examples, drawn from classical works, we would ask
what becomes of the argument for the immobility of plants, considered
as a distinctive characteristic of the vegetable kingdom, when we see
that zoophytes are fixed to the earth, and when, on the other hand, we
see certain young plants, or their germs, such as the germs of algæ,
mosses, and ferns, possessing the faculty of motion.

The _spores_, or reproductive organs of algæ, and the _impregnating
corpuscles_ of the mosses and ferns, possess the fundamental
characteristics of animality, that is to say, they are provided
with locomotive organs, and they execute movements which appear to
be voluntary. Those singular creatures are seen to go and come in
the interior of liquids, to endeavour to penetrate into cavities,
to withdraw, return, and definitively introduce themselves with an
apparent effort.

The German botanists regard these vegetable germs as belonging to
the animal kingdom. Considering that only animals have the organs of
motion, and that the spores of algæ and the impregnating corpuscles
of mosses and ferns are provided with organs of motion, they do not
hesitate to declare that in the commencement of their life, algæ,
mosses, and ferns are in truth animals, which become plants when they
fix themselves, and begin to germinate. French botanists have not yet
ventured to adopt that view; they are content to call the movable
impregnating corpuscles of algæ, mosses, and ferns, _antherozoïdes_,
but they do not dare to pronounce upon their animality. M. Pouchet
says, in his work _L'Univers_, page 444:

    "Motion manifests itself spontaneously with extraordinary intensity
    in the _animalculæ_ of several plants, which have spinal organs for
    this purpose, hairs by means of which they swim about in the liquid
    which contains them.

    "Some of these, real animalcule plants, have the shape of eels, and
    move themselves by means of two long filaments attached to their
    heads; others exactly resemble the tadpoles of frogs, and jump
    about in the cells of the mosses.

    "Nevertheless, it is such creatures as these, whose locomotive
    organs are so plainly to be discerned, and which we can see,
    under the microscope, jumping about as nimbly as our acrobats,
    that certain botanists persist in considering, on theory alone,
    as motionless and insensible. Some philosophers certainly possess
    eyes, that they may not see!"

There are these germs of plants, and young plants which move, and
on the other hand, almost all the adult zoophytes, sponges, corals,
madrepores, sea-stars, byssus, &c., &c., to which we may add several
mollusca (all those in shells), are fixed to the earth. In these cases
we must take the plant for the animal, and the animal for the plant,
if we positively hold by voluntary motion as an absolute distinction
between animals and plants.

On the borders of the two kingdoms,--when we consider zoophytes in the
animal, and cryptogams in the vegetable kingdom,--there is no longer,
so to speak, either animal or plant; the two seem to be confounded, and
fused together.

If, before the discovery of the fresh-water polype, that living
creature had been presented to a naturalist, he would have felt puzzled
how to class it. Seeing it multiplying itself by buds, by offshoots, by
engraftment, he would doubtless have declared that this organized being
was a plant. But if he had been made to remark that this same creature
fed on living prey, which it seized and swallowed, that it had long
and flexible arms, of which it formed a kind of net for the purpose of
seizing this prey, which it conveyed into the interior of a digestive
tube, our naturalist would have made haste to place the polype in the
ranks of the animals. He would have been asked to observe that the
polype may be turned inside out, like a glove, so that his interior
skin becomes his exterior skin, and that, thus turned inside out, he
lives, grows, and multiplies himself, precisely as he does before this
curious reversal. Our naturalist, much embarrassed in the presence of
so unheard of a fact, would doubtless immediately have begun to seek
some intermediate kingdom between the animal and the vegetable, to
which he might relegate this paradoxical being, which could not, with
absolute certainty, be classed either with plants, or with animals.

The fact is, classifications are products of human science, nature
knows nothing about them. We descend, by insensible degrees, from one
kingdom to the other; we go from the man to the polype, and from the
polype to the rose tree, by infinite gradations, and, on the confines
of the two kingdoms, there is a whole series of creatures which it is
very difficult to range under any system. For how long did naturalists
hesitate before they regarded infusoria, coral, sponges, star-fish,
gorgons, sea-anemones, and madrepores as animals? Even in the present
day micrographers who study the microscopic beings proper to vegetable
and animal infusions, such as the monads, polypoid worms, and numerous
others, find the utmost difficulty in assigning these creatures to such
or such a kingdom, and they sometimes decide rather arbitrarily upon
placing them among animals or plants.

From all the considerations, all the facts which we have just advanced,
we conclude that the sensibility of plants is not to be contested,
since no one can think of denying that privilege to certain zoophytes
which can with difficulty be distinguished from vegetables.

We see an imposing tree, a stately oak with sturdy branches, growing on
the sea coast. Not far off, on the sand of the shore, lies a star-fish
flung there by the waves. A few yards below, on the surface of the
water, floats a sponge, a branch of coral, a madrepore. When the icy
wind blows, when the hurricane lifts the angry waves, which is it, the
animal or the plant that will manifest sensibility to the tempest? The
sponge, the coral, the madrepore will remain as indifferent to the fury
of the elements as the rock in which they are incrusted, or as the
pebble on which the star-fish stretches out its four motionless arms.
But, the majestic oak will shudder at every gust of the tempest; he
will bend his branches and shut up his leaves to shelter himself from
the icy blast or the furious storm; and a mere glance at his attitude
will indicate to you that an abnormal perturbation reigns in the
atmosphere. Would you seriously say, in that case, that the vegetable
feels nothing, and that the animal is sensible? Would you not, on the
contrary, be inclined to declare that the tree is the sentient being,
and that the star-fish, the sponge, the madrepore, are the creatures
which are destitute of feeling?

Pause beside still water and seek for the polype or fresh-water hydra
which we have just mentioned. You will find it difficult to disentangle
this zoophyte from the reeds and willows which surround it. You will
find, at length, a kind of membranous tube, a few centimetres in
length. Is that the polype you were looking for? Is it not rather the
stubble of some reed or grass plant? This living twig, with nothing to
distinguish it in appearance from a herbaceous plant, is constantly
fixed in the same place, like an aquatic vegetable. It makes some
faint movements, consisting simply of the opening and shutting of the
orifice of the tube, which solely constitutes its being. Sometimes it
lengthens, sometimes it contracts itself, by stretching out membranous
arms, as fine as threads, by means of which it seizes and drags towards
it the water insects which chance to pass near it. This is the one
single characteristic of its animality. At this rate, an aërial plant,
the _fly-catcher_, would be just as much an animal as our polype, since
it catches the insects which venture to crawl upon its leaves.

At the bottom of the sea there is a very curious zoophyte, the
_actinium_, or sea-anemone. For a long time this creature was
confounded with the plants, and held to be an ocean flower. Those
who admire the beautiful, bright-coloured actinia, in the Garden
of Acclimatization, in Paris, who look at them, waving on their
flexible stem, shaking the coloured appendages and fringes which adorn
their heads, find it hard to regard these charming queens of the
waters otherwise than as real flowers. And, in fact, for ages, the
_sea-anemones_ were held to be marine plants.

In the last century, coral was held to be a marine shrub, and it was
even believed that the flowers of the coral had been discovered. An
academician of Paris, Count de Marsigli, created a European reputation
for himself by this supposed discovery. Peyssonnel, a Provençal
naturalist, found the utmost difficulty in opposing this idea, and in
establishing the fact that these supposed flowers of the coral were
in reality young corals. He had the whole Academy of Sciences against
him; and his opposition to the ideas of the Academy brought him into
such disgrace, that he was obliged to leave France and to go to the
Antilles, where he died in obscurity as a doctor of medicine. And all
this because he maintained that coral is not a plant, and does not
produce flowers!

The famous Genevese naturalist, Charles Bonnet, anticipating the
knowledge of our day by more than a century, has given a most
interesting form to the parallel between animals and plants, in his
work entitled _Contemplation de la Nature_. We cannot resist the
pleasure of quoting the following passage, in which Charles Bonnet
shows in a striking manner what are the difficulties in the way of
distinguishing the plant from the animal, and how those difficulties
are disposed of by those who dispute the sensibility of plants:--

    "Everything is graduated in nature," says Charles Bonnet, "and, in
    refusing to admit that plants are sentient, we force nature to make
    a jump without any assignable reason.

    "We observe that feeling decreases by degrees from man to the
    nettle, and to the mussel, and we persuade ourselves that it stops
    there, because we regard these animals as the least perfect. But
    there are, perhaps, many degrees between the feeling of the mole
    and of the plant. There are, perhaps, still more between the most
    and the least sensible of the plants. The gradations, which we
    observe, ought to persuade us to this philosophy; the new beauty
    which it adds to the system of the world, and the pleasure to be
    derived from the multiplication of sentient creatures ought to
    contribute to induce us to admit it. I willingly admit that this
    philosophy is much to my taste. I love to think that those flowers
    which adorn our fields and our gardens with a brightness constantly
    renewed, those fruit trees which are so pleasant to our eyes and
    our palate; those majestic trees that compose the vast forests,
    which time seems to have respected, are so many sentient creatures
    partaking after their fashion in the sweetness of existence.

    "Plants offer some facts to our observation which seem to indicate
    that they possess feeling, but we are not likely to perceive those
    facts, because of the strong persuasion that they are insensible,
    which has prevailed among us for so long. We ought to agree to
    consider the question _tabula rasa_, and to subject plants to
    a new, impartial, and unprejudiced examination. An inhabitant
    of the moon, possessed of intellectual faculties like ours, but
    without any preconceived ideas about the insensibility of plants,
    would be the philosopher whom we require. Let us imagine such
    an observer engaged in studying the productions of our earth,
    and, after having given his attention to the polypes and other
    insects multiplied by the process of grafting, passing on to the
    contemplation of vegetables. He would, doubtless, take them at
    the period of their birth. With this view, he would sow seed of
    various species, and he would carefully watch their germination.
    Let us suppose that some of those seeds have been reversed in the
    sowing, the sprouting part turned downwards, the stem upwards; and
    the observer has the skill to distinguish one end of the seed from
    the other, and knows their functions. After some days, he will
    remark that the seed has grown into this reversed position, that
    the stem is turned upward, and the sprouting portion downward. He
    will feel no surprise; he will attribute a circumstance which is
    so hurtful to the life of the plant, to the mistake he has made in
    sowing the seed. But, continuing to observe, he will see the sprout
    and the stem each bending itself in the opposite direction, and
    trying to attain the right position. This change of direction will
    strike him as very remarkable, and he will begin to suspect that
    the organized being which he is studying is endowed with a certain
    amount of discernment. Too prudent, however, to pronounce upon
    these early indications, he will suspend his judgment and pursue
    his investigations. The plants whose germination our physicist
    has been observing, have been raised in the neighbourhood of a
    hedge. Thus favoured, and carefully cultivated, they have made
    great progress in a very short time. The soil which surrounds them
    at some distance is of two opposite qualities. That on the right
    of the plants is rich, damp, and spongy; that on the left is dry,
    hard, and gravelly. Our observer remarks that the roots, after
    having begun by extending equally on both sides, have changed their
    direction, and have spread out towards the rich and humid soil;
    over which they are stretching, and thus threatening to deprive
    the plants already there of their due share of nourishment. To
    prevent this inconvenience, he digs a ditch between the plants
    which he is observing and those they threaten to starve, and now he
    thinks he has provided against everything. But the plants, which
    he believes he has governed, disconcert all his precautions by
    extending their roots downwards, under the ditch, and gaining the
    other side.

    "Surprised at this, he uncovers one of these roots, but without
    exposing it to heat, and holds a sponge steeped in water towards
    it. The root turns itself to the sponge, and when he changes its
    position, the root accommodates itself to each alteration.

    "While our philosopher is meditating profoundly upon these
    facts, other facts equally remarkable present themselves almost
    simultaneously. He observes that all these plants have leaned away
    from the hedge, and are bending forward as though to present every
    portion of their bodies to the beneficent smiles of the sun. He
    sees that all the leaves are so turned that their upper surface is
    exposed to the sun, or to the fresh air, and that the lower surface
    is directed towards the hedge, or the ground. Former experience
    will have taught him that the upper surface of leaves serves
    chiefly as a defence for the lower surface, and that the latter
    is principally destined to pump up the moisture rising from the
    earth, and provide for the evacuation of what is superfluous. The
    direction of the leaves which he notices appears quite in harmony
    with his experiences. He studies this portion of the plant with
    increased attention.

    "He remarks that the leaves of some species seem to follow the
    movements of the sun, so that in the morning they turn to the
    east, in the evening to the west. He sees that some leaves close
    themselves against the sun, others against the dew. He observes an
    analogous movement in certain flowers. Afterwards, he observes
    that no matter what the direction of the plants relative to the
    horizon has been, the direction of the leaves is always that
    which he has at first noticed, he bethinks him of changing this
    direction, and of placing the leaves in a position exactly contrary
    to their natural one. He has already had recourse to similar
    means in order to assure himself of the instinct of animals, and
    to ascertain its bearings. With this view he bends perpendicular
    plants towards the horizon, and keeps them in that position. Thus,
    the direction of the leaves is absolutely changed; the upper
    surface, which previously turned to the sun or to the fresh air,
    now looks towards the earth or the interior of the plant, and the
    lower surface, which formerly looked towards the earth or the
    interior of the plant, now turns to the sun, or the fresh air. But
    very soon all these leaves begin to move, they turn on their stem
    as on a pivot, and in an hour they will have resumed their former
    position. Our observer, wishing to assure himself whether leaves
    and branches when detached and plunged into water will preserve
    the inclinations which they manifest when upon the plant of which
    they formed a portion, subjects them to an experiment whose results
    leave him no doubt of the fact.

    "He places wet sponges under the leaves, and he sees the leaves
    turn towards the sponges and endeavour to adhere to them by their
    lower surfaces. He also observes that certain plants, which he has
    shut up in his cabinet and in a cellar, have turned towards the
    window, or the grating respectively.

    "Finally, the phenomena of the Sensitive Plant, its varied
    movements, the promptitude with which it contracts when touched,
    form the interesting subject which terminates his researches.

    "Thus plentifully supplied with facts which all seem to tend to the
    support of belief in the sensibility of plants, which side will
    our philosopher take? Will he surrender to these proofs? Will he
    suspend his judgment? I think he will take the first part."[16]

Charles Bonnet believes, in short, that the plant, as well as the
animal, is endowed with sensibility.

According to the system which we have developed, the animal is
possessed of a soul, which is still very imperfect, and endowed only
with faculties corresponding to its needs. But, since the animal,
in addition to the sensibility enjoyed by the plant, possesses
intelligence also, we must conclude from thence that the plant has not
a soul, properly so called, but only the rudiment, the commencement, in
other words, the _germ_ of a soul.

We know that the sun has the privilege of giving birth to organic life
upon our globe, his rays have power to produce the formation of living
tissues, plants or zoophytes, when they fall upon the earth or the
waters, and we may draw this conclusion from all that has gone before,
that the sun sends down upon the earth _animated germs_ under the form
of his rays, which emanate from the spiritualized creatures who dwell
in the king-star.

Thus our system of nature completes itself; thus, thanks to solar
radiation, the two ends of the immense chain of organized beings whose
place and part in the vast theatre of the worlds we have attempted to
define are united. Life begins in the waters, its first appearance is
in plants and zoophytes; for these two classes of living creatures obey
the same laws, and appear to have the same origin. The sun, by sending
his vivifying rays upon the earth, produces the formation of plants
and zoophytes, which are the points of departure of organization. The
_animated germ_ deposited by the sun in plants and zoophytes grows,
passes from the zoophyte to the mollusc, or articulated animal, and
then undergoes a further development, by passing from the mollusc or
articulated animal to the fish. This germ of a soul thus becomes a
rudimentary soul, provided with certain faculties. In the zoophyte
and the mollusc it had only sensibility; in the fish, and then in the
reptile, and the bird, it has attention and judgment. The faculties
are augmented in proportion as the animal mounts higher in the
organic scale. Arrived at its summit, the human being, the soul is in
possession of all its faculties, and especially of memory, which during
the animal stages of the ascent is obscure and uncertain.

To accord sensibility to plants permits us to unite all the creatures
of the living creation, and thus to complete our general system of
terrestrial nature.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[15] "_Histoire des Plantes_," Paris, p. 111.

[16] "_Contemplation de la Nature_ (_Œuvres d'Histoire Naturelle de
Charles Bonnet._") Neuchâtel, 1781.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE THIRTEENTH.

DOES MAN EXIST ELSEWHERE THAN ON THE EARTH?--DESCRIPTION OF THE
PLANETS.--PLURALITY OF INHABITED WORLDS.


THROUGHOUT the preceding chapters we have reasoned as if the earth
were the whole universe. Indeed, almost all men believed that such
was the case, from the first establishment of society until the last
century. Great mathematical knowledge, profound study, and highly
perfected optical instruments are requisite to rectify the false
ideas, the errors, and the illusions which are the result of a simple
view of the earth and the sky. Great efforts of the mind, and a very
difficult struggle against the testimony of our senses are necessary to
the recognition that the earth moves, and that the sun is motionless.
In order to distinguish the place and the office of each of those
softly beaming globes, in the midst of the uniformity of aspect
presented by the stars which shine during the night, patient and severe
observations, transmitted and repeated from age are indispensable, and,
in addition, an excellent scientific method. Let us therefore not be
surprised that men have taken so much time to comprehend the ordering
of the universe, and that they had only the most childish conception
of them for thousands of years. The ancients, the Greeks, the Romans,
the Egyptians, knew nothing of the universe, except the earth (nor did
the Orientals, with the exception of some truly learned men, who had
divined the general mechanism of the universe by methods unknown to us,
but they concealed their knowledge from the profane). These ancients
could speak of only a small portion of the globe: of Europe, Asia, and
the North of Africa. The remainder was a dead letter for the peoples
of antiquity. After them, and following their example, the first
Christians reduced the universe to what they knew of it; they believed
there was but one world, because they saw only one. The earth was for
them the universe. In the stars they saw only brilliant spots, like
silver nails in the celestial vault, to enhance the azure, and charm
the eyes of men in the quiet of the night. The moon was the natural
beacon of the earth. In the sky there was a shining track followed by
the sun, and the torch of day was no larger than the beacon of night.
The celestial region which spread itself above the sun and the moon
was the Empyrean of the ancients, the Paradise of the Christians and
the Mussulmans. It was at once the sojourn of clouds and of light, the
habitation of the elect of God, of the saints and the just. Under the
earth, and in its interior, were immense abysses, gulfs, and cavities,
the dark dwellings of the damned.

This simple cosmogony, which merely translates what our eyes show
us, has been that believed by every people in their infancy. Among
the savage tribes of the two worlds, in America and in Africa, as
in the ancient East, among the Romans as among the Egyptians and the
ancient Greeks, this coarse simplicity and absolute ignorance of the
constitution of the world prevailed. On this profoundly false basis
all the ancient religions were founded. The social customs of modern
peoples are based upon the same errors. Language has consecrated them;
the earth is everywhere called the _world_, as the ancients called it
(_mundus_, κόσμος); every one says the sun _travels_, or _goes_, from
east to west, and that the stars _rise_ and _set_.

Poetry has set its eternal seal on this vicious system, and has, so to
speak, consecrated it, by clothing it with all the _prestige_ of genius
and imagination.

Modern astronomy has caused the false skies of antiquity to vanish
away; it has dispersed the pretensions of the celestial vault, sown
with brilliant spots, and substituted a simple mass of coloured air.
It has revealed the true office of each of those stars which we see
by day or by night. It has fixed, in an indisputable manner, the real
place of the earth in the universe, and, to say the truth, that place
is singularly small.

We know now, that the earth, far from being herself the world, is
only an imperceptible point of the world. If we only compare it with
the sun, we know that our globe is one million three hundred thousand
times smaller than the sun. This takes us far away from the idea of the
ancient Greeks, who thought they ventured much in asserting that the
sun was as big as the Peloponnesus.

In addition, the earth has been dispossessed of all privileges. It was
believed formerly to be unique and unrivalled, we now know that there
are an infinity of other globes similar to the earth, so that she is no
more than one individual in a group of other individuals who resemble
her. We know that the earth figures among the planets, that she is only
a planet of our system.

What, then, is a planet? the reader will ask. An attentive gaze
directed to the stars of night will make him understand it. Let him
examine, on any fine evening, the star which is pointed out to him as
Mars or Jupiter, and to which a certain position is assigned at a given
hour. Then, a few hours later, let him come and look once more for Mars
or Jupiter, and he will perceive that the position of Mars or Jupiter,
with respect to the other stars, is changed. Or he may do better
still. Let him look at Mars or Jupiter through the telescope of an
observatory, or the glass of one of those open-air astronomers who are
to be found in the public ways in Paris and other great cities. Thus he
may see Mars or Jupiter change his place under his own eyes. While the
other stars remain motionless, Jupiter or Mars will pass away from the
field of the glass.

There are, then, fixed stars and movable stars. The movable stars are
the planets (πλανήτης, from πλάνος, wandering). The fixed stars are
what we _call_ stars. It is not difficult to distinguish the planets
from the stars with the naked eye. The stars emit sparkling light,
whence comes their name, from the Latin _stellare_, to shine, and their
light twinkles. The planets, on the contrary, shine with a steady,
mild, unvacillating light. The reason of this difference is, that
the light shed by the stars is their own. The stars are so many suns
resembling ours. They illumine worlds like our world, so prodigiously
distant that we cannot even perceive them. The planets do not shine of
themselves; they merely reflect, like gigantic mirrors, the light of
the sun which illumines them, and renders them visible to us. Thus, the
planets are stars which travel. They revolve around the sun. The earth,
being a planet, is a travelling star, which revolves around the sun.

But the earth is not the only planet of our solar system. There are
seven others, which do not differ essentially from the earth. The names
of the eight planets which compose our solar system, are as follows,
arranged according to their distance from the sun: Mercury, Venus,
the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune. Between Mars
and Jupiter there is a collection of small bodies, which seem to be
fragments of broken planets; they are called asteroïds. At present,
in 1871, more than a hundred are known, and it is not yet fifty years
since they were first sought for in the sky. These asteroïds may be
collected together in our fancy, and formed into a separate group,
which would be a ninth planet. Let us glance at the planets which
compose our solar system.

Plates 4 and 5, which accompany these pages, will suffice to give an
idea of the relative dimensions of the planets. In these two plates the
planets are arranged according to the order of their distance from the
sun. In plate 4, Mercury, Venus, the Earth, and Mars are represented;
in plate 5, the asteroïds Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune.
Mercury is the nearest planet to the sun, his distance from the central
orb being only fourteen millions of leagues, which, in astronomy, is
near neighbourhood. This planet revolves upon its axis with the same
rapidity as the earth. The day, in Mercury, is only three minutes
longer than ours (24h. 3ms.). Being closer to the sun than the earth
is, Mercury turns more quickly round the sun, so that its year is only
88 days, whereas ours is 365 days.

We know that the sole cause of the inequality of the seasons, as well
as of day and night in the planets, is the inclination of the star on
its axis of rotation. If the planets, while revolving round the sun,
retained the verticality of the axis which joins these north and south
poles, there would be perfect equality in the distribution of the solar
light and heat over the same latitudes; along each parallel there would
be a complete regularity in the lighting and warming of the planet; the
differences of heat and cold would not depend on anything but their
greater or less distance from the sun. But this verticality only exists
for two or three planets of our system. The others, and among them
Mercury, Venus, the Earth, and Mars, are strongly inclined on their
axis of rotation.

They revolve in a bent position, as if they had received a great blow
on the shoulder, which had caused them to deviate from their primitive
and regular situation. From this there results a very variable
disposition of the duration of the light, and consequently of the
heat, which these inclined planets receive from the horizontal rays
of the solar star. Thus the inequality in the length of the days and
nights, and the diversity of the four seasons on the same parallel, are
accounted for.[17]

[Illustration:

Mercury. Venus. Earth. Mars. Sun.

Fig. 4.--Comparative Size of the Planets Mercury, Venus, the Earth, and
Mars.]

The inclination of the axis of the terrestrial sphere is 23° which
is a considerable deviation, and occasions great differences in the
duration of days and of seasons on different points of our globe.
The inclination of the axis of the planet Mercury is enormous: it is
70°. This planet bends over itself as if about to fall. Hence results
prodigious variation of light and heat on the same parallel, and
seasons whose abrupt changes must be painful and hard to bear by the
inhabitants of this planet, if such inhabitants exist.

Mercury is five times less than the Earth, as is shown in plate 4.
Venus comes after Mercury, according to distance from the Sun.

Venus, which is 27,000,000 of leagues from the Sun, receives twice
as much light and heat as our globe. Its days are of nearly the same
length as ours (23 hours, 21 minutes), but its year, necessarily
shorter than that of the Earth, since it is nearer to the Sun, lasts
only 224 days. Its seasons last two months each. Its globe is nearly of
the same bulk as that of the Earth. Venus is almost always wrapped in
clouds, which must fall in rain, forming rivers and seas. These waters
refresh the plains, which must be scorched by the heat of the burning
sun. The seasons are still shorter and more unequal in Venus than in
Mercury; its axis is, in fact, inclined at 75°.

After Venus comes the Earth, which is almost of the same bulk, but
28,000,000 of leagues from the Sun. Its diameter is nearly 3000
leagues. It accomplishes its revolution on its axis in 24 hours (23
hours, 56 minutes, 4 seconds), and in 365 days, 5 hours its revolution
around the sun.

The inclination of the Earth's axis is 23°, which produces the
differences of days and nights, and the inequality of the seasons,
according to latitude. The Earth possesses a privilege denied to
the planets Mercury, Venus, and Mars; she has a secondary star, or
satellite, called the Moon. Placed at a distance of only 90,000 leagues
from the Earth, the Moon accomplishes her revolution around it in 27
days. It is not the object of this work to give any description of our
globe. We will suppose our readers to be sufficiently acquainted with
it, and pass on to the planet which comes next to it in the scale of
distance from the Sun. This is the planet Mars.

An extraordinary resemblance exists between Mars and the Earth.
Physical, geographical, and climatological conditions, days and nights,
seasons, celestial perspectives, all are alike in these two planets,
with the sole difference that the globe of Mars is half as small again
as that of the Earth; so that, if a man were transported to Mars, he
might believe himself to be, not in a strange planet, but in a little
known corner of the Earth, such as Australia or Polynesia.

As we pursue our journey through the heavens, ever increasing our
distance from the Sun, we shall find, after Mars, the group of the
Asteroïds. We shall not linger before this cluster of small stars,
which is no doubt nothing but a collection of the dismembered fragments
of a planet, which formerly existed in this particular point of space,
and was dashed to pieces by some formidable accident in the universe.
These little stars, like the important planets, have each their names,
such as _Vesta_, _Pallas_, _Circe_, &c., &c. _Maximiliana_, and
_Feronia_ are placed at the two extremities, with respect to distance
from the Sun. These remains of a broken star continue to circulate
around the Sun, like the planet which they formerly composed.

After the Asteroïds comes great Jupiter.

Jupiter is the largest planetary sphere in our solar system, being 1400
times greater than the Earth. Its distance from the Sun is 200,000,000
miles. In consequence of this distance, its year is as long as twelve
of our years. Notwithstanding its colossal dimensions, Jupiter turns
with such rapidity upon its axis, that it accomplishes an entire
revolution in twelve hours, so that its day and night are respectively
only ten hours long. The shortness of Jupiter's nights are compensated
by the existence of four moons, or satellites, which revolve around
this planet, and give it permanent light. This illumination by
reflection, added to very long twilights, must make Jupiter's nights
nearly equal to the day in brightness.

Though Jupiter suffers under the disadvantage of very short days, it
has on the other hand the inappreciable advantage of perfect equality
in the length of its days and nights, and of that of the four seasons
over all its parallels. The axis of Jupiter is hardly at all oblique,
and therefore Jupiter, like the planet Saturn, enjoys a sort of
perpetual spring, that is to say, an equable distribution of solar
heat and light along the same degrees of latitude. Jupiter, unlike
Mars and Venus, has no vicissitudes of seasons, no sudden and painful
transitions from cold to heat in the same place. The climates are
invariable in each latitude, and the seasons are hardly discernible.

The globe of Saturn is 734 times larger than that of the Earth, and is
364,000,000 leagues from the Sun. It takes thirty years to perform its
revolution around the central star, and its year is therefore thirty
times as long as ours.

Saturn, like Jupiter, has very short days. It revolves on its axis in
ten hours, so that its day and night respectively are but five hours.
But it has eight moons, or satellites, which accompany it, and give it
light, thus, as in the case of Jupiter, supplementing the shortness of
its days. There is hardly any obliquity of the axis of Saturn, so that
its days and nights are always equal. There is a perpetual _equinox_,
and the climates are invariable, while variation of seasons hardly
exists. In Saturn, as in Jupiter, perpetual spring reigns. Saturn has
one peculiarity which does not belong to any other body in our solar
system. It is placed in the centre of a ring, of the same nature as its
own, and which surrounds it on every side. This ring (see plate 5),
is surrounded by a second, and the second by a third, and the whole
are called the rings of Saturn. This circular envelope is exceedingly
thin--only ten leagues in thickness--but very wide; its width is 12,000
leagues. It is not motionless, but it revolves with the globe which it
surrounds.

The strange disposition of the rings of Saturn affords a proof of the
inexhaustible riches of nature, and the variety of forms which the
Creator has called into being in the vast universe. It ought to guard
us against our constant tendency to model all the worlds which we do
not know, upon the type of the earth.

Hardly anything is known about the peculiarities of Uranus, a planet
which is only eighty-two times larger than the earth, but which is
732,000,000 of miles from the sun, and takes eighty-four years to
accomplish its revolution around the central star.

Plate 5 shows the relative proportions of Uranus and the earth. The
prodigious distance of Uranus from our globe, added to its small size,
renders it almost inaccessible to observation.

For the same reason, nothing can be ascertained respecting the
physical and geographical conditions of Neptune, the last planet of
our solar system, which was discovered in our time by M. Le Verrier,
thanks to the simple force of calculation, thereby affording the most
brilliant proof ever given of the utility of the mathematical sciences.
Neptune is so small and so far from us, that it is probable mere
observation of the heavens would never have detected its existence. In
this case mathematical analysis was more powerful than the telescope.
It would be impossible to give particulars analogous to those which we
have supplied concerning the foregoing planets, in reference to a star
only 105 times larger than the earth, which revolves at the distance of
_one milliard 150 millions of leagues_ from the sun, and the duration
of whose year is 164 times that of the terrestrial year, so that if
the ages of the Christian era were counted according to the Neptunian
chronology, instead of being in the 19th century, we should be in the
12th year of that era. All we can say about Neptune, therefore, is that
it forms the boundary of the domain of our visible world.

We cannot, however, state positively that our solar world terminates
at this limit. No doubt the range of our astronomical glasses goes no
farther, but assuredly they do not sweep the boundaries of the empire
of the sun. It is known, in fact, that comets return to us after having
(as indicated by their geometrical curve), swept over the depths of
space to a distance of thirty-two _milliards of leagues_. Thus the
distance of one milliard 150 millions of leagues, which is that of
Neptune from the sun, by no means represents the confines of our solar
world, but simply defines the limits of the range of our telescopes.

[Illustration: Asteroids. Jupiter. Saturn. Uranus. Neptune.

Fig. 5.--Size of the Planets Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune
compared with the Earth.]

This rapid glance at our solar system in its entirety, proves that the
earth is not in possession of any privilege. The part which she plays
in the economy of the universe is equally fulfilled by other stars, and
there is nothing to justify the pre-eminence assigned to her by the
ancients. She is not the largest, the warmest, or the brightest of the
planets. She simply forms a portion of a group of stars, and is but one
individual of that group.

These considerations tend to lead us to a very important deduction.
Since the earth is in no way distinguished from the other planets of
our solar system, there must exist in other planets the things which
are found on our globe; air, water, a hard soil, rivers and seas,
mountains and valleys. Even vegetation and forests ought to be there,
regions covered with verdure and with shade. So there surely ought
to exist in the other planets, animals, and even men, or at least
creatures superior to animals, corresponding to our human type.

But is this possible? is it true? are the planets which, like the
earth, and together with it, turn round the sun, constituted physically
as the earth is? Are they covered with vegetable growth? are they
tenanted by animals and by beings belonging to the human type?

This grave question has been profoundly discussed by M. Camille
Flammarion, in a work entitled _Pluralité des Mondes Habités_, and in
a later publication, _Les Mondes Imaginaires et les Mondes Réels_. It
would be outside the province of this book to follow the author through
the various scientific considerations, from which he reasons that
the planets which form a portion of our solar system, are, like the
earth, the scene of life, organization, thought, and feeling. In the
17th century, Fontenelle and Huygens had successfully approached this
successful problem, which M. Camille Flammarion has lately treated with
especial care and development, invoking the lessons of contemporaneous
astronomy and physics, which refer to the subject. We therefore refer
the reader, who wishes to be instructed upon the question of the
possibility of the planets being inhabited, to M. Flammarion's works.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[17] Milton, in his _Paradise Lost_, says that before the fall of
our first parents, perpetual spring reigned upon the Earth, but that
as soon as Adam and Eve had eaten the forbidden fruit, angels, with
flaming swords, were sent from Heaven to incline the poles of the
Earth more than 20 degrees. It is well for us that the angels did not
cause them to incline farther, or our seasons would have been still
shorter and more defective. Fourier pretends that it would be possible
for humanity to produce an effect sufficiently great to set the globe
straight upon its axis, and thus restore the equality of the seasons,
and perpetual spring. This philosopher forgot to indicate one thing
only, the mechanical means by which man is to produce this effect. This
theory reminds us of the drowning man who fancied he could save himself
by catching hold of his own hair, while he was struggling in the water.




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE FOURTEENTH.

THAT WHICH HAS TAKEN PLACE UPON THE EARTH WITH REGARD TO THE CREATION
OF ORGANIZED BEINGS HAS PROBABLY ALSO TAKEN PLACE IN THE OTHER
PLANETS.--THE SUCCESSIVE ORDER OF THE APPEARANCE OF LIVING BEINGS ON
OUR GLOBE.--THIS SAME SUCCESSION HAS PROBABLY TAKEN PLACE IN EACH OF
THE PLANETS.--PLANETARY MAN.--THE PLANETARY, LIKE THE TERRESTRIAL MAN,
IS TRANSFORMED, AFTER DEATH, INTO A SUPERHUMAN BEING, AND PASSES INTO
THE ETHER.


WE believe, with M. Camille Flammarion, that organized beings exist in
all the planets. But are these beings who live in the distant worlds
accompanied, like terrestrial man, by a superior type? This is the
subject which we now propose to examine. In the absence of observation
analogy is our only means of investigation, and, guided by analogy, we
must admit that the processes which have taken place upon the earth,
since the epoch of its formation, must have similarly taken place upon
all the other planets, the earth's congeners.

We are now perfectly acquainted with the manner in which the vegetable
and animal creations have appeared, and succeeded each other upon our
globe since its origin. At first the earth was simply a collection
of gas, and burning vapour which revolved round the sun. This mass of
gas and vapour grew cold by degrees in its passage through space, and
first becoming liquid, afterwards assumed the consistency of paste,
and ultimately became solid, by a gradual process of refrigeration.
Consolidation began on the surface, because the circumference of a
sphere is more exposed than the remainder of the mass to refrigerating
influences. Then the water and the vapours which still flowed upon the
consolidated globe became condensed, and, falling in burning showers
upon the hard soil, they formed the first seas.

The proof that the earth's primitive condition was like to a liquid
or half paste, is, that if we take a plastic sphere, for instance a
slightly fluid ball of quicksilver, and make it turn rapidly upon its
axis, we observe that it swells out in the middle, and becomes flat at
the two poles, or the extremities of the axis; this is the effect of
the centrifugal force engendered by the rotatory motion. Now the earth
is depressed at the poles, and slightly swelled out at the equator.

The other planets must have been formed by the same process as the
earth. They were, no doubt, composed of a collection of gas and
vapours, which became liquid, pasty, and eventually solid, by a
process of refrigeration. This process, taking effect especially upon
their surface, they began to put forth a skin, or exterior and solid
covering, which was the soil of the planet. On this resisting soil fell
the liquids resulting from the condensation of the water vapour, and
thus the first seas of the planets were formed.

We would remind those who doubt the correctness of this theory that
the poles of the globe of Saturn and that of Jupiter are much more
flat than those of the Earth; which is explained by the greater
velocity of the rotation of each upon its axis. Our days are 24 hours
long, whereas those of Jupiter and Saturn are only 10 hours. Greater
rapidity of rotation produces a correspondingly increased depression
at the extremities of the axis. This geometrical result demonstrates
the justice of the assimilation in their respective origin which we
maintain between the Earth and the other planets.

In the warm waters of the basin of the seas the first living beings
which existed upon our globe appeared. Animal life commenced in the
waters, in the primitive forms of zoophytes and mollusca, as we know,
because zoophytes and mollusca, with the addition of a few articulates,
composed the animal remains found in the transition strata which come
after the primary formations. The first vegetables are found in the
same transition strata, they are mosses, algæ, and ferns.

When the earth had become somewhat cooler, phanerogamous vegetables
appeared upon the continents. Numerous vegetable species were
simultaneously created, for the flora of the secondary formations is
extremely rich and varied.

It was the same in the case of animals. So the zoophytes, mollusca, and
fish which existed in the transition period succeeded reptiles, in the
secondary formation, which inhabited both land and sea. At this period
appeared those monstrous saurian reptiles, whose formidable shapes, and
colossal dimensions fill us with surprise and almost with dismay. Then
the gigantic mosasaurus ravaged the seas, the terrible ichthyosaurus
spread terror among the inhabitants of the waters, and the gigantic
iguanodon laid waste the forests. The secondary formation, which is
filled with their remains, shows us that at that period reptiles held
the first rank in creation.

At a later date, the atmosphere having become purer, birds began to
traverse the air. In the tertiary deposit we find the remains of
several kinds of birds, and these remains, which do not exist in the
earlier formations, sufficiently prove that it was in the tertiary
period that birds made their first appearance upon the terrestrial
globe.

Still later, at a more advanced period of the tertiary epoch, mammifers
appear upon the scene. We must observe that these animal species do not
replace each other, that the one does not exclude the other. Several
of the ancient animal species continue to exist after the appearance
of entirely novel kinds. We might quote as instances whole groups
of animals, such as the lingulæ (mollusca), the coral (zoophyte)
among animals, and among vegetables, the algæ, ferns, and lycopodes,
which appeared on our globe in the earliest period of the reign of
organization, and have never ceased to exist. It was not until the last
epoch in the history of the Earth, during the quaternary epoch, that
man appeared, the highest product of living creation, the ultimate term
of organic, intellectual, and moral progress, the crowning upon our
earth of the visible edifice of nature.

At present, man lives together with the animals which began to exist
during the quaternary epoch, and a great number of other kinds of
mammifers which were created during the tertiary epoch.

The various phases of the development of the animal and vegetable
kingdoms on our globe, these perfected organized species each
succeeding the other, and finally reaching the superior type which we
call man, must, in our opinion, have been produced in the selfsame
order, upon the other planets of our solar world. M. Flammarion
proves, in the work which we have already quoted, that the physical
and climatological constitution of the planets is similar to that of
our globe. There is therefore no reason why things should have taken
place otherwise in Mercury, Jupiter, or Venus, than in the Earth,
in respect to the successive order of the creation and appearance
of living beings, and, in our belief a precisely similar successive
appearance of vegetables and animals, has taken place in these planets.
The plants and animals of Mercury, Jupiter, Saturn, &c., were certainly
not identical with those species which have had existence on the Earth,
and perhaps no resemblance could be traced between them, but all, in
their successive appearance, obeyed the principle of progress and
perfecting. Life, commencing in the burning waves of the primitive
seas, subsequently manifested itself upon the continents. Animals of
aërial organization have lived upon these continents, their species
have by degrees reached the perfection of their type, at length, and
finally, a creature appeared in these planets more complete, superior
in organization, intelligence, and sensibility to all the animal
creation which formed the population of each particular globe.

This superior being, this last step of the ascending scale of living
creation proper to the planetary worlds, the corresponding analogous
creature to terrestrial man, we shall take leave to call _planetary
man_.

In all the planets, then, there exist _men_, as on the earth, just as
there exist animals which are inferior to that noble and privileged
type.

According to the views which we have explained at the commencement
of this work, terrestrial man undergoes, after his death, a glorious
metamorphosis. Leaving his miserable material covering here below, his
soul springs upward into space, and becomes incarnate in a new being,
whose type is infinitely superior, by reason of its moral perfection,
to that of our poor humanity. He becomes that which we have called the
_superhuman being_. If this be true of the terrestrial man, it must be
equally true of the planetary man. So that the superhuman being must
proceed, not only from the earth, but from all the other planets.

Superhuman beings come from the human souls who have lived either
upon the Earth, or upon Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, Saturn, &c. And
precisely as the superhuman being, who comes from the Earth passes into
the surrounding ether, so the planetary man, leaving Mars, Mercury,
Jupiter, &c., passes into the ether, which surrounds his own planet,
becomes incarnate in a superhuman being, and lives in the ethereal
plains adjoining the planet which he has quitted.

All these superhuman beings float in the clouds of ether which, in the
case of every planet, succeed to its atmosphere.

Thus, the principles upon which we have based terrestrial humanity, are
general, and apply to all planetary humanity. Not from the Earth only
do those souls proceed who are incarnate in new creatures in the bosom
of the ethereal spaces, these souls proceed from all the globes which,
together with the Earth, form the attendant court of the royal Sun.

[Illustration]




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE FIFTEENTH.

PROOFS OF THE PLURALITY OF HUMAN EXISTENCES, AND OF
RE-INCARNATIONS.--APART FROM THIS DOCTRINE IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO EXPLAIN
THE PRESENCE OF MAN UPON THE EARTH, THE SAD AND UNEQUAL CONDITIONS OF
HUMAN LIFE, AND THE FATE OF CHILDREN WHO DIE IN INFANCY.


THE doctrine of the plurality of existences, and of re-incarnations,
which bind together, like so many links of the same chain, all living
creatures, from the most minute animal, even to those blessed beings
to whom it is given to behold God in His glory; which gives brethren
in the different planets to terrestrial humanity; which makes of the
inhabitants of our globe a nation of the universe; which sees but one
family in all the population of the worlds--a planetary family--whose
every member may raise himself by his merits and his struggles,
in the hierarchy of happiness, is supported by so many proofs. So
many, indeed, that we are puzzled to choose among all the methods of
demonstration which offer themselves in aid of it. To enumerate them
all would unduly enlarge the dimensions of this work, so that we shall
content ourselves with bringing forward the most striking.

Why are we on the earth? We did not ask to be placed there, we did
not express a wish to be born. If we had been consulted, we should
probably have objected to coming into this world at all, or at least
we should have wished to appear there at some other epoch. We should
probably have asked to be permitted to sojourn in some other planet
than the Earth. Our globe is, indeed, a very disagreeable habitation.
In consequence of its inclination on its axis, climate is very
unpleasantly distributed. Either we must succumb to cold, if we are not
artificially protected against it, or we must be terribly incommoded
with heat. Regarded from the moral point of view, the conditions of
humanity are very sad. Evil predominates in the world; vice is held
almost everywhere in honour, and virtue is so ill-treated, that to be
honest is, in this life, to be tolerably certain of evil fortune. Our
affections are causes of anguish and tears. If, for a while, we enjoy
the happiness of paternity, of love, of friendship, it is only to
see the objects of our love torn from us by death, or separated from
us by the accidents of a miserable life. The organs given us to be
exercised in this life are heavy, coarse, subject to maladies. We are
nailed to the earth, and our heavy mass can be moved only by fatiguing
exertion. If there are men of powerful organization, gifted with a good
constitution and robust health, how many are there who are infirm,
idiots, deaf and dumb, blind from their birth, ricketty, and mad! My
brother is handsome and well made, and I am ugly, feeble, ricketty,
and hump-backed; nevertheless, we are both sons of the same mother.
Some are born in opulence, others in the most hideous destitution.
Why am I not a prince and a great lord, instead of being a poor toiler
of the rebellious and ungrateful earth? Why was I born in Europe and
in France, where, by means of art and civilization, life is rendered
easy and endurable, instead of being born under the burning skies of
the tropics, where, with a bestial snout, a black and oily skin, and
woolly hair, I should have been exposed to the double torments of a
deadly climate and social barbarism? Why is not one of the unfortunate
African negroes in my place, comfortable and well off? We have done
nothing, he and I, that our respective places on the earth should have
been assigned to us. I have not merited the favour, he has not incurred
the disgrace. What is the cause of this unequal division of frightful
evils which fall heavily upon certain persons, and spare others? How
have they who live in happy countries deserved this partiality of fate,
while so many of their brethren are suffering and weeping in other
regions of the world?

Certain men are endowed with all the gifts of the intellect; others, on
the contrary, are devoid of intelligence, penetration, and memory. They
stumble at every step in the difficult journey of life. Their narrow
minds, their incomplete faculties, expose them to every kind of failure
and misfortune. They cannot succeed in anything, and destiny seems
to select them for the chosen victims of its most fatal blows. There
are beings whose whole life, from their birth to their death, is a
prolonged cry of suffering and despair. What crime have they committed?
Why are they upon the earth? They have not asked to be born, and if
they had been free, they would have entreated that this bitter cup
might be removed from their lips. They are here below in spite of
themselves, against their will. This is so true that some, in an excess
of despair, sever the thread of their own life. They tear themselves
away with their own hands from an existence which terrible suffering
has rendered insupportable to them.

God would be unjust and wicked to impose so miserable a life upon
beings who have done nothing to incur it, and who have not solicited
it. But God is neither unjust nor wicked; the opposite qualities are
the attribute of His perfect essence. Consequently, the presence of man
on certain portions of the earth, and the unequal distribution of evil
over our globe, are not to be explained. If any of my readers can show
me a doctrine, a philosophy, a religion by which these difficulties can
be resolved, I will tear up this book, and confess myself vanquished.

If, on the contrary, you admit the plurality of human existences and
_re-incarnations_, that is to say the passage of the same soul into
several different bodies, everything is wonderfully easily explained.
Our presence in certain portions of the globe is no longer the effect
of a caprice of fate, or the result of chance; it is simply a station
of the long journey which we are taking throughout the worlds. Previous
to our birth in this world we have lived either in the condition of
superior animals, or that of man. Our actual existence is only the
consequence of another, whether it be that we bear within ourselves
the soul of a superior animal, which we must purify, perfect, and
ennoble, during our sojourn on earth; or that, having already fulfilled
an imperfect and evil existence, we are condemned to re-commence it
under new obligations. In the latter case, the career of the man
re-commences, because his soul is not yet sufficiently pure to rise to
the rank of a superhuman being.

Our sojourn upon earth is then only a kind of trial, imposed upon
us by nature, during which we must refine our souls, free them from
earthly bonds, rid them of the defects which weigh them down, and
hinder them from rising, in radiance, towards the ethereal spheres.
Every ill-fulfilled human existence has to be recommenced. Thus, the
school-boy who has worked hard, who has studied well, goes into a
higher class at the end of the year; but if he has made no progress
in his studies, he must go through his class again. Perverse men are,
in our opinion, vicious beings who have had a previous life, and are
obliged to live it over again. They must go through it again and again,
until the day comes when their souls shall be fit to take higher rank
in the hierarchy of creatures, that is to say, until they shall be fit
to pass, after their death, into the condition of superhuman beings.

In proportion as the cause of our existence here below is obscure
and even inexplicable according to ordinary ideas, it is simple and
luminous in the light of the doctrine of the plurality of existences.
We must add that this doctrine is conformable to the justice of God. In
making earthly life a trial for man, God is equitable and good, like an
earthly father. Is it not better to subject a soul to a trial which
may begin over again if it have an unfortunate result, than to bind it
to one condition, failure in which must involve the condemnation of the
guilty person? It is better to offer the possibility of rehabilitation
by his own efforts, by his personal struggles, to a fallen creature,
than to utterly crush him, stained by his crimes and imperfections.
The justice and the goodness of God are manifest in this paternal
arrangement, much more than in the severe jurisdiction which would
irretrievably condemn a soul after one single trial had resulted
unfavourably.

If human life be a trial, if it be a period during which we are
preparing for a new and happier existence, there is no need to look
beyond that truth for an explanation of why we are on the earth,
why we are living to-day rather than to-morrow, and in one latitude
of our globe rather than in another; there is no need to ask why we
are born in the earth, and not in Mercury, Saturn, or Mars. Whether
we are living now, or are to live later, whether we have been born
in the earth, in Mercury, or in Mars, whether we inhabit Europe or
Africa,--all these things are utterly unimportant to our destiny. We
are undergoing a period of preparation indispensably necessary to be
accomplished before we pass into the superhuman condition; and the
place, the moment of our transit, the country in which we sojourn, the
planet which is assigned to us as the scene of this trial, are without
any importance in the part which we have to play in accordance with
the intentions of nature. We are making an immense journey through
the worlds, and a short sojourn on the Earth makes a part of our vast
itinerary. Whatever may be the corner of the universe in which we find
ourselves we cannot escape the trial imposed upon us by God, a trial by
strife and suffering, a period of moral and physical pain to which we
must submit before we can be promoted in the hierarchy of creatures.
The time, the place, the good or evil moral conditions ought therefore
to be indifferent to us. What is needful for us is a brief sojourn
on a planet in which this trial may be accomplished, and it may be
accomplished on the Earth, or in Mars, or in Mercury, and on any spot
of the Earth's surface one chooses to think of.

If, during the course of this trial, we meet with moral evil, if we
see vice triumphant and virtue persecuted, if we see the innocent
victims of the injustice, the cruelty, or the ignorance of man, we
have no right to murmur against Providence, we have no right to utter
maledictions against pain, to deplore the scandal of successful and
triumphant crime, and of suffering and weeping virtue. We have no right
to regret our bodily infirmities, the diseases which lay hold upon
us on the Earth, and which afflict us all our lives, or to complain
of the weakness of our minds, the decay of our faculties. All these
conditions, which are inimical to earthly happiness, are a portion of
the series of trials which we have to undergo here below. We ought to
bless those evils, and be grateful to those sufferings, for they are
the instruments of our eternal redemption, and the more piercing and
bitter they are the sooner will come the hour of our deliverance, the
happy moment when we shall leave this impure and filthy world which
our feet have trodden for a while. Besides, justice will speedily be
done. With brief delay the wicked shall be punished for his evil deeds
by having to recommence a new existence here, while the good shall be
elevated to the upper world, where a new, wide-ranging life awaits him,
far more happy and more wise, in truer harmony with the aspirations
of our nature than his previous and miserable existence here. Then we
shall be born again, radiant and strong, with our memory, our feelings,
and our liberty complete.

Thus difficulties vanish, and problems are solved: thus uncertainty
vanishes away, and mysteries which no doctrine, no religion, no
philosophy, could dissipate, and which almost made us doubt the justice
of God, are cleared up. The doctrine of re-incarnations and prior
existences explains everything, answers everything.

We pass on to one of the most interesting questions of the doctrine of
the pre-existence of souls, the question of children who have died in
infancy. What becomes of children who die at a few days old, or at the
age of eight or ten months, or at their birth? Until after all these
periods the human soul remains quite undeveloped; it is in almost the
same rudimentary state as at the hour of its birth. What, then, is the
fate of young children after their death? The doctrine of the plurality
of existences simplifies this question. It admits that when an infant
dies before it has lived one year (the period of dentition), its soul
remains upon the earth, and does not pass, like that of a grown man,
into the state of a superhuman being. The soul of an infant a year
old is still in a rudimentary condition, almost as much so as at the
moment of its birth. The soul of a child who dies at that age has to
begin life over again, disengaging itself from the little corpse, it
incarnates itself in another newly-born body, and after this fresh
incarnation, it begins a second life.

If the new incarnation does not last more than a year, there is no
reason why the soul should not undergo a third incarnation in the body
of a child, and so on until it shall have accomplished the period of
admission to the conditions common to all.

It is impossible that the soul of a child, which is as yet undeveloped,
which has added nothing to that which it has received, should be
treated as perfected souls, purified by the experience of life, by
physical and moral sufferings, who have used their sojourn upon earth
as a period of preparation and training. An infant child cannot
therefore be admitted to the super-terrestrial dwellings, he simply
recommences an interrupted trial. The mortality of children between the
day of their birth and the age of one year is so considerable, that
nature must have reserved to herself the means of annulling this cause
of disarrangement in the sequence and order of her operations.

This explanation of the destiny of young children is conformable to the
economy which is observed in the operations of nature. Nature wills
that nothing which is created should be lost. The soul of a criminal is
evil, but it is a soul, it exists, and it is eternal: it must not be
lost. But it must be corrected and perfected, which is done by means
of the new existences to which nature consigns that imperfect soul, in
order that it may enjoy the means of restoration. Thus the principle of
the soul is preserved, and nothing is lost of that which was created.
The soul of the child dying in infancy must not be lost either. A
second incarnation in another child will permit it to resume the course
of its evolution, accidentally interrupted by death. Thus the soul will
be preserved, and nothing will be lost.

Chemistry, since Lavoisier's time, has brought to light a great truth:
it is, that nothing of the elements of matter is lost; bodies change
their form, but the material element, the simple body, is imperishable,
indestructible, and always to be found intact, notwithstanding its
numerous transformations. If it is true that in the material world
nothing is lost, it is equally certain that neither is anything lost
in the spiritual world; that only transformation takes place. Thus,
nothing is lost, either of immaterial or material beings, and we may
lay down this new principle of moral philosophy by the side of the
principle of chemical philosophy established by the genius of Lavoisier.

[Illustration]




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE SIXTEENTH.

FACULTIES PECULIAR TO CERTAIN CHILDREN, APTITUDES AND VOCATIONS
AMONG MEN, ARE ADDITIONAL PROOFS OF RE-INCARNATIONS.--EXPLANATION OF
PHRENOLOGY.--DESCARTES' INNATE IDEAS, AND DUGALD STEWART'S PRINCIPLE
OF CAUSALITY CAN ONLY BE EXPLAINED BY THE PLURALITY OF LIVES.--VAGUE
RECOLLECTIONS OF OUR ANTERIOR EXISTENCES.


IF there are no re-incarnations, if our actual existence is, as modern
philosophy and the ordinary creeds maintain it to be, a solitary fact,
not to be repeated, it follows that the soul must be formed at the
same time as the body, and that at each birth of a human being, a new
soul must be created, to animate this body. We would ask, then, why
are not all these souls of the same type? Why, when all human bodies
are alike, is there so great a diversity in souls, that is to say, in
the intellectual and moral faculties which constitute them? We would
ask why natural tendencies are so diverse and so strongly marked, that
they frequently resist all the efforts of education to reform, or
repress them, or to direct them into any other line? Whence come those
instincts of vice and virtue which are to be observed in children,
those instincts of pride or of baseness, which are often seen in such
striking contrast with the social position of their families? Why do
some children delight in the contemplation of pain, and take pleasure
in torturing animals, while others are vehemently moved, turn pale,
and tremble at the sight or even the thought of a living creature's
pain? Why, if the soul in all men be cast in the same mould, does not
education produce an identical effect upon young people? Two brothers
follow the same classes at the same school, they have the same masters,
and the same examples are before their eyes. Nevertheless, the one
profits to the utmost by the lessons which he receives, and in manners,
education, and conduct, he is irreproachable. His brother, on the
contrary, remains ignorant and uncouth. If the same seed sown in these
two soils has produced such different fruit, must it not be that the
soil which has received the seed, _i.e._, the soul, is different in the
case of each?

Natural dispositions, vocations, manifest themselves from the earliest
period of life. This extreme diversity in natural aptitudes would
not exist if souls were all created of the same type. The bodies of
animals, the human body, the leaves of trees, are fabricated after the
same type, because we can observe but few and slight differences among
them. The skeleton of one man is always like the skeleton of another
man; the heart, the stomach, the ribs, the intestines are formed alike
in every man. It is otherwise with souls; they differ considerably in
individuals. We hear it said every day that such an one's child has a
taste for arithmetic, a second for music, a third for drawing. In the
case of others evil, violent, even criminal instincts are remarked,
and these dispositions break out in the earliest years of life.

That these natural aptitudes are carried to a very high degree and
unusual extent, we have celebrated examples recorded in history, and
frequently cited. We have Pascal, at twelve years old, discovering
the greater portion of plane geometry, and without having been taught
anything whatever of arithmetic, drawing all the figures of the first
book of Euclid's geometry on the floor of his room, exactly estimating
the mathematical relations of all these figures to each other; that
is to say, constructing descriptive geometry for himself. We have the
shepherd, Mangiamelo, calculating as an arithmetical machine, at five
years old. We have Mozart executing a sonata with his four-years-old
fingers, and composing an opera at eight. We have Theresa Milanollo
playing the violin with such art and skill, at four years old, that
Baillot said she must have played the violin before she was born. We
have Rembrandt drawing like a master of the art, before he could read.
Etc., etc.

Every one remembers these examples, but it must be borne in mind that
they do not constitute exceptions. They only represent a general
fact, which in these particular cases was so prominent as to attract
public attention. They are valuable as exponents to the public of a
fundamental law of nature, the diversity of natural faculties and
aptitudes, and the predominance of particular faculties among certain
children. Children endowed with these extraordinary and precocious
vocations are called _little prodigies_. This qualification is
sometimes used in a depreciatory sense, for the little prodigies are
accused of failing to carry out the promises of their childhood; it is
observed that the brilliant abilities of their early years have not
been guarantees of extraordinary success in their careers as grown men.
A child, whose drawings were wonderful at four years old, has become a
wretched dauber, as an established artist. A musician, who enchanted
his audience at eight years old, has grown up a very mediocre performer.

This remark is just, and the fact is explicable thus: If the little
prodigies have not become great men, it is because they have not
cultivated their faculties; because they have allowed sloth and disuse
to extinguish their talents. It does not suffice to possess natural
abilities for a science, or an art, work and study must strengthen
and develop them. Little prodigies are outstripped in their career by
hard workers, as is natural. They have come upon earth with remarkable
faculties which they had acquired during a previous life, but they have
done nothing to develop those faculties, which have remained as they
were at the moment of terrestrial birth. The man of genius is the man
who unceasingly cultivates and perfects such great natural aptitudes
and faculties as he has been endowed with at his birth.

The predominance of particular faculties in certain children is not
to be explained according to the common philosophy which discerns
the creation of a new soul in the birth of every infant. They are,
on the contrary, easily explicable according to the doctrine of
re-incarnations, indeed they are no more than a corollary of that
doctrine. Everything is comprehensible if a life, anterior to the
present, be admitted. The individual brings to his life here, the
intuition which is the result of the knowledge he has acquired during
his first existence. Men are of more or less advanced intelligence
and morality, according to the life which they have led before they
come into this world to play the parts which we can see. This is
self-evident in the case of a man who recommences his life. This man
had acquired certain faculties during his first, which are profitable
to him in his second existence. Perhaps he does not possess all the
faculties with which his first life was endowed, in their full and
perfect integrity, but he has what mathematicians call the _resultant_
of those faculties, and this resultant is a special aptitude, it
is _vocation_. He is a calculator, a painter, or a musician by
vocation, because, in his former human career he has had the faculty
of calculation, drawing, or music. We believe that it is impossible
to find any other explanation of our natural aptitudes. It will be
objected to this, that it is strange that aptitude and faculties should
be the resultant of a prior existence, of which we have, nevertheless,
no recollection. We reply to this objection that it is quite possible
to lose all remembrance of events which have happened, and yet to
preserve certain faculties of the soul which are independent of
particular and concrete facts, especially when those faculties are
powerful. We constantly see old men who have lost all recollection of
the events of their life, who no longer know anything of the history of
their time, nor indeed, of their own history, but who, nevertheless,
have not lost their faculties, or aptitudes. Linnæus, in his old age,
took pleasure in reading his own works, but forgot that he was their
author, and frequently exclaimed: "How interesting! How beautiful! I
wish I had written that!"

There is no reason to doubt that a child, after its re-incarnation,
may preserve the aptitudes of its previous existence, though it has
entirely lost the remembrance of the facts which took place and which
it witnessed during that period. These faculties reappear and become
active in the child, just as the half-extinguished flame of a fire
is rekindled by the breath of the wind. The breath which fans the
smouldering flame of human faculties is that of a second existence.

The absence of memory may be urged as an objection to re-incarnations
in the body of a child, but this argument does not apply to the
incarnation of the soul of an animal in a human body. The animal, being
almost without the faculty of memory, it is easy to understand that
its aptitudes only pass into the condition of man. The good or evil,
gentle or fierce instincts which human souls manifest so early, are
explained by the species of the animal through which the soul has been
transmitted. A child who has a faculty for music may have received the
soul of a nightingale, the sweet songster of our woods. A child who is
an architect by vocation may have inherited the soul of a beaver, the
architect of the woods and waters.

In short, the various aptitudes, the natural faculties, the vocations
of human beings, are easily explained by the doctrine of the
transmigration of souls. If we reject this system, we must charge God
with injustice, because we must believe that He has granted to certain
men useful faculties which He has refused to others, and made an
unequal distribution of intelligence and morality, these foundations
of the conduct and direction of life.

This reasoning appears to us to be beyond attack, for it does not rest
upon an hypothesis, but upon a fact: namely, the inequality of the
faculties among men, and of their intelligence and morality. This fact,
inexplicable by any theory of any received philosophy, is only to be
explained by the doctrine of re-incarnations, and forms the basis of
our reasoning.

Discussion for and against phrenology has been plentiful, and has
ended in the abandonment of the inquiry, because the ideas of ordinary
philosophy do not supply a sound theory on the subject. It has been
found more convenient to ignore the labours of Gall than to endeavour
to explain them. The truth is, that Gall has committed some errors of
detail, which is always the case with every founder of a new doctrine,
who cannot bring an unprecedented work to perfection by himself alone;
but his successors have rectified the errors of the system, and we are
now obliged to acknowledge that Gall's theory is correct. It is indeed
simply composed of observations which everyone may repeat for himself.

When Gall's theory, or _phrenology_, is applied to animals, the
evidence in its favour is astonishing. In the case of man the facts
are almost always confirmatory of the theory. It is certain that the
skull of an assassin does exhibit the abnormal developments indicated
by Gall, and that, according to the doctrine of the German anatomist,
the sentiments of affection, love, cupidity, discernment, &c., may
be recognised externally by the bumps in the human skull. It rarely
happens that the phrenologist, on examining the skull of a Troppmann,
or a Papavoine, fails to trace the hideous indications of evil passions
and brutality.

Unfortunately, many of our moralists find themselves seriously
embarrassed by philosophy, because their views are limited by the
commonplace philosophy of the day. Classic moralists ask themselves
whether a man with the bump of murder in his skull is responsible for
his crime, whether he is a free agent, whether he is so guilty as he is
held to be, when he yields to the cruel instincts with which nature,
in his case a wicked step-mother, has endowed him. Is it just to be
pitiless towards a man who has only obeyed his physical conformation,
almost as a madman obeys the impulses of his diseased mind? It would
seem that the punishment of assassination is an injustice, and men ask
themselves whether the criminal courts and the scaffold ought not to be
abolished, and whether the judge who condemns to death an individual,
who is not responsible for his actions, is not the real criminal?

The same reasoning, the same uncertainty apply to virtuous deeds. Is
much commendation due to the man who fulfils his duties exactly, to the
conscientious and faithful citizen, the honest and kindly individual,
if his wise and respectable conduct be simply obedience to the good
impulses communicated to him by his physical organization?

These results of phrenology were, it is evident, very embarrassing, and
almost immoral. Barbarity on the part of society which punishes the
guilty;--absence of merit in the well-behaved man! these consequences
were difficult and painful to admit, so the world got out of the
difficulty by rejecting phrenology.

It is quite unnecessary to reject phrenology; we may retain it,
and congratulate ourselves on a fresh conquest in the sphere of
the sciences of observation, if we hold the doctrine of previous
existences. Phrenology is most naturally explained, in fact, by that
doctrine. When it enters on the occupation of a human body, the soul
lends to the cerebral matter, which is the seat of thought, a certain
modification, a predominance in harmony with the faculties which that
soul possesses at the period of its birth, and which it has acquired in
an anterior animal or human existence. The brain is moulded by the soul
into conformity with its proper aptitudes, its acquired faculties; then
the bony covering of the skull, which moulds itself upon the cerebral
substance within its cavity, reproduces and gives expression to our
predominant faculties. The ancients who said, _Corpus cordis opus_ (the
body is the work of the soul, or the soul makes its body), expressed
this same idea with energetic conciseness.

There is, therefore, no need to excuse a murderer, there is no need to
deny his free will, there is no need to spare him the just chastisement
of his crime. It is not because there are certain protuberances on his
skull that the murderer dips his hands in the blood of his victims.
These protuberances are only the external indications of the evil
and vicious propensities with which he was born, by which he might
have been warned and corrected, and which he might have conquered by
the strength of his will, by a real and ardent desire to restore his
deformed and vicious soul to rectitude. It is always possible, by
adequate effort, to surmount the evil inclinations of one's nature;
every one of us can resist pride, idleness, and envy. The man who has
not corrected these bad impulses is guilty, and nothing can render a
crime committed in all the plenitude of his free will excusable. Thus,
neither God nor society is implicated in this question, if we accept
the doctrine of the plurality of existences.

Descartes and Leibnitz have demonstrated that the human understanding
possesses ideas called _innate_, that is to say, ideas which we bring
with us to our birth. This fact is certain. In our time, the Scotch
philosopher, Dugald Stewart, has put Descartes' theory into a more
precise form, by proving that the only real _innate_ idea, that which
has universal existence in the human mind after birth, is the idea,
or the _principle of causality_, a principle which makes us say and
think that there is no effect without cause, which is the beginning
of reason. In France, Laromiguière and Damiron have popularized this
discovery of the Scotch philosopher. Thus the classics of philosophy
record this proposition as a truth beyond the reach of doubt. We
unreservedly admit the principle of causality as the _innate_ idea
_par excellence_, and we take account of the fact. But we ask the
fashionable philosophy how it can explain it? In our minds there
are _innate ideas_, as Descartes has said; and the _principle of
causality_, which invincibly obliges us to refer from the effect to
the cause, is the most evident of those ideas which seem to make a
part of ourselves; but why have we innate ideas, where do they come
from, and how did they get into our minds? The classical philosophy,
the philosophy of Descartes, which reigns in France, at the Normal
School, and among the professors of the University of Paris, cannot
teach us that. It will be said, perhaps, to use the favourite argument
of Descartes, that we have innate ideas because it is the will of God,
who has created the soul. But such a reply is at once commonplace and
arbitrary, it may be used on all occasions--it is so used in fact--and
it is not a logical argument.

Innate ideas and the principle of causality are explained very simply
by the doctrine of the plurality of existences; they are, indeed,
merely deductions from that doctrine. A man's soul, having already
existed, either in the body of an animal or that of another man, has
preserved the trace of the impressions received during that existence.
It has lost, it is true, the recollection of actions performed during
its first incarnation; but the abstract principle of causality, being
independent of the particular facts, being only the general result of
the practice of life, must remain in the soul at its second incarnation.

Thus, the principle of causality, of which French philosophy cannot
offer any satisfactory theory, is explained in the simplest possible
manner, by the hypothesis of re-incarnations and of the plurality of
existences.

We have previously alluded to memory, and explained its relation
to re-incarnations, and the reasons why we are born without any
consciousness of a previous life. We have said, that if we come from
an animal, we have no memory, because the animal has none, or has
very little. We must now add, that if we come from a human soul,
reopening to the light of life, we are destitute of memory, because it
would disturb the trial of our terrestrial life, and even render it
impossible, as it is the intention of nature that we should recommence
the experience of existence without any trace, present to our minds,
of previous actions which might limit or embarrass our free will.

We cannot pass from this portion of our subject without calling
attention to the fact that the remembrance of a previous existence is
not always absolutely wanting to us. Who is there, who, in his hours of
solitary contemplation, has not seen a hidden world come forth before
his eyes from the far distance of a mysterious past? When, wrapped in
profound reverie, we let ourselves float on the stream of imagination,
into the ocean of the vague, and the infinite, do we not see magic
pictures which are not absolutely unknown to our eyes? do we not hear
celestial harmonies which have already enchanted our ears? These secret
imaginings, these involuntary contemplations, to which each of us can
testify, are they not the real recollections of an existence anterior
to our life here below?

Might we not also attribute to a vague remembrance, to an unconscious
sympathy, the real and profound pleasure which we derive from the mere
sight of plants, flowers, and vegetation? The aspect of a forest, of
a beautiful meadow, of green hills, touches us, moves us, sometimes
even to tears. Great masses of verdure, and the humble field daisy,
alike speak to our hearts. Each of us has a favourite plant, the flower
whose perfume he loves to inhale, or the tree whose shade he prefers.
Rousseau was moved by the sight of a yew tree, and Alfred de Musset
loved the willows so much, that he expressed a wish, piously fulfilled,
that a willow might over-shadow his grave.

This love of the vegetable world has a mysterious root in our hearts.
May we not recognize in so natural a sentiment, a sort of vague
remembrance of our original country, a secret and involuntary evocation
of the scene in which the germ of our soul was first loosed to the
light of the sun, the powerful promoter of life?

Besides the undecided and dim remembrance of pictures which seem to
belong to our anterior existences upon the globe, we sometimes feel
keen aspirations towards a kinder and calmer destiny than that which is
allotted to us here below. No doubt coarse beings, entirely attached
to material appetites and interests, do not feel these secret longings
for an unknown and happier destiny, but poetical and tender souls,
those who suffer from the wretched conditions of which human nature
is the slave and the martyr, take a vague pleasure in such melancholy
aspirations. In the radiant infinite they foresee celestial dwellings,
where they shall one day reside, and they are impatient to break the
ties which bind them to earth. Read the episode in Goethe's _Mignon_,
in which Mignon, wandering and exiled, pours out her young soul in
aspirations to heaven, in sublime longings for an unknown and blessed
future, which she feels drawing her towards itself, and ask yourself
whether the beautiful verses of the great poet, who was also a great
naturalist, do not interpret a truth of nature, _i.e._, the new life
which awaits us in the plains of ether. Why do all men, among all
peoples, raise their eyes to heaven in solemn moments, in the impulses
of passion, and the anguish of grief or pain? Does any one, under
such circumstances, contemplate the earth on which he stands? Our
eyes and our hearts turn towards the skies. The dying raise their
fallen orbs to heaven, and we look towards the celestial spaces in
those vague reveries which we have been describing. It is permitted
to us to believe that this universal tendency is an intuition of that
which awaits us after our terrestrial life, a natural revelation of
the domain which shall be ours one day, and which extends over the
celestial empyrean, to the bosom of ethereal space.

[Illustration]




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE SEVENTEENTH.

A SUMMARY OF THE SYSTEM OF THE PLURALITY OF LIVES.


WE propose now to collect, within a few summary propositions, the
principal features of the system of nature which we have defined.

1. The sun is the primary agent of life and organization.

2. In the primitive time of our globe, life began to appear in aquatic
and aërial plants, as well as in zoophytes. The same order reproduces
itself at present, in the point of departure, and in the development
of life and of souls. The solar rays, falling on the earth, and into
the waters, produce the formation of plants and that of zoophytes. The
rays of the sun by depositing in the waters and on the earth, _animated
germs_, emanating from the spiritualized beings who inhabit the sun,
bring about the birth of plants and zoophytes.

3. Plants and zoophytes are endowed with sensation. They enclose an
animal germ, just as a seed encloses an embryo.

4. The animal germ contained in the plant and in the zoophyte, passes,
at the death of each animal, into the body of the animal which comes
next to it in the ascending scale of organic perfection. From the
zoophyte the animated germ passes into the mollusc, from thence into
the articulated animal, the fish, or the reptile. From the body of the
reptile, it passes into that of the bird, and then into the mammifers.

In the inferior beings, for instance zoophytes, several animated germs
may be united to form the soul of a single being of a superior order.

5. In passing through the entire series of animals, this rudimentary
soul becomes perfected and acquires the beginnings of faculties.
Conscience, will, and judgment succeed to sensation. When the soul has
attained the body of a mammifer, it has acquired a certain number of
faculties. In addition to feeling, it has the basis of reason, _i.e._,
the _principle of causation_. From the body of a mammiferous animal
belonging to the superior species, the soul passes into the body of a
newly-born infant.

6. The child is born without memory, like the superior animal whence it
has proceeded. At a year old it acquires this faculty, and gradually
obtains others; imagination and thought develop themselves, reason
grows strong, memory becomes firm and extensive.

7. If the child dies before the age of twelve months, his soul, still
very imperfect, and devoid of active faculties, passes into the body of
another newly-born child, and recommences a new existence.

8. When a man dies, his body remains upon the earth, his soul rises
through the atmosphere to the ether which surrounds all the planets,
and enters into the body of the angel, or _superhuman being_.

9. If, during its sojourn upon the earth, the soul has not undergone
a sufficient amount of purification and ennobling, it recommences a
second existence, passing into the body of a newly-born child, and
losing the remembrance of its first life. Only when the soul has
attained the suitable degree of perfection, and, after having been
re-incarnate once, or many times, is empowered to leave our globe,
to assume a new body in the bosom of the ethereal plains, and thus
become a superhuman being, can it recover the recollection of its past
existences.

10. That which occurs upon the Earth also takes place in the other
planets of our solar system. In these planets vegetables, or beings
analogous to vegetables are produced by the action of the sun. By means
of his rays animated germs are carried into these globes, and plants
and inferior animals are produced. Then these animated germs contained
in the plants and inferior animals, passing successively through
the whole series of animals, end by producing a being, superior, in
intelligence and sensibility, to all the other living creatures. This
superior being, the analogue of the human being, we call planetary man.

11. The planetary man, who inhabits Mercury, Mars, Venus, &c., being
dead, his material form remains upon the planetary globe, and his
soul, provided it has acquired the necessary degree of purity, passes
into the surrounding ether, is incarnate in a new body, and produces a
superhuman being.

12. Phalanxes of these superhuman beings float in the planetary ether.
It witnesses the reunion of all the purified souls, which have come
from our globe and from the other planets. The organic types of these
beings is the same, whatever may be their planetary abode.

13. The superhuman being is provided with special attributes, he is
endowed with mighty faculties which raise him to a height infinitely
above terrestrial or planetary humanity. In this being, matter, in
comparison with the spiritual principle, is reduced to a much smaller
proportion than in man. His body is light and vaporous. He possesses
senses which are unknown to us, and the senses which he possesses
in common with us, are prodigiously intensified, subtilised, and
perfected. He can transport himself, in a short space of time, to any
distance, he can travel, without fatigue, from one point in space
to another. His vision is of immeasurable extent. He has intuitive
knowledge of many facts of nature which are hidden by an impenetrable
veil from feeble human perception.

14. The superhuman being who comes from the earth can place himself
in communication with men who are worthy of the privilege. He
directs their conduct, watches over their actions, enlightens their
understanding, inspires their hearts. When, in their turn, they too
reach the celestial dwellings, he receives them on the threshold of
their new abode, and initiates them into the life of blessedness beyond
the tomb.

15. The superhuman being is mortal. When he has terminated the normal
course of his existence in the ethereal spaces, he dies, and his
spiritual principle enters into a new body, that of the _archangel_,
or _arch-human being_, in whom the proportion of spiritual principle
predominates still more strongly, in proportion to matter.

16. These re-incarnations, in the depths of the ethereal spaces, are
reproduced more frequently than can be defined, and give us a series of
creatures of ever-increasing activity and power of thought and action.
At each promotion in the hierarchy of space these sublime beings find
the energy of their moral and intellectual faculties, their power of
feeling, and of loving, and their induction into the most profound
mysteries of the Universe, undergoing augmentation.

17. When he has arrived at the highest degree of the celestial
hierarchy, the _spiritualized being_ is absolutely perfect; in strength
and in intelligence. He is entirely freed from all material alloy, he
has no longer a body, he is a pure spirit. In this condition he passes
into the sun.

18. The sun, the king-star, is then the final and common sojourn of all
the _spiritualized beings_ who have come from the other planets, after
having passed through the long series of existences which have rolled
away in the plains of ether.

19. The _spiritualized beings_ gathered together in the sun, send down
upon the earth and upon the planets emanations from their essence, that
is to say, _animated germs_. These _animated germs_ are carried by the
sunbeams, which distribute organization, feeling, and life over all the
planets, at the same time that they preside at all the great physical
and mechanical operations which take place on the earth, and on the
other planets of our solar world.

20. The formation of the aërial and aquatic plants, and the birth of
inferior animals or zoophytes, are, as we have said, the result of the
action of the sun's rays on our globe. Then commences the series of the
transmigrations of souls through the bodies of various animals, which
results in man, in the superhuman being, and in all the succession of
celestial metempsychoses, whose ultimate term is the spiritualized
being or the dweller in the sun.

Thus does the great chain of nature close and complete itself;--that
uninterrupted chain of vital activity, which has neither beginning nor
end, and which links all created beings into one family, the universal
family of the worlds.

Nature is not a straight line, but a circle, and we cannot say where
this wonderful circle begins or ends. The wisdom of the Egyptians,
which represented the world as a serpent coiled around itself, was the
symbol of a great truth which the science of our time has once more
brought to light.

[Illustration]




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE EIGHTEENTH.

REPLIES TO SOME OBJECTIONS.--FIRST: THE IMMORTALITY OF THE SOUL, WHICH
IS THE BASIS OF THIS SYSTEM, IS NOT DEMONSTRATED.--SECOND: WE HAVE NOT
ANY RECOLLECTION OF ANTERIOR EXISTENCES.--THIRD: THIS SYSTEM IS NO
OTHER THAN THE METEMPSYCHOSIS OF THE ANCIENTS.--FOURTH: THIS SYSTEM IS
CONFOUNDED WITH DARWINISM.


HAVING brought into relief, by the preceding summary, the entire
doctrine of successive lives and of re-incarnations, we must now meet
some objections which will have been provoked by these propositions,
and reply to them in a way which has the advantage of still more
distinctly explaining our ideas on several points.

First objection. It will be said: The existence of an immortal soul
in man forms the basis of all this reasoning. Now, the fact of the
existence of an immortal soul is not demonstrated in the course of this
work, and, besides, it could not be demonstrated.

The following is our reply to this first objection.

We are composed of two elements, or of two substances; one which
thinks--the soul, or the immaterial substance; the other, which
does not think--the body, or the material substance. This truth is
self-evident. Thought is a fact, certain in itself; and it is another
fact, equally certain, that my arms, my nails or beard, do not think.
Here, then, is the proof of the immortality of the soul, or thinking
principle.

Matter does not perish; observation and science prove that material
bodies are never annihilated, that they merely change their condition,
their form, and their place; but are always to be found somewhere
intact as to their substance. Our bodies decompose, and are dissolved,
but the matter of which they were formed is never destroyed, it is
dispersed in the air, the fire, and the water, in which it produces
new material combinations, but it is not destroyed for all that. Now,
if matter does not perish, but only becomes transformed, all the more
certainly must the soul be indestructible and imperishable. Like
matter, it must be transformed, without being destroyed.

Descartes has said, _I think, therefore I am_. This reasoning, so much
admired in the schools, has always appeared to us rather weak. To
give force to the syllogism, he should have said, _I think, therefore
I am immortal_. My soul is immortal, because it exists, and it does
exist since I think. Thus the fact of the immortality of the spiritual
principle which we bear within us is self-evident, and we do not need
any of the demonstrations which abound in philosophical works, and have
been put forth from antiquity until our own time; we need no _Treatises
on the Soul_ to establish its existence.

The difficulty does not consist in proving that a spiritual principle
exists within us, that is to say, a principle which resists death,
because, in order to contest the existence of this principle, it would
be necessary to contest thought. The real problem is to find out
whether this spiritual and immortal principle which we bear within
us, is to live again, after our death, in ourselves or in others. The
question is, whether the immortal soul will be born again in the same
individual, physically transformed, in the same person, in the _ego_,
or whether it will pass into the possession of a being strange to that
person.

We may remark here that on this all the interest of the question for
us turns. It would be of very little importance to us, in reality,
whether the soul were immortal or not, if the soul of each of us,
being really indestructible and immortal, should pass to another than
ourselves, or if, reviving in us, it did not possess the memory of our
past existence. The resurrection of the soul without the memory of the
past would be a real annihilation, this would be the nothingness of the
materialists. It must be, then, that the soul lives again after our
death, in ourselves, and that this soul, then, has clear remembrance
of all the actions which took place in its previous existences. It
behoves us, in short, to know, not whether our souls are immortal--that
fact is self-evident--but whether they will belong to us in the other
life, whether, after our death, we shall have identity, individuality,
_personality_. It is to the study of this question that the present
work is devoted. We are endeavouring to prove that the soul of the
man remains always the same, in spite of its numerous peregrinations,
notwithstanding the variety of form of the bodies in which it is
successively lodged, when it passes from the animal to the man, from
the man to the superhuman being, and from the superhuman being, after
other celestial transmigrations, to the spiritualized being who
inhabits the sun. We are endeavouring to establish that the soul,
notwithstanding all its journeys, in the midst of its incarnations and
various metamorphoses, remains always identical with itself, doing
nothing more in each metempsychosis, in each metamorphosis of the
exterior being, than perfect and purify itself, growing in power and in
intellectual grasp. We are endeavouring to prove, that, notwithstanding
the shadows of death, our individuality is never destroyed, and that
we shall be born again in the heavens, with the same moral personality
which was ours here below; in other words, that the human _person_ is
imperishable. It is for the reader to say whether we have attained
our object, whether we have established the truth of this doctrine
conformably with the laws of reasoning and the facts of science.

If an absolute demonstration of the existence of an immaterial
principle in us be insisted upon, we must reply, that philosophy,
like geometry, has its axioms, that is to say, its self-evident
truths, which need not, or, if we choose to say so, which cannot be
mathematically demonstrated. The existence of the soul is one of those
axioms of philosophy. Diogenes answered a rhetorician who denied
movement by walking in his presence. By expressing any thought, by
saying "yes," or "no," we may prove the existence of the immortal soul
to the sophists who would attempt to contest it.

We have just said that geometry has its axioms. Let us remember that
an entire school of geometricians amused themselves by disputing the
axioms, under the pretext that it was impossible to demonstrate them.
We were present, in December, 1866, at a curious sitting of the
Institute, during which M. Lionville, a celebrated mathematician, and
professor at the Sorbonne, explained this strange polemic with great
skill.

In attempting to demonstrate the propositions of geometry, certain
axioms, _i.e._, self-evident truths, must be admitted in the first
place. Otherwise, the primary reasoning will have no basis. But, among
the numerous propositions of this kind which present themselves to the
mind, and which result from the admission of one of their number, which
is the most evident? That depends on the nature of the mind of each of
us, and therefore it is that there is not, and that there never will
be, an argument on this question.

There is a school of geometry which pretends to demonstrate everything.
There is another, the true and good school, which, recognizing that the
human mind has limits, and that everything is not accessible by our
thoughts, lays down, under the name of axioms, certain truths which do
not require proof, or, which is often the same thing, are incapable of
proof.

Among the number of self-evident truths, or truths difficult of
demonstration, we find the question of parallel lines. What are two
parallels? Two lines which never meet each other. But how can we prove
this property of two lines by reasoning? That is not, exactly speaking,
possible, since the notion of the infinite is not admitted, or not
understood by everybody, and cannot, therefore, serve as the basis of
an absolutely rigorous argument.

It was for this reason that Euclid, the founder of geometry in ancient
times, laid down this truth as a simple axiom, requiring (hence the
_postulates_ of Euclid, from the Latin verb _postulare_, to demand),
that the truth of this principle, which he acknowledged himself unable
to prove by logical demonstration, should be granted.

A hundred geometricians, since Euclid, who renounced the attempt to
demonstrate it, have tried to prove this theory of parallels, but
not one has succeeded. It was on the occasion of a fresh attempt at
demonstration by a mathematician in the provinces, that M. Lionville
spoke before the Academy, to recall the principles almost unanimously
professed by geometricians on this subject.

The question is, in reality, thoroughly understood; it is treated on
all works on geometry, and has been for a long time a settled matter.
But certain minds are tempted by the subtlety of certain subjects,
and the question of the _postulatum_ turns up periodically before the
learned societies, as it does in the conversations between the teachers
of mathematics.

M. Lionville reminded his audience that many demonstrations of this
celebrated proposition had been attempted, but had not succeeded,
because there are limits within which human reason ceases to be
accepted by all. M. Lionville even proposed that the question of
the _postulatum_ should be classed among those whose examination is
interdicted by the Academy, such as the quadrature of the circle, and
the trisection of the angle. On this point M. Lionville quoted an
anecdote relative to Lagrange. That great mathematician, believing that
he had found an absolute solution of the _postulatum_, went to the
Academy to read his demonstration, but on reflection, he changed his
mind, and decided that it would be better not to publish it. He put his
manuscript in his pocket, and it never came out.

Several geometricians spoke on this occasion, and confirmed the views
of M. Lionville; and when the demonstration submitted by the professor
was examined, it was found to be false. We must therefore recognize and
proclaim that, in geometry, the axioms cannot be demonstrated.

Many people endeavour to derive an argument from that discussion
against the certainty of geometry. Among them is M. Bouillaud, a
learned physician and member of the Institute, who declared that he
could not get over his astonishment at hearing it said that there
were several geometries, and that even the bases of that science were
doubtful. Reassure yourself, great and good physician, geometry has
nothing to lose and nothing to hide, and the certainty of its methods
is not imperilled in this question. That which really was at stake
was the methodical, classical teaching of geometry. That which was
discussed was the best means of instilling the principles of science
into the mind. But, as to the truths of geometry, as to the facts
themselves, they are secure from all uncertainty, all these disputes
upon the truth which must be recognized as axioms, or demonstrated as
theorems, are only fancies of the rhetoricians, as vain as they are
subtle. No trace of them remains when they are transported into the
practice of facts and of mathematical deductions. Ask the astronomers
who calculate the orbit of the stars, who fix the moment of an eclipse
with unerring precision, ask those who have calculated the parallaxes,
whether they trouble themselves by inquiring how it may be demonstrated
that the angles of a triangle are equal to two right angles. All the
scholastic subtleties are gotten rid of in the course of practical
work.

If we may lay aside, without occupying ourselves with them, the
mathematicians who amuse themselves by disputing the axioms of
geometry, we may do the same with the few sophists who desire to
dispute the axioms of philosophy and reason, and especially the
principle of the existence of an immortal soul in man. Let us leave
them to their disputations, and go on our way.

Second objection:--We have no recollection of having existed prior to
our entrance into this world.

This is, we acknowledge the greatest and most serious argument against
our system. But we must hasten to add, that if this difficulty did not
exist, if the remembrance of a life anterior to our present existence
were always before us, the doctrine of plurality of lives would need
no reinforcement from the proofs for which we appeal to argument, to
the facts of observation, and to logical induction. It would be plain
before our eyes, it would be self-evident. All our merit, all our task
in this work, is to endeavour to procure admission of the plurality of
existences, though we have no remembrance of our past lives.

We have already treated this question incidentally, and we will now
summarize all that has been advanced in former chapters to explain the
absence of recollection of our past existences.

The soul in its first human incarnation, if it proceeds from a superior
animal, could not possess memory, because in animals that faculty has a
small range, and brief duration. If a second or third human incarnation
is in question, the difficulty is serious, because it implies that the
man who has lived and who is born again, has forgotten his previous
life.

But, in the first place, this forgetfulness is not absolute. We have
remarked before that in the human soul certain results of impressions
received prior to the terrestrial life always linger. Natural
aptitudes, special faculties, vocations, are the traces of impressions
formerly received, of knowledge already acquired, and, being revealed
from the cradle, cannot be explained otherwise than by a life gone by.
We have lost the remembrance of the facts, but there remains the moral
consequence, the _resultant_, the philosophy, so to speak, and thus
the _innate ideas_ indicated by Descartes, which exist in the soul
from its birth, and also the _principle of causality_, which teaches
us that every effect has a cause, are explained. This principle can
only be derived from facts, because an abstraction can only be based
upon concrete facts, upon accomplished events, and this abstraction, or
this metaphysical idea, which we have from our birth, implies anterior
facts, which must belong to a past life.

We have already said that when the soul gives free course to reverie,
it beholds mysterious and undefined spectacles, which seem to belong
to worlds which are not quite unknown to us, but in no wise resembling
this earth. In this vague contemplation there is something like a
confused remembrance of an anterior life. The love which we bear to
flowers, plants, and all vegetation, may be as we have already pointed
out, a grateful recollection of our first origin.

If, however, these considerations be not accepted as valid, there
is another, which, to our mind, perfectly explains the absence of
a remembrance of our former existences. It is, we believe, by a
premeditated decree of nature, that the memory of our past lives is
denied to us while we are on the earth. M. André Pezzani, the author of
an excellent book called "_Pluralité des existences de l'âme_," replies
to the argument of oblivion, thus:

    "Our terrestrial sojourn is only a new trial, as Dupont de Nemours,
    that wonderful writer of the eighteenth century, who outstripped
    all modern beliefs, has said. If this be so, can we not perceive
    that the remembrance of past lives would embarrass these trials
    by removing the greater part of their difficulties, and, in
    proportion, of their merit, and destroying their spontaneity? We
    live in a world in which free-will is all powerful, the inviolable
    law of the advancement and the progressive initiation of men. If
    past existences were known, the soul would know the meaning and
    the bearing of the trials reserved for it here below; indolent and
    idle, it would harden itself against the designs of Providence,
    and would be either paralyzed by its despair of overcoming them,
    or, if better disposed and more virile, it would accept and
    accomplish them unfailingly. But neither one nor the other of
    these positions is fitting. Our efforts must be free, voluntary,
    sheltered from the influences of the past; the field of strife must
    be seemingly untrodden, so that the athlete shall show and exercise
    his virtue. Previously gained experience, the energies which he
    has acquired, help him in the new strife, but in a latent way of
    which he is unconscious, for the imperfect soul undergoes these
    re-incarnations, in order to develop its previously manifested
    qualities, and to strip itself of those vices and defects which
    oppose themselves to the law of its ascension. What would happen
    if all men remembered their previous lives? The order of the earth
    would be overturned, or at least, it would not remain in its
    present condition. _Léthé_, like free-will, is a law of the world
    as it is."[18]

To this it will be objected that there is destruction of identity where
memory does not exist, and that expiation, in order to be profitable
to the guilty soul, must co-exist with the remembrance of faults
committed in the previous existence, for the man is not punished who
does not know that he is punished. We may remark here that we do not
use the word "expiation" precisely as theologians employ it, but
rather as a new dwelling conferred on the soul, in order that it may
resume the interrupted course of its advance towards perfection. We
believe that the remembrance of our previous life, forbidden to us
during our terrestrial sojourn, will come back when we shall have
attained the happy realms of ether, in which we shall pass through
the existences which are to succeed our life on earth. Among the
number of the perfections and moral faculties forming the attributes
of the superhuman being, the memory of his anterior lives will be
included. Identity will be born again for him. Having suffered a
momentary collapse, his individuality will be restored to him, with his
conscience and his liberty.

Let us hearken awhile to Jean Reynaud, as he tells us in his fine book,
_Terre et Ciel_, the marvels of that memory which shall be restored to
man after his being shall have undergone a series of changes.

    "The integral restitution of our recollections," says Jean Reynaud,
    "seems to us one of the inherent principal conditions of our future
    happiness. We cannot fully enjoy life, until we become, like Janus,
    kings of time, until we know how to concentrate in us, not only
    the sentiment of the present, but that of the future and the past.
    Then, if perfect life be one day given to us, perfect memory must
    also be given to us. And now, let us try to think of the infinite
    treasures of a mind enriched by the recollections of an innumerable
    series of existences, entirely different from each other, and
    yet admirably linked together by a continual dependence. To this
    marvellous garland of metempsychoses, encircling the universe,
    let us add, if the perspective seem worthy of our ambition, a
    clear perception of the particular influence of our life upon
    the ulterior changes of each of the worlds which we shall have
    successively inhabited; let us aggrandize our life in immortalizing
    it, and wed our history grandly with the history of the heavens.
    Let us confidently collect together every material of happiness,
    since thus the all-powerful bounty of the Creator wills it, and
    let us construct the existence which the future reserves for
    virtuous souls; let us plunge into the past by our faith, while we
    are waiting for more light, even as by our faith we plunge into
    the future. Let us banish the idea of disorder from the earth, by
    opening the gates of time beyond our birth, as we have banished
    the idea of injustice by opening other gates beyond the tomb; let
    us stretch duration in every direction, and, notwithstanding the
    obscurity which rests upon our two horizons, let us glorify the
    Creator in glorifying ourselves, who are God's ministers on earth,
    let us remember, with pious pride, that we are the younger brethren
    of the angels."

Under what condition does the soul regain the remembrance of its entire
past? Jean Reynaud specifies two periods. 1. That which is fulfilled,
as the Druids hold, in the world of journeys and trials, of which the
earth forms a part. 2. The period during which the soul, set free from
the miseries and vicissitudes of the terrestrial life, pursues its
destinies in the ever widening and progressive circle of happiness; a
period which passes outside of the earth. In the first period there
is an eclipse of the memory at each passage into a new sphere; in the
second period, whatever may be the displacements and transfigurations
of the person, the memory is preserved full and entire. This theory of
Reynaud's is admitted by M. Pezzani.

With the exception of that _eclipse of the memory at each passage into
a new sphere_, which seems to us incomprehensible and useless, we
think, with Jean Reynaud, that the complete remembrance of our previous
existences will return to the soul when it shall inhabit the ethereal
regions, the sojourn of the superhuman being. In this manner only, in
our opinion, can the defect of man's memory, concerning his previous
existences, be explained. Thus, the argument from that defect of memory
does not remain without reply. Writers who have preceded us, and have
meditated on this question, had already found the solution which we
offer. This objection is not, then, of a nature to throw doubt on the
doctrine of plurality of existences. Let us conclude, with M. Pezzani,
that it is by a design of nature, that man, during this life, loses the
remembrance of what he formerly was. If we retained the recollection
of our anterior existences, if we had before our eyes, as if seen in a
mirror, all that we had done during our former lives, we should be much
troubled by the remembrance, which would harass the greater part of our
actions, and deprive us of our complete free will.

Why is an invincible dread of death common to all men? Death is not,
in reality, very dreadful, since it is not a termination, but a simple
change of condition. If man feels terror of death to such an extent,
we may be sure that nature imposes that sentiment upon him, in the
interests of the preservation of his species. Thus, in our belief,
the fear of death and the absence of memory of our former lives are
referable to the same cause. The first is a salutary illusion imposed
by God upon the weakness of humanity; the second is a means of securing
to man full liberty of action.

Another objection will be made to our doctrine. It will be said: The
re-incarnation of souls is not a new idea; it is, on the contrary, an
idea as old as humanity itself. It is the metempsychosis, which from
the Indians passed to the Egyptians, from the Egyptians to the Greeks,
and which was afterwards professed by the Druids.

The metempsychosis is, in fact, the most ancient of philosophical
conceptions; it is the first theory imagined by men, in order to
explain the origin and the destiny of our race. We do not recognize an
argument against our system of nature in this remark, but rather indeed
a confirmation of it. An idea does not pass down from age to age, and
find acceptance during five or six centuries, by the picked men of
successive generations, unless it rests upon some serious foundation.
We are not called upon to defend ourselves because our opinions
harmonize with the philosophical ideas which date from the most distant
time in the history of the peoples. The first observers, and the
oriental philosophers in particular, who are the most ancient thinkers
of all whose writings we possess, had not, like us, their minds warped,
prejudiced, turned aside by routine, or trammelled by the words of
teachers. They were placed very close to nature, and they beheld its
realities, without any preconceived ideas, derived from education in
particular schools. We cannot, therefore, but applaud ourselves when
we find that the logical deduction of our ideas has led us back to the
antique conception of Indian wisdom.

There is, however, a profound difference between our system of the
plurality of lives, and the oriental dogma of the metempsychosis. The
Indian philosophers, the Egyptians, and the Greeks, who inherited the
maxims of Pythagoras, admitted that the soul, on leaving a human body,
enters into that of an animal, to undergo punishment. We entirely
reject this useless step backward. Our metempsychosis is upward and
onward, it never steps down, or back.

A brief sketch of the dogma of the animal metempsychosis, such as it
was professed by the different philosophical sects of antiquity will
not be out of place here. We shall explain in what particulars the
oriental dogma differs from our system, and show, at the same time,
how popular the metempsychosis was among the peoples of antiquity, in
Europe as well as in Asia.

The most ancient known book is that of the _Védas_, which contains
the religious principles of the Indians or Hindoos. In this code of
the primary religions of Asia is found the general dogma of the final
absorption of souls in God. But, before it reaches its final fusion
with the great All, it is necessary that the human soul should have
traversed all the active orders of life. The soul, therefore, performed
a series of transmigrations and journeys, in various places, in
different worlds, and passed through the bodies of several different
animals. Men who had not done good works went into the moon or the
sun; or else they came back to the earth, and assumed the bodies of
certain animals, such as dogs, butterflies, adders, &c. There were
also intermediary places between the earth and the sun, whither souls
who had only been partly faulty, went to pass a period of expiation. We
find the following in the _Védas_:--

    "If a man has done works which lead to the world of the sun, his
    soul repairs to the world of the sun; if he has done works which
    lead to the world of the Creator, his soul goes to the world of the
    Creator."

The book of the _Védas_ says, very distinctly, that the animal, as well
as the man, has the right of passing to other worlds, as a recompense
for his good works. The oriental wisdom felt none of that uncalled-for
contempt for animals which is characteristic of modern philosophy and
religion.

    "All animals, according to the degree of knowledge and intelligence
    which they have had in this world, go into other worlds. The man
    whose object was the recompense of his good works, being dead,
    goes into the world of the moon. There he is at the service of the
    overseers of the half of the moon in its crescent. They welcome
    him joyfully, but he is not tranquil, he is not happy; all his
    recompense is to have attained for a while to the world of the
    moon. On the expiration of this time, the servant of the overseers
    of the moon descends again into hell; and is born as a worm, a
    butterfly, lion, fish, dog, or under any other form (even under a
    human form)."[19]

    "At the last stages of his descent, if one asks, who are you? he
    replies: I come from the world of the moon, the wages of the deeds
    done during my life merely for the sake of reward. I am again
    invested with a body; I have suffered in the womb of my mother,
    and in leaving it; I hope finally to acquire the knowledge of Him
    who is all things, to enter into the right way of worship and of
    meditation without any consideration of reward.

    "In the world of the moon, one receives the reward of good works
    which are done without renunciation of their fruits, of their
    merits; but this reward has only a fixed time, after which one is
    born again in an inferior world, a wicked world, a world which is
    the recompense of evil.

    "By the renunciation of all pleasure, and of all reward by seeking
    God only, with unshaken faith, we reach the sun which has no end,
    the great world, whence we return no more to a world which is the
    recompense of evil."[20]

The Egyptians, having borrowed this doctrine from the Hindoos, made
it the basis of their religious worship. Herodotus informs us,[21]
that, according to the Egyptians, the human soul, on issuing from a
completely decomposed body, enters into that of some animal. The soul
takes three thousand years to pass from this body through a series of
others, and at the conclusion of this interval, the same soul returns
to the human species, entering the form of a newly-born infant.

The Egyptians employed excessive caution in the preservation of human
bodies. They embalmed the corpses of their relatives or of personages
of importance to the state, and thus prepared the mummies which are
to be seen in all our museums. The universal practice of embalming
was not intended, as has been supposed, to keep the human body ready
to receive the soul, returning at the end of three thousand years,
to seek its primitive abode. It had another object. It was supposed
that the soul did not commence its migrations after the death of the
human body, while any portion of the corpse remained entire. Hence the
efforts made by the Egyptians, to retard the moment of separation by
the preservation of the corpse as long as possible. Servius says:

    "The Egyptians, renowned for their wisdom, prolonged the duration
    of corpses, that the existence of the soul, attached to that of
    the body, might be preserved, and might not pass away quickly to
    others. The Romans, on the contrary, burn corpses, so that the
    soul, resuming its liberty, might immediately re-enter nature."

The most ancient and remarkable of the Greek philosophers, Pythagoras,
found out the doctrine of the metempsychosis, in his travels in Egypt.
He adopted it in his school, and the whole of the Greek philosophy
held, with Pythagoras, that the souls of the wicked pass into the
bodies of animals. Hence the abstinence from flesh meat, prescribed
by Pythagoras to his disciples, a precept which he also derived from
Egypt, where respect for animals was due to the general persuasion that
the bodies of beasts were tenanted by human souls, and, consequently,
that by ill-treating animals, one ran the risk of injuring one's own
ancestors. Empedocles, the philosopher, adopted the Pythagorean system.
He says, in lines quoted by Clement of Alexandria:--

    "I, too, have been a young maiden,
    A tree, a bird, a mute fish in the seas."

Plato, the most illustrious of the philosophers of Greece, accords a
large place to the views of Pythagoras, even amid his most sublime
conceptions of the soul, and of immortality. He held that the human
soul passes into the body of animals, in expiation of its crimes. Plato
said that on earth we remember what we have done during our previous
existences, and that to learn is to remember one's self.

    "Cowards," he says, "are changed into women, vain and frivolous
    men into birds, the ignorant into wild beasts, lower in kind and
    crawling upon the earth, in proportion as their idleness has
    been more degrading; stained and corrupt souls animate fishes
    and aquatic reptiles." Again, he says: "Those who have abandoned
    themselves to intemperance and gluttony enter into the bodies of
    animals with like propensities. They who have loved injustice,
    cruelty, and rapine assume the bodies of wolves, hawks, and
    falcons. The destiny of souls has relation to the lives which they
    have led."

Plato held that the soul took only one thousand years to complete
its journey through the bodies of animals; but he believed that this
journey repeated itself ten times over, which gives a total of 10,000
years for the completion of the entire circle of existences. Between
each of these periods the soul made a brief sojourn in Hades. During
this sojourn it drank of the waters of the river Lethe, in order to
lose the recollection of its previous existence, before re-commencing
its new life.

Plato exalted the dogma of the animal metempsychosis by his grand
views upon spiritual immortality and the liberty of man, ideas which
even at the present time are quoted with admiration, but for whose
recapitulation we have not space.

The metempsychosis holds less rank in the Platonic doctrine than in
the Pythagorean and Egyptian systems. All its importance was resumed
among the philosophers of the Alexandrian school, who continued, in
Egypt, the traditions of the Platonic philosophy, and revived the
days of the schools of Athens on the soil of the Pharaohs. Plotinus,
the commentator of Plato, says, concerning the doctrine of the
transmigration of souls:

    "It is a dogma recognized from the utmost antiquity, that if the
    soul commits errors, it is condemned to expiate them by undergoing
    punishment in the Shades, and then it passes into new bodies to
    begin its trials over again."

This passage proves that the ancients held the sojourn of the soul in
hell to be only temporary, and that it was always followed by fresh
trials, terrible and painful in proportion to the errors which were to
be repaired.

    "When," says Plotinus, "we have gone astray in the multiplicity
    of our corporal passions, we are punished, first by the straying
    itself, and afterwards, when we resume a body, by finding ourselves
    in worse conditions. The soul, on leaving the body, becomes that
    power which it has most developed. Let us, then, fly from base
    things here below, and raise ourselves to the intelligent world, so
    that we may not fall into the purely sensational life, by following
    images which are merely of the senses, or into the vegetative life,
    by indulging in mere physical pleasure and gluttony; let us raise
    ourselves to the intelligent world, to intelligence, to God.

    "Those who have exercised human faculties are born again as men.
    Those who have used their senses only pass into the bodies of
    brutes, and especially into the bodies of wild beasts, if they
    have been accustomed to yield to violent impulses of anger; so
    that the different bodies which they animate are conformable to
    their various propensities. Those who have done nothing but indulge
    their appetites pass into the bodies of luxurious and gluttonous
    animals. Others, who, instead of indulging concupiscence or anger,
    have degraded their senses by sloth, are reduced to vegetate in the
    plants, because in their previous existences they have exercised
    nothing but vegetative power, and have only worked to become trees.
    Those who have loved the enjoyment of music over much, but have
    led lives otherwise pure, pass into the bodies of melodious birds.
    Those who have governed tyrannically, but have no other vice,
    become eagles. Those who have spoken lightly of celestial things
    are changed into birds which fly towards the higher regions of the
    air. He who has acquired civil virtues becomes a man again, but
    if he does not possess these virtues to a sufficient extent, he
    is transformed into a sociable creature, such as the bee, or some
    other being of that species."

Every one knows that among our own ancestors, and the Druids or
high-priests of the Gauls, the metempsychosis was held almost in the
same sense as among the Egyptians and the Greeks. It is, so to speak,
a national faith to us, for it has been held in honour, its dogmas
have flourished, in the same countries in which we now dwell. We
have recalled these facts, and collected these passages from ancient
writers, only in order to define the manner in which the Egyptians,
as well as the Greeks, and, in later times, the Gauls, understood the
metempsychosis. Our system differs from the old oriental conception,
which was embraced by the Egyptians, the Greeks, and the Druids, in our
denial that the human soul can ever return to the body of an animal. We
believe that the human soul has already passed through this probation,
and that it never can be renewed. In nature, in fact, the animal has a
part inferior to that of man; it is below our species in its degree of
intelligence, and it cannot have either merit or demerit. Its faculties
do not invest it with the entire responsibility of its actions. It is
but an intermediate link between the plant and man; it has certain
faculties, but we cannot pretend that those faculties assimilate it to
moral man.

Thus, we reject this doctrine of the return of the human soul to
conditions through which it has already passed. Retrogression has no
place in our system. The soul, in its progressive march, may pause for
an instant, but it never turns back. We admit that man is condemned to
re-commence an ill-fulfilled existence, but this new experience is made
in a human body, in a new covering of the same living type, and not in
the form of an inferior being. The oriental dogma of the metempsychosis
misapprehended the great law of progress, which is, on the contrary,
the foundation of our doctrine.

Fourth objection. It will be said to us: You maintain that our souls
have already existed in the bodies of animals; do you, then, share the
belief of those naturalists who derive man from the monkey?

No, certainly not. The French and German naturalists, who, applying
Darwin's theory of the transformation of species to man, have declared
man to be derived from the monkey, rely entirely on anatomical
considerations. Vogt, Bruchner, Huxley, and Broca compare the skeleton
of the monkey with that of primitive man; they study the form of the
skull of each respectively, they measure the width and the prominence
of the jaws, &c., &c. From the results, they draw the conclusion that
man is anatomically derived from a species of quadrumane. The soul is
not taken into any consideration by these men of science, who argue
precisely as if nothing of the thinking kind existed in the anatomical
cavities which they explore and measure. It is, on the contrary, by
comparing the faculties of the human soul with the faculties of animals
that we arrive at our conclusion. The animal forms signify nothing to
us; the spirit, in its various manifestations, is our chief object.
Why, indeed, should we seek to derive man from the monkey, rather than
from any other mammiferous animal, rather than from the wolf, or the
fox? Is there much difference between the skeleton of the monkey and
that of the wolf, the fox, or any other carnivorous beast? Put three
or four of those skeletons together, and you will not find it easy to
distinguish one from the other, if, instead of selecting a monkey of a
superior species, you take an inferior quadrumane, a striated monkey, a
lemur, or a macao.

Interrogate the physiological functions of the monkey. You will find
them, and the organs which serve those functions, perfectly similar
in all animals, and those organs identical in their structure. Why,
then, should you derive man from the monkey, rather than from the
wolf or the fox? Is it because the monkeys in our menageries have a
distant resemblance to man, in their occasional vertical attitude,
and in certain features which are caricatures of those of the human
face? How many of the species among the immense simial family of the
two hemispheres present this resemblance? Hardly five or six. All the
others have the bestial snout in its fullest development, and are
very inferior in intelligence to most of the other mammifers. If it be
from the organic point of view that you derive man from the monkey,
because certain species of quadrumanes are caricatures of men in their
physiognomy, why may he not be derived as reasonably from the parrot,
which emits articulate sounds, the caricature of the human voice, or
even the nightingale, because that melodious songster of the woods
modulates his notes like our singers?

The consideration of animal forms is of very little importance in our
estimation, when the matter in hand is to determine the place occupied
by a living being in the scale of creation, for these forms are similar
in type among all the superior animals, the body varying very slightly
in structure in all the great class of mammifers; and also because the
physiological functions are discharged in a similar manner by all.
The basis on which we ground our researches is quite different, it is
the spiritual basis; we ask the faculties of the mind to supply our
materials of comparison.

It must not be supposed, therefore, that we espouse the doctrines of
Darwin and those who agree with him, because we hold that the soul has
a previous dwelling in the bodies of several animals, before it reaches
the human body; because we admit that the spiritual principle begins
in the germ of plants, and that this germ grows and develops itself in
passing through the bodies of a progressive series of animal species,
to issue at length in man, the end of its elaboration and perfection.
The Darwinists take into consideration only the anatomical structure,
and put aside the soul. We consider its faculties only. We are guided,
not by the materialistic idea which directs and inspires these men of
science, but on the contrary, on a reasoned-out spiritualism.

Our system of nature may be criticised, or rejected. We offer it merely
as a personal view, and would not impose it on any reader. The merit of
this philosophical and scientific conception, if it has any, consists
in the vast synthesis by which it binds together all the living
creatures which people the solar world, from the minute plant in which
the germ of organization first appears, to the animal; from the animal
to the man; and from the man to the series of superhuman and archhuman
beings who inhabit the ethereal spheres; and finally, from them to the
radiant dwellers in the solar star. In collecting together, on the
one hand, all that modern chemistry has learned of the composition of
plants, and the physical phenomena of their respiration, and on the
other hand, everything which is known of the physical and chemical
properties of solar light, the idea struck us that the rays of the sun
form the vehicle by whose means the animated germs are placed in the
plants. While meditating upon what has been written by the philosophers
Charles Bonnet, Dupont de Nemours, and Jean Reynaud, upon the physical
condition of resuscitated human beings, and dwelling upon the destiny
of men beyond the formidable barrier of the tomb, in short, while
drinking at the most various springs of philosophical and scientific
knowledge, we have composed this attempt at a new philosophy of the
universe.

This system may be erroneous, and another, more logical and more
learned, may be substituted for it. But there will remain, we may hope,
the synthesis which we have established from all the facts of the
physical and moral order which we have collected together, the links
by which we attach all the beings of creation one to another, which
comprehends both the moral and organic attributes of these beings;--a
vast ladder of nature, on whose steps we place everything that has
life; the endless circle, in which we link all the rings of the chain
of living beings. The theoretic explanation of all these facts, thus
grouped, may not perhaps be accepted, but we believe that they are
correctly placed in juxtaposition, and that any theory which pretends
to explain the universe must be established upon the basis of that
grouping. If our explanation be contested, we hope that our synthesis
of facts will remain.

Besides it is only thus, _i.e._, by creating a system, that the
sciences, exact as well as moral, are made to progress. Chemistry was
not, as some have pretended, created by Lavoisier; it was founded by
Stahl, it was not the pneumatic theory of Lavoisier, but really the
_system of phlogiston_ devised by Stahl, which instituted chemistry
in the last century. Stahl, it is well known, had the immense merit
of collecting all the facts known up to his time, into a general
theoretical explanation of composing a summary of them, and of creating
the _system of phlogiston_. This system was, undeniably, incorrect,
but the facts which had been collected towards its construction had
been perfectly well selected, and included every useful element of
information or research. Thus, when ten years later than Stahl,
came Lavoisier, he had only, so to speak, to turn the system of his
predecessor inside out, as one turns a coat. For phlogiston Lavoisier
substituted oxygen; he preserved all the facts, and changed only the
explanation. Thus chemistry was founded.

A well constructed synthesis must necessarily precede every theory
of nature. Descartes, when working out his system of whirlwinds,
formulated a conception which was certainly very inexact; but the facts
upon which this theory rested were so well selected, they responded
so exactly to the requirements of science, that when Newton came,
with his _system of attraction_, it only remained to apply the new
hypothesis to the facts collected by Descartes for his _whirlwinds_,
and there was real astronomy, the true physics. When Linnæus created
his _system of botany_, he made an undeniably artificial distribution
of the vegetables, and Linnæus himself perfectly understood the defects
of his system. But, owing to this artificial method, he succeeded in
grouping all the plants into a methodical catalogue. If the principle
of classification was bad, the service rendered to botany by this
catalogue was immense. It was not, in fact, until after Linnæus' time
that the immense mass of facts which he collected could be put in
order, and the study of the vegetable world made to progress from those
data. Botany dates from the publication of the _systema naturæ_ of the
immortal botanist of Upsal.

We do not pretend to put forward an irreproachable theory of the
universe in this work, but simply to collect together and methodically
group the facts upon which such a theory ought to rest, facts physical,
metaphysical, and moral.


FOOTNOTES:

[18] "_La Pluralité des existences de l'âme_," Paris, p. 450.

[19] "_La Religion des Hindous selon les Védas_," par Lanjuinais,
Paris, p. 286.

[20] "_La Religion des Hindous selon les Védas_," pp. 324, 325.

[21] "_Histoires_," Vol. II. ch. cxxiii. (translated by M. Larcher.)




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE NINETEENTH.

SEQUEL TO OBJECTIONS.--IT IS INCOMPREHENSIBLE HOW THE RAYS OF THE
SUN, BEING MATERIAL SUBSTANCES, CAN BE THE GERMS OF SOULS, WHICH ARE
IMMATERIAL SUBSTANCES.


OUR system of nature may be met with the following final objection.
It will be said, how can the rays of the sun, being material bodies,
convey animated germs which are immaterial substances? These terms
exclude each other.

We find, in the Scriptures, a magnificent comparison, of which we shall
avail ourselves in order to answer this objection, or rather, this
question.

Saint Matthew speaks of a grain of mustard seed, that is to say, of a
tree germ, which, cast into the earth, produces a herbaceous plant,
then a tree with majestic branches, and he is astonished to behold the
imposing lord of the forests, which, laden with flowers and fruit,
towers aloft in majestic beauty, and gives shelter under its shadow
to the weary birds, springing from a humble little seed. Not only,
says the evangelist, is there no resemblance between the tree and its
original seed, but there does not exist in the tree a single atom of
the matter of which the seed was primarily composed.

To our mind, this grain of mustard-seed is an image of the sun, which,
falling upon the earth, sows animated germs in its bosom, which produce
plants that afterwards give birth to animals, and later still to man,
and thus to the entire series of creatures, invisible to us, which
succeed him in the domain of the heavens.

The little cold, colourless, scentless seed is nothing to look at,
nothing distinguishes it apparently from the neighbouring dust.
Nevertheless, it contains that mysterious leaven, that sacred being,
so to speak, which we call a germ. And what wonderful things are to
be born from that sacred being! In the obscurity of the cold, damp
earth the germ transforms itself, it becomes a new body without any
resemblance to the seed which contained it. It produces a plantlet, a
subterranean, but perfectly organized creature, possessing a root which
fastens itself into the soil, and a stalk which takes the opposite
direction. Between the two portions lies the seed, split, gutted,
having allowed the germ to escape, its part in the matter ended.

The subterranean plantlet is a new being; it has no longer anything
in common with the seed from whence it came. The plantlet is dull and
colourless, but it breathes, it has channels, in which liquids and
gases are circulating.

In a little while the plantlet comes up above the earth, it greets the
daylight, it appears to our eyes, and then it is a very different being
from the subterranean creature. The new-born vegetable is no longer as
it was when in the bosom of the earth, dull and grey; it is green, it
breathes like other vegetables, producing oxygen under the influence
of life, whereas in the bosom of the earth it gave out carbonic acid.
Instead of the dull and sombre subterranean plantlet, you have a green
and tender shoot, provided with special organs. Where is the grain of
mustard seed?

Presently our shoot grows, and becomes a young plant. It is still
weak and hidden under the grass, but nevertheless the young plant has
its complete individuality. It resembles neither the shoot nor the
plantlet, its subterranean ancestor.

The shoot grows, and becomes a twig, that is to say, the adolescent
of the vegetable kingdom, with the ardour and the energy of the young
among herbaceous creatures.

In this state the plant has already renewed its substance several
times, and nothing remains of the organic and mineral elements which
existed in the different beings that have preceded it on the same
little corner of the earth which have witnessed the changing phases
of its curious metamorphoses. Wait a while, and you will see the twig
growing long and large. Its respiration becomes active, its leaves
spread out, and vigorously exhale the carbonic acid gas of the air.
The exhalation of watery vapour over all the surface takes place, and
a young and vigorous tree is there, which day by day grows more robust
and more beautiful.

During this growth, during this transition from the shrub to the young
tree, with a separate and upright stem, a new being has been formed.
Organs which it had not have come to it, and have made it a separate
individual. It has flowers, it has branches, it has new vessels for
the circulation of the sap, and the juices which were not previously
elaborated. The structure of the surface of its leaves has been
changed, so that absorption may be more successfully accomplished.

Where is the shoot, from which our vigorous young shrub sprung? What
relation, what resemblance is there between these two beings? We can
only discern differences. One individual has succeeded to another
individual. The vegetable has been renewed, not only in matter, which
is changed, but in the form of its organs. A series of new forms have
succeeded each other in the shrub, since it was a simple shoot, just
peeping above the soil.

It is still the history of change, when the young tree has become
adult, when, in the progress of years, its trunk has grown hard, and
become incrusted with layers of accumulated bark, when its branches
have multiplied, and flowering and fruitage have modified all its
internal and external parts. It is then a grand cedar tree, whose
majestic and imposing shade covers a considerable extent of the soil;
or a superb oak, whose robust and gnarled branches spread far and wide;
or a flexible chestnut, which flings about its polished and shining
arms. The organs of these luxuriant vegetables, the pride of our
forests, have no relation to those which belonged to them in the first
years of their life. Their flowery crowns in spring-tide, the fruits
which succeed to them, the seeds shut up in the protecting shelter of
those fruits, these are all peculiarities of organization, belonging to
these noble trees, without any analogy in nature.

Where is the grain of mustard seed which formerly sucked the juice of
the earth in darkness? Everything is changed; the place of habitation,
which is no longer the earth, but the air; the form, and the
physiological functions. Not only has all this changed, but it has
changed a great number of times. Not only does nothing remain of the
matter of which the tree was composed in the earlier stages of its
life, but nothing has been retained of the organic forms which were
proper to the infancy of the vegetable.

Nevertheless, O great mystery of Nature, in the midst of all these
changes, notwithstanding this continual succession of beings, which
mutually replace each other, there is something which remains
immovable, which has never changed, which has preserved a constant
individuality,--it is the secret force which produced all these
changes, which presided over all these organic mutations. In our
belief, this force is the animated germ which the young plant has
received from the seed, whence it has proceeded. In the midst of all
the transformations which the vegetable creature has undergone, in
spite of the numerous phases through which it has passed, and which
have produced a series of different beings succeeding each other in its
material substance, the spiritual principle, cause and agent of all
this long activity, has remained the same. This animated germ which now
exists in the adult vegetable is the same which was there during its
growth, the same which was there when it was a shoot, the same which
slept in the seed which was thrown into the bosom of the cold and humid
earth. In that majestic tree which, coming forth from an imperceptibly
minute seed, has had a whole genealogy of successive beings, replacing
each other, differing in form and size, and has preserved, throughout
its incessant development, the sole and immutable principle of
its activity, we behold the faithful image of the persistent,
indestructible soul, in the midst of the beings or different bodies
which it has animated in succession. Issuing from a germ, it has never
ceased to grow, to develop, to become amplified, still remaining itself.

The grain of mustard seed, or the seed of the tree, is according to
us, the plant or inferior animal into which the sun has thrown the
animated germ. The subterranean plantlet corresponds to the animal
whose mission it is to perfect the germ transmitted by the plant, and
which develops and amplifies this germ; for example, to the fish or the
reptile, perfecting the spiritual principle which they have received
from the zoophyte or the mollusc. The shoot which, having burst out
of the earth, grows in the shade of the grass, and tries its air
organs, corresponds to the animal somewhat more elevated in the organic
scale, such as the bird, in which the animating principle--derived
from the reptile or the fish--increases in intellectual power. The
young vegetable, arrived at the condition of the twig, which lives a
completely aërial life, corresponds to the mammifer. The tree, grown
tall, and pushing out its young boughs, corresponds to man, perfecting
the soul which he has received from a mammifer. Finally, the powerful
and vigorous forest lord, over-topping all the neighbouring trees in
size and majesty, with mighty girth of stem, and noble crest, with
wide-spreading branches and splendid flowers, this grand creature
corresponds to the superhuman being who lives in the bosom of the
ethereal fluid, and who is himself destined to be replaced by a series
of superior creatures, who shall climb from stage to stage, from
height to height, even to the radiant kingdom of the sun, where those
absolutely spiritual beings, whose essence is entire and perfect
immateriality are enthroned.

Thus, the animating principle remains immutable and identical with
itself, during all the transformations undergone by the beings who
are successively charged to receive this precious deposit. From the
vegetable, in which it had its first domicile as a germ, and through
the whole series of living creatures, from the plant and the zoophyte
to the man and the superhuman being, the same spiritual principle is
preserved in its identity, perfecting and amplifying itself without
cessation.

Let us complete the comparison. When the forest tree has ripened its
fruits, the fruits burst open, the seeds escape from it, and fall into
the soil, or are dispersed by the caprice of the winds. If the seeds
fall into damp earth, they germinate, and, according to the laws of
nature, young vegetables are produced, as we have previously explained.
Multitudes of similar vegetables are produced by a single oak, a single
cedar, a single chestnut tree. Just as the majestic adult tree lets
fall from its thousand branches upon the soil the countless seeds
which are to germinate there, so the spiritualized beings who dwell in
the sun shed their emanations, their _animated germs_, upon all the
planets. These germs, carried to the earth by the sunbeams, and falling
upon our globe, produce the vegetables which afterwards give birth to
the various animals, by the effect of the successive transmigrations of
the same soul into the bodies of these creatures.

We can now reply to the objection which we have placed at the
beginning of this chapter: "How can the solar rays, being material
substances, convey animated germs, which are immaterial substances?"

When the physicists professed Newton's theory of the nature of light,
in the theory of _emission_, it was necessary to regard light, and,
consequently the solar rays, which produce it, as material bodies.

But science has now rejected this theory, and replaced it by the
theory of _undulation_, founded by Malus, Fresnel, Ampère, and all
the constellation of great physicists and mathematicians of the
commencement of this century. Facts, collected on every side, prove
that the solar rays are not matter which transports itself from the
sun to the earth, but that light, like heat, results from a primitive
disturbance produced by the sun upon the ether, which is spread
over all space. This disturbance communicates itself from molecule
to molecule, from the planetary ether down to us, and produces the
phenomena of light and heat. We cannot here develop at greater length,
or explain more scientifically, the theory of undulations, which will
be found sufficiently demonstrated in works on physics. We merely
desire to prove that, according to the principles of modern science,
the solar rays are not material bodies, but that they result from a
simple vibration of the planetary ether. If, then, the rays of the sun
are not material substances, there can be no difficulty in admitting
that these rays (immaterial substance) are the bearers of the animated
germs, which are immaterial substance.

If we be driven to a closer definition of the problem, if we be
asked to explain with greater precision how these immaterial germs
journey through space, we reply that we must guard against the mania
for insisting on everything being explained. Absolute explanation is
forbidden to the limit of our intelligence. We are forced to confess
our powerlessness whenever we try to explain the phenomena of nature
rigorously. What is the true cause of the fall of bodies, of the
gravitation of the stars, of electricity, of heat? What is the cause
of the circulation of our blood, of the beating of our hearts? The
deepest obscurity veils the primary causes of these phenomena, which
we all behold every day; and the more earnestly we desire to penetrate
the secret essence, the more the darkness deepens in our minds. Since
the time of Newton, the physicists have laid down a wise and excellent
principle. They have agreed to study the laws of physical phenomena
with sedulous care, to measure with exactness the effects of heat,
weight, electricity, or light, but, also, never to disquiet themselves
by researches into the causes of these phenomena. The more we learn,
the further we advance in the knowledge of the universe and its laws,
the more we become convinced that man knows absolutely nothing about
first causes, that he ought to esteem himself happy in knowing the
laws according to which the effects of these first causes manifest
themselves; that is to say, the physical and vital actions which are
visible to us, but that he ought, in the interests of his own peace of
mind, to lay down a rule that he would never seek to know the wherefore
of things. Pliny, speaking of first causes, said: "_Latent in majestate
mundi_," ("They are hidden in the majesty of the world.") The thought
is as fine as the phrase is eloquent. Let us, then, leave to nature her
secrets, and, if we are led to believe that the sun sheds animated
germs upon the earth and the planets, let us not try to penetrate
further into the essence of this mysterious phenomenon. Let us not
ask of the earth why she turns, the stone why it falls, the tree why
it grows, our hearts why they beat--nor the rays of the sun why they
produce life on earth, and immortality in the heavens.

[Illustration]




[Illustration]

CHAPTER THE TWENTIETH.

PRACTICAL RULES RESULTING FROM THE FACTS AND PRINCIPLES DEVELOPED IN
THIS WORK.--THE ENNOBLING OF THE SOUL BY THE PRACTICE OF VIRTUE, BY
SEEKING TO KNOW, THROUGH SCIENCE, NATURE AND ITS LAWS.--THE RENDERING
OF PUBLIC WORSHIP TO THE DIVINITY.--THE MEMORY OF THE DEAD TO BE
RETAINED.--WE OUGHT NOT TO FEAR DEATH.--DEATH IS ONLY AN UNFELT
TRANSITION FROM ONE STATE TO ANOTHER, IT IS NOT A TERMINATION, BUT A
METAMORPHOSIS.--THE IMPRESSIONS OF THE DYING.--THEY WHOM THE GODS LOVE
DIE YOUNG.--REUNION WITH THOSE WHO HAVE GONE BEFORE.


WE will conclude our work by laying down certain practical rules which
result from the facts and the principles that have been explained in
its course.

Since man can raise himself to the range of a superhuman being only
when his soul has acquired the necessary degree of purification in this
life, it is evidently his interest to apply himself to the culture of
his soul, to preserve it from every stain, to keep it from falling. Be
good, generous, and compassionate; grateful for benefits, accessible to
the suffering, the friend of the oppressed. Console those who suffer
and who weep. Practise every form of charity. Endeavour to raise
your thoughts above terrestrial things. Strive against those material
instincts, which are the stigmata of human existence. Aspire to the
good and the beautiful. Live in the most elevated spheres, those which
are the least bound to lower things. It is only thus that you can
elevate and ennoble your soul, and render it fit to enjoy the higher
existence which awaits it in the ethereal spheres. For, if your soul
be vicious and corrupt, if, during all your terrestrial life, you
have been sunk in material interests, exclusively given up to purely
physical occupations and enjoyments, which make you the fellow of
the animals; if your heart has been hard, your conscience dumb, your
instincts low and evil, you will be condemned to recommence a second
existence on the earth. Once, or many times again you will have to
bear the burthen of life on this disinherited globe, where physical
suffering and moral evil have taken up their abode, where happiness is
unknown, and unhappiness is the universal law.

There is another motive for our careful cultivation of the faculties of
the soul, and for our constantly purifying ourselves by the practice of
good. Noble and generous persons, elect souls, are, as we have said,
the only ones capable of communicating with the dead, with the beloved
beings whom they have lost. If, therefore, we be stained with moral
evil, we shall not receive any communication, any succour from the
beings who have left us, and whom we loved. This is a powerful motive
for our constant striving towards perfection.

One of the most effectual means of perfecting and ennobling the soul,
of raising it above terrestrial conditions, and bringing it near
the higher spheres, is science. Study, labour to learn of nature, to
comprehend the plans and the phenomena which surround you, to explain
to yourselves the universe of which you form a portion, and your soul
will grow in strength and wisdom. It is very sad to contemplate the
shameful ignorance in which almost all humanity is sunk. The population
of our globe numbers 1,300,000,000, and of all this multitude hardly
10,000,000 can be said to have studied the sciences, and really
cultivated their minds. All the rest of mankind are abandoned to an
intellectual passiveness, which almost reduces them to the level of
the animals. The earth is but a vast field of ignorance. As far as
knowledge is concerned, almost all men die as they were born, they have
not added a single idea, a single branch of knowledge to those which
their parents--themselves ignorant--have inculcated in their youth.
Nevertheless, thanks to the labours of some few men of uncommon mind
and energy, the knowledge we possess at the present time is immense, we
have made great progress in the study of nature and its laws.

We understand the mechanism and the regulation of the universe, we
have learned to reject the fallacious testimony of our senses, we have
discerned the courses of the different stars, which look so much alike,
when they shine in the firmament by night. We know that the sun is
motionless in the centre of our world, and that a company of planets,
among which the earth figures, revolve around him, in an orbit whose
mathematical curve has been precisely fixed. We know the cause of the
days and nights, as well as that of the seasons; we can predict almost
to a second the return of the stars to a certain point of their orbit,
their meetings, eclipses, and occultations. The globe which we inhabit
has been surveyed and explored with care which has hardly missed a nook
of it. We know the causes of the winds and of the rains, we can point
out the exact course of the sea-currents, and foretell the hour and
the height of the tides all over the globe. We know why glaciers exist
at the northern and southern extremities of the earth, and why other
glaciers crown the great mountain heights. The movements of the earth,
which formerly produced chains of mountains, and which at present
occasion volcanic eruptions and earthquakes, are quite comprehensible
to us. The composition of all the bodies which exist on the surface, or
are hidden in the depths of the earth, has been fixed with certainty.

We know what air contains, and what water is composed of. There is
not a mineral, not a particle of earth to which we cannot assign its
composition. More than that, we can tell what is the composition of
the soil of the planets, and of their satellites, those stars which
roll at incalculable distances above our heads, and which we can reach
only with our eyes. Science has performed this miracle, the chemical
analysis of bodies which it cannot touch, and which it can only see
across millions of miles in space.

We have studied, classified, demonstrated all the living beings,
animals and plants which people the earth. There is not an insect
hidden in the grass of the fields which has not been described, which
has not had its just place in creation assigned to it; there is not
a blade of grass which has not been reproduced by the pencil of the
naturalist.

Beyond all this, science has penetrated far beyond the reach of our
vision. It has invented a marvellous instrument which has unveiled an
entire world to our astonished gaze, a world whose existence we never
should have suspected without its aid. The world thus revealed to us
is that of infinitely little things. We know that myriads of living
creatures, both animals and plants, exist in a drop of water; that
those creatures, in all their prodigious littleness, have a complete
existence, and are as well organized as those of great size which are
analogous to them, and that the physiological functions of all these
imperceptible beings are fulfilled as perfectly as our own.

Just as we have penetrated into the life of infinite littleness, so we
have pierced the depths of celestial space, and scrutinized with our
eyes the magnified image of the stars which revolve at an incalculable
distance above us. The telescope shows us the surface of the moon, the
depths of its ravines, and the rough serrated edges of its enormous
mountains, furrowed with deep circular crevasses. We can cast our eyes
over the lunar disc as if it were a distant landscape of our own globe.
We can even, thanks to the magnifying powers of the telescope, form an
idea of the aspect of the surfaces of those planets which are almost
lost in the infinite distances of the heavens.

After this faint and incomplete sketch of that which human science has
been able to accomplish, it might be supposed that every inhabitant of
the earth is impatient to make all this knowledge his own, that every
one must desire to fill his mind with its treasures. Alas! the great
majority of the human species is ignorant of even the elements of
all this. Take away the ten millions of individuals, to whom we have
already alluded, and who, numerically, are hardly to be counted in
considering the population of the globe, all people imagine that the
earth is a flat surface which extends to the limits of the horizon, and
is covered with a blue cupola, called _heaven_. If you assert that the
earth revolves, they laugh, and point to the motionless earth, and the
sun which _rises_ on the right hand and _sets_ on the left, a manifest
proof that the sun comes and goes. The poets will have it that the sun
rises from his bed in the morning, and returns to it in the evening.
People believe that the stars which shine by night, in the celestial
vault, are simply ornaments, an agreeable spectacle, made to please our
eyes, and that the moon is a beacon. Nobody inquires into the causes
of the rain or fine weather, of heat or cold, of the winds or the
tides. Every one shuts his eyes to natural phenomena, so as to avoid
the trouble of explaining them. Nature is a shut book for the majority
of mankind, who live in the midst of the most curious and various
phenomena, but who occupy themselves in eating and drinking, and trying
to harm their fellows.

It is a sorrowful spectacle to behold humanity thus preoccupied by
its more material necessities, and utterly without interest in any
mental exertion, and one grieves to think that such is the condition
of almost all the inhabitants of the globe. How far is he superior to
the great mass of his fellows, who has cultivated his mind, enriched
it with various and useful ideas, and appropriated to himself at least
one branch of the varied tree of the exact sciences. What breadth and
power must be acquired by a mind thus fortified! Strive, O my reader,
to study and to learn. Initiate yourself into the secrets of nature,
try to understand all that surrounds you, the universe and its infinite
productions, admire the power of God in learning the wonders of His
works. Then shall you not approach the tomb with your soul void as on
the day of your birth. At the supreme hour of death you will be wise,
instructed, and, finding yourself nearer to the sublime essence of
superhuman beings, you will be eager to follow them into the ethereal
spheres.

In order to elevate and perfect the soul, it is not sufficient only
to apply ourselves to the practice of moral virtues and to learning;
we must also endeavour to understand God, the Author of the universe.
Therefore, let men enter into the temples, and prostrate themselves
before God according to the forms and rites of worship in which they
have been reared. All religions are good, and ought to be respected,
because they permit us to pay the homage of gratitude and heartfelt
submission to the Author of nature.

The Christian religion is good, because it is a religion. The religion
of Mahomet is good, because it is a religion. For the same reason
Buddhism and Judaism are good, and the religion of the wild Indians who
worship the sun in the depths of their forests.

The fourth practical rule which we derive from the principles and
theories which we have laid down, is that the remembrance and
commemoration of the dead should be preserved. Let us not efface from
our hearts the memory of those whom death has snatched from us. To
forget them is to cause them the most cruel anguish, and to deprive
ourselves of the aid and guidance which they can give us here below.

The ancients sedulously kept up the memory of the dead. They did not
put the idea of death away from them with terror, like the modern
peoples; on the contrary, they loved to invoke it. Among the Greeks and
Romans the cemeteries were places of meeting, used for festivals and
promenades. The Orientals of our days preserve this ancient tradition.
Their cemeteries are perfectly kept gardens, whither festive crowds
resort on festal occasions. They visit the relatives and friends who
are buried in the shrubberies and the flower-beds, and revel in the
pleasures of life amid the pretty dwelling-places of the dead.

In Europe we know nothing of this wholesome philosophy. But we may
remark, that peasants, unlike dwellers in cities, who are not brought
into familiar daily contact with nature, are far from shunning the idea
of death, or avoiding the cemeteries where their relatives and friends
rest. They recall the remembrance of their dead, they speak to them,
they question them, they consult them, as though they were still seated
by the family fireside.

The custom of funeral repasts, which dates from the time of primitive
man, is still observed in several countries. On returning from the
cemetery the company seat themselves before a well-spread table, in
the house of the deceased, and wish him a happy journey to the land
of shadows. In our cities, it is "_the people_" who hold it a duty
to carry flowers to the graves of their relatives. Among the higher
classes of society people hold themselves exempt, in general, from
this pious care, and they are wrong. Piety towards the dead, and
reverent commemoration of them, are prescribed by the laws of nature.

Finally, we would impress upon the reader, as a consequence and a
practical rule resulting from all that has gone before, that he ought
not to fear death. Let him regard with firm heart and tranquil eye that
moment which all men dread so much. We have said that death is not a
conclusion, but a change, we do not perish, we are transformed. The
grub which seems to die, enclosed within a cold shell, does not die,
but is born again, a brilliant butterfly, to flutter joyously in the
air. Thus it shall be with us. Though our miserable frames remain on
earth, and restore their elements to the common reservoir of universal
matter, our souls shall not perish. They shall be born again, brilliant
creatures of the celestial ether. They shall leave a world in which
pain and evil are the constant law, for a blessed domain where every
condition of happiness shall be realized. Why, then, should we dread
death? If we do not desire it, we ought at least to await it with
hope and tranquillity. Death must unite us to those beings whom we
have loved, whom we do love, and whom we shall love for ever. What an
immense source of consolation during the remainder of our life! What a
store of courage for the terrible moment of our own end! The beloved
dead, who have never ceased to be present to our memory, have done us
the sad, supreme service of softening the anguish of death to us. The
sadness of our last moments will be calmed by the thought that they
are awaiting our coming, that they are ready to receive us on the
threshold of the other life, that they are gone before to lead us into
the new domain of existence beyond the tomb!

The fear of death, which is so prevalent among men generally, loses
its intensity when the last hour has come. Those who are accustomed to
witness death know that the last agony is rarely severe. He who dies
after a long and honourable existence knows at that solemn moment that
he is going to a new and better world. He is happy, and his words and
looks express happiness. The only thought which makes him sorrowful is
the grief which his loss must occasion to those whom he loves and is
about to leave.

The observations which follow have been made by persons accustomed to
observe the dying. But deaths occasioned by maladies which destroy
consciousness, or reason, or speech, must not be included in these
observations. In order to judge of the thoughts which occupy the dying
we must consider those who preserve the integrity of their intellectual
faculties until their latest breath. They always die calmly.
Consumptive patients, the wounded, those who die from an affection
of the stomach or of the intestinal tube, of those slow fevers which
consume the strength without impairing the intellectual faculties,
these generally remain in the full possession of their intelligence to
the last, and die with great tranquillity, even satisfaction. In almost
all these cases death is preceded by a gradual decline of strength and
sensation, so that the individual has hardly any consciousness of the
change he is about to undergo, and looks forward to the moment of death
with perfect indifference.

There is a period, which frequently lasts for several hours, during
which, life having completely left the body, it is already a corpse
which is under the eyes of the spectators, and yet that corpse still
moves and speaks. But the soul which survives in the body, really dead,
is not the soul of the terrestrial man, but of the superhuman being.
The dying person has the consciousness, and perhaps even the prevision
of the ineffable happiness which awaits him in that new world upon
whose threshold he is standing, and he expresses his happiness by his
words and looks. In a sigh of supreme joy he exhales his last breath.
This extraordinary state, in which the dying are partly on earth,
and partly in the new world to which they are destined, explains the
touching eloquence, the sublime words which sometimes come from their
feeble lips. An uneducated poor man will express himself upon his
death-bed with eloquence incomprehensible to those who are listening
to him. It also explains the prophecies, justified by subsequent
events, which have been uttered by the dying. They have a knowledge of
things of which, in their ordinary condition as belonging to the human
species, they could not possibly have had any notion. Therefore, we
ought to treasure up their last words with pious care, and scrupulously
fulfil the wishes which they express.

In Moldavia, when a peasant has escaped death in a severe illness,
after having been on the brink of the grave, his friends press around
his bed to ask him what he had seen in the other world, and what news
he has for them from their dead relatives. Then the poor invalid
interprets his visions for them as well as he can.

A modern writer, who has left some small books on spiritualist
philosophy, M. Constant Savy, relates in his "_Pensées et
Méditations_," an extraordinary dream which he had when he was,
apparently, at the point of death. We transcribe this curious and
interesting document from M. Pezzani's work:--

    "I felt very ill," writes Constant Savy, "I had no strength, it
    seemed to me that my life was making efforts to resist death, but
    in vain, and that it was about to escape. My soul detached itself
    little by little from the matter spread all over my frame; I felt
    it retiring from all those parts with which it is so intimately
    united, and, as it were, concentrating itself upon one single
    point, the heart, and a thousand obscure, cloudy thoughts about my
    future life occupied me. Little by little nature faded from before
    me, taking irregular and strange forms, I almost lost the faculty
    of thinking, I only retained that of feeling, and this feeling was
    all love, love of God and of the beings whom I had most cherished
    in Him; but I could not manifest this love; my soul, withdrawn to
    one single point in my body, had almost ceased to have any relation
    with it, and could no longer command it. My soul experienced some
    distractions still, caused by the pain of the body, and the grief
    of those who surrounded me, but these distractions were slight,
    like the pains and the perceptions which caused them. My life was
    now attached to matter by one only of the thousand links which had
    formerly bound it, and I was about to expire.

    "Suddenly, no doubt to mark the passage from this life to the
    other, there came a thick darkness, to which succeeded a brilliant
    light. Then, O my God! I saw Thy day, that daylight I had so much
    desired! I saw them, all assembled together, those beings whom I
    had so dearly loved, who had inspired me during my life in this
    world after they had left me, and who had seemed to me to dwell
    in my soul, or float about me. They were all there, full of joy
    and happiness. They were waiting for me, they welcomed me with
    delight. It seemed to me that I completed their life and that they
    completed mine! But what a difference was there in the happiness I
    now felt from the sensations of the world I left! I cannot describe
    them! They were penetrating without being impetuous; they were
    mild, calm, full, unmixed, and yet they admitted the hope of a yet
    greater happiness!

    "I did not see Thee, my God! Who can see Thee? But I loved Thee
    more than I had loved Thee in this world! I comprehended Thee
    better, felt Thee more strongly, the traces of Thee which are
    everywhere, and on everything, appeared more plain and bright to
    me, I experienced such admiration and astonishment as I had never
    hitherto known, I saw more distinctly a portion of the wonders of
    Thy creation. The bowels of the earth hid no more secrets from me,
    I saw their depths, I saw the insects and other creatures which
    dwell in them, the mines known to men, and undiscovered by them,
    the secret ways and channels of the earth. I reckoned its age in
    its bosom as one counts that of a tree in the heart of its trunk;
    I saw all the water-courses which feed the seas; I saw the reflux
    of these waters, and it was like the motion of the blood in a man's
    body; from the heart to the extremities, from the extremities to
    the heart; I saw the depths of the volcanoes; I understood the
    motions of the earth and its relations with the stars, and, just
    as if the earth had been turned round before my eyes that I might
    be made to admire Thy greatness, O my God! I saw all countries
    with their various inhabitants, and their different customs, I saw
    every variety of my species, and a voice said to me: 'Like thyself,
    all these men are the image of the Creator; like thyself, they are
    ever journeying towards God, and conscious of their progress!' The
    thickness of the forests, the depth of the seas could not hide
    anything from my eyes; I had power to see everything, to admire
    all, and I was happy in my happiness, in the happiness of the
    dear objects of my tender love. Our joys were in common. We felt
    ourselves united by our former affections which had now become
    much more deep, and by the love of God: we drew happiness from one
    and the same source; we were but one, we each and all enjoyed this
    happiness, which was far too great to be expressed. I am silent
    now, that I may feel it more deeply."[22]

It is easy for us to verify to ourselves the fact that men who
are condemned by nature to a premature death, are endowed with a
great serenity of mind. This moral condition is, in our opinion, an
indication that they have the presentiment or even the anticipated
possession of the new life which awaits them after death. Why are
consumptive people so gentle and sensitive? We believe it is because,
being already half out of this world, they are partially endowed with
the moral attributes of superhuman beings. They are, as it is well
known, always confident in their destinies, they make projects of
happiness, and for the future, when their last hour is striking, they
feel hope and joy when the by-standers are thinking of their burial.
It is customary to explain this anomaly by saying that persons in
consumption do not understand the gravity of their illness, but we
believe that they have, on the contrary, a confused notion of their
state, that nature reveals to them the approach of an existence of
cloudless happiness, and that it is this secret conviction which gives
them hope and confidence in the future. The future which they foresee
is not of this world, but the future of the heavens. This applies not
to consumptive persons only. Every man destined to die young seems
to be marked with that inner stamp of the soul which lends him now a
gentle and charming melancholy, anon vivacity or sensibility which his
parents admire, and which is too often only an indication that he is
not to remain with them. The charming qualities of many young people
are often only the precursors of their death.

"When they have so much intellect, children have brief lives," says
Casimir Delavigne. "Whom the gods love, die young," said the Greeks.

Let us, then, not fear death; but await it, not as the end of our
existence, but as its transformation. Let us learn by the purity of
our life, by our virtues, by the culture of our faculties, by our
knowledge, by the exercise of the religion of our ancestors, to prepare
ourselves for the critical moment of that natural revolution which
shall usher us into a blessed sojourn in the ethereal spheres on the
day after death.

[Illustration]


FOOTNOTES:

[22] Quoted by M. Pezzani, in his "_Pluralité des Existences de
l'âme_," pp. 261-263.




[Illustration]

EPILOGUE.

IN WHICH WE SEEK FOR GOD, AND IN OUR SEARCH, DESCRIBE THE UNIVERSE.


THE author now asks his reader's leave to relate a conversation which
took place between himself, and a friend named Theophilus, to whom
he had confided the manuscript of "The Day After Death," in order to
obtain his opinion and impressions of the work. He will allow the
interlocutors to express themselves in the ordinary form of dialogue.

_Theophilus_, (who comes into the Author's study, and lays the
manuscript upon the table). I have read your work, and I will tell you
presently my impressions of the details, but I must in the first place
point out the great deficiency of the book.

_The Author._ What is wanting in it?

_Theophilus._ God.

_The Author._ But----

_Theophilus._ (Interrupts him.) You are going to remind me that you
frequently mention the sacred name, that Providence, the Author of
nature, the Creator of the worlds, and so on, are words you constantly
employ. That is true, but it is equally true that you restrict yourself
to these vague expressions, that you say nothing about the person of
God, that you assign to Him no place in the world which you range over
in company with more or less spiritualized souls. Why this reserve?
Since you tell us that entirely spiritualized souls inhabit the sun,
why do you not tell us where your system places God, the sovereign
master of those souls! What is your motive for leaving aside a question
of such great importance?

_The Author._ I have several. In the first place, I have everybody's
motive. The idea of God which must be formed in order to place Him in
harmony with the boundless immensity of this universe which is His
work, so far surpasses the limit of the human intellect, it is so
overwhelming to our mind, that we stop, powerless and even frightened
at our boldness, when we venture to ask ourselves, _what is God?_

_Theophilus._ Nevertheless, I am surprised at your hesitation. When a
system of the universe is to be constructed, one does not pause in the
task, and I can hardly believe that when you venture, as you do, to
place on the ladder-steps of your theory all the elements of the solar
world--the planets and their satellites, stars and asteroïds, plants,
men and animals, creatures visible and invisible, bodies and souls,
matter and spirit--you have not assigned a place to the Creator. Have
you classified everything in this immense edifice of the worlds, except
its Sovereign Architect?

_The Author._ No, my friend, you are not mistaken; God has His place in
my system.

_Theophilus._ Why, then, have you not said so! Why have you kept
silence on this point?

_The Author._ My book contains so many daring assertions, I have
already exposed myself so fully to the animosity of both the learned
and the ignorant, that I feared to furnish an additional pretext to
their diatribes.

_Theophilus._ That is not a reason. If you dread discussion and fear
detraction, why do you take up your pen at all? You were at liberty to
keep your ideas on the origin and the destiny of man to yourself, but,
when you decided on submitting them to the public, you became bound to
explain all your mind on the subject. If you believe in your system,
you must explain it without any reserve.

_The Author._ Your words are wise, and I ought therefore to bow to
them, and follow your imperative advice. Nevertheless I cannot make up
my mind to do so, absolutely. I am going to propose a middle course
to you. In confidence, and between ourselves, I will explain my ideas
about God to you, I will tell you in what part of the immense universe
I place this dazzling personality. If the idea seems to you absurd,
untenable, or even too hazardous, you will frankly tell me so, and thus
duly warned, I will keep my theory to myself; if not----

_Theophilus._ (Interrupting him.) An excellent plan. There can be no
objection to that. Go on, I am listening.

(At this point, Theophilus seats himself, his elbow resting on a
book, and a cigar in his mouth, and composes himself to listen, with
an expression of grave attention, dashed with suspicious severity,
suitable to the arbitrator in a literary and philosophical matter.)

_The Author._ You want to know, my dear Theophilus, where I place God?
I place Him at the centre of the universe, or, I had better say, at
the central focus, which must exist somewhere, of all the stars which
compose the universe, and which, carried along by a common motion,
circulate in concert around this central focus.

_Theophilus._ Forgive me, but I do not seize your meaning exactly.

_The Author._ You will understand it presently. Remember, to start
from, that I place God at the common focus of the actual motion of
the entire universe. But, where is the common focus? In order to know
that, we must first of all know the universe, and all the order of its
movements.

_Theophilus._ All that is explained in the course of your work.

_The Author._ No, my friend, you are mistaken. In my work I have spoken
of the solar system only, and a very incomplete and insufficient idea
would be gained of the universe by contemplating that system alone.
We must not, as is too often done, confound the _world_ and the
_universe_. The _world_ is our world, that is to say, the solar system,
of which we form a part; the _universe_ is the agglomeration of all
the worlds or systems similar to our world, or solar system. In the
manuscript which you have just read, I have only been able to expound
one little corner, one insignificant fraction of the universe.

_Theophilus._ You call the solar world a little corner.

_The Author._ Yes. Our whole solar system, the sun, with its immense
following of planets and asteroïds, with the satellites of those
planets, with the comets which from time to time come sweeping on, to
fall into the burning furnace of the radiant star, all that, compared
with the universe, is no more than an ear of corn in a huge granary,
than a grain of sand upon the shore, than a drop of water in the ocean.
The terrible vastness of the universe is such that it is absolutely
inaccessible to our measurement, and it is for us the image of the
infinite, or the infinite itself. Now, my friend, attend to me. Most
certainly God, as to His nature, is absolutely inconceivable by our
minds. His essence escapes us, and always must escape us. We can
only affirm that He is infinite in His moral perfections, and in His
intellectual power. But if, on the one hand, God is _The Infinite_
in the moral order, and if, on the other hand, the universe is _The
Infinite_ in the physical order; if one is _The Infinite_ in spirit,
and the other is _The Infinite_ in extent, these two ideas, although
in themselves inaccessible to human intelligence, are nevertheless of
the same order, and may be regarded in contiguity. It is then possible,
without laying one's self open to the charge of presumption or
absurdity, to place the Infinite, which is called God, in the Infinite
which is called the Universe, in other words, to locate the person of
God at the common focus of the worlds which compose the Universe.

_Theophilus._ Your reasoning is just. But you must prove, or, if you
prefer the phrase, you must teach me that the universe is truly _The
Infinite_ by its extent. I could not admit that assertion without very
convincing evidence.

_The Author._ Very well. Lend me your best attention, and excuse me if
my demonstration resembles a lecture on astronomy. I have said that our
solar system is only a little corner of the universe. When you look at
the vault of the sky on a bright clear night, you see it thickly strewn
with stars, which, you will at once acknowledge, it would be impossible
to count. But all that you see with the naked eye is next to nothing.
Take a good telescope, and direct it to any part of the sky. There
where a moment before you saw nothing, you will now discern legions
of stars, bright spots will come out upon the darkness of space, like
diamonds upon the velvet lining of a casket, each of them a star,
exactly like those which we see at night in the sky. And now, let me
ask you, do you know what a star is?

_Theophilus._ Yes, I know from your manuscript, and I had already
known, that the stars which we see by night, but which the greater
light of the sun hides from us in the day-time, are self-luminous orbs,
each the centre of attraction and the lamp to the particular world it
lights, and which revolves around it. As a whole company of planets,
satellites, asteroïds, and comets revolve round our sun, receiving
heat, motion, and light from that great central orb, so, the stars
dispersed throughout space, communicate motion and activity to a vast
aggregate of planets and satellites. These planets, which revolve round
the stars, constitute _stellar worlds_, analogous to our solar world.
We cannot see the planets, which accompany these stars, by reason of
their smallness, and the prodigious distance between us and them,
beyond the reach of the most powerful telescopes; we only see the suns
which govern them, _i.e._, the stars. But the existence of the fixed
stars, like our sun, implies the existence of planets revolving around
them.

_The Author._ Perfectly correct. Thus, our solar world is not unique,
it is only one member of the family of stellar worlds, which resemble
our world in the disposition and the motions of the stars within them.
The universe is composed of the agglomeration of them all. You know
all this, but there is one fact which, as it is the result of recent
discoveries, you may not be aware of; it is, the great variety of
disposition or of physical aspect presented by certain stars, in which
a kind of overturn of that which constitutes nature on our globe has
taken place. While they remain similar to our world in the order of
their movements, certain stars differ widely in the forces which govern
nature in them.

_Theophilus._ Pray explain your meaning.

_The Author._ While our solar system is governed by a single central
star, there are stellar systems which are governed by two, three,
and even four suns. It is evident that worlds which have two or
three centres of light and heat must present physical and mechanical
peculiarities of which we have no idea. There are also other
differences proper to many of the stellar worlds. The light of our sun
and of the greater number of the stars is constant: it never undergoes
either augmentation or diminution. But this is not the case with
many of those distant suns which we call stars. We see their light
alternately fade and revive; sometimes they shine brightly, then become
almost imperceptible, and anon brilliant again. Some of them become
altogether extinct. The decrease in lustre of several stars has been
noted by different astronomers.[23]

Stars which have been observed in other times no longer exist.[24]
Others have suddenly appeared, shone with excessive lustre, and at the
end of some years have been seen no more.

These successive augmentations and diminutions of luminous brilliance
are not uncommon in the stars with which we are acquainted. According
to M. Flammarion,[25] star ο of the _Whale_ varies very much in
luminous intensity and the constellation itself frequently disappears.
Star χ of the _Swan_ passes from the fifth to the tenth size under
our eyes, the thirtieth star of the _Hydra_, which is of the fourth
size, almost always disappears at intervals of 500 days. These
variations must, as M. Flammarion observes, produce strange results.
To-day, the radiant star is shedding floods of light and fire upon the
planets which it governs, and the soul of that planet is warmed by
its burning rays. A few months later, without the least cloud in the
sky, the shining of the sun becomes fainter, and then, by degrees, the
obscurity increases, until at length the planet is plunged into thick
darkness. When the diminution of the light of the sun is periodical,
this universal night lasts for a fixed time, at the end of which the
light returns, if not, the darkness is dispersed after varying periods.
The light grows, little by little, until at length the radiant star
reappears in all its primitive brightness. The fine days, the glorious
light returns, until the moment when the same fading recommences and
the darkness sets in once more.

Can we picture to ourselves the strange alterations which nature
undergoes in regions which are subjected to torrid heat and glacial
cold by turns? I am convinced that the _glacial period_ which
geologists have defined in the history of our globe, during which an
extraordinary and sudden lowering of the temperature caused the death
of multitudes of living beings, and covered Europe with glaciers from
the mountains--was caused by a momentary weakening of the intensity
of the sun's light. When it resumed its ordinary brightness, the sun
dispersed the ice which had covered the earth with a death mantle.[26]

I have said that there are double stars, that is to say, worlds
illuminated by two suns, and sometimes even by three or four. It is a
strange fact that in almost every instance one of these suns is white,
like ours, but the second is coloured, blue, red, or green. In the
constellation _Perseus_ for example, a double star can be distinctly
seen by the aid of a good telescope. The star η is in fact accompanied
by a second, which makes part of the same solar system. Now, this
second star is blue. In the constellation _Ophiochus_ there is a
similar system of double stars, one of which is red and the other blue.
The same peculiarity exists in the constellation of the _Dragon_. In a
double star of the constellation of the _Bull_, there is a red sun, and
a blue sun. There are double solar systems red and blue; such are the
constellations _Hercules_ and _Cassiopœia_. Other double solar systems
are yellow and green, and sometimes yellow and blue. In all the worlds
which are illuminated by these coloured suns, the effect of light must
be very strange. No painter could represent them, and indeed we, who
know only the white light of our own sun, cannot form any idea of them.

_Theophilus._ These features of the stellar worlds are very
interesting, and I am glad to learn them. But are we not straying from
our subject?

_The Author._ No. After having made you understand that the solar
system which we inhabit is only a member of an immense family of other
solar worlds, only a small fraction of the universe, I wished to show
you by the diversity of those worlds, the facility with which nature
varies the forces and the physical conditions proper to the stellar
worlds, and consequently the living and inanimate types which make a
portion of these different stellar worlds. Now that you understand the
prodigious diversity of the solar worlds which compose the universe,
I will go on to our principal object. I have not lost sight of my
intention of proving to you that the universe has no limits, that in
its extent it is really the Infinite. I am now approaching this great
question. By the consideration of the stars, I am going to bring out
into relief the immeasurable vastness of the universe. Let me speak,
first, of the appalling distances which separate the stars from the
earth, and the figures will show you that on that side we fall into
the Infinite, and then I will speak of the numbers of the stars which
people space; and on this side also the abyss of the Infinite will yawn
before us. First, as to the distances which separate the stars from the
earth, from whence we may logically infer the distances which separate
these stars from one another. The distance between the earth and the
sun is 38,000,000 leagues, and this shall be our unit, our standard of
measurement, by which to estimate the distance of the stars.

I do not know, my dear Theophilus, whether you have formed an exact
idea of this extent of 38,000,000 leagues, which lie between us and
the sun. In general, we can only conceive prodigious distances such
as astronomy deals with, by representing them by the interval of time
which certain movable bodies known to us would consume in traversing
them. Let us then have recourse to comparisons of this kind. A
cannon-ball weighing 12 kilogrammes, exploded by 6 kilogrammes of
powder, proceeding at a uniform rate of 500 metres a second, would take
10 years to travel from the earth to the sun.

Supposing sound to travel at the same rate as on the surface of the
air, and at a uniform rate, it would take 15 years to accomplish this
journey. If a railway were laid through space between the earth and
the sun, a train travelling at express speed, 12½ leagues an hour,
would not arrive at its destination until the end of 338 years. This
imaginary train, if dispatched from the earth in January, 1872, would
arrive at the sun in the year 2210. The light from the sun, which
travels 77,000 leagues in a second, takes 7 minutes 13 seconds to reach
the earth.

_Theophilus._ The distance between the earth and the sun is, then,
38,000,000 miles--that is our unit of measurement for the distances of
the stars. Now let us hear about these distances.

_The Author._ I will deal first with those stars which are nearest to
us. One of these is a star in the constellation of the _Swan_. This
star is distant from the earth 551,000 times our unit of measurement,
that is to say, that we must multiply 551,000 times the distance of
the earth from the sun to represent the distance of the star which we
are considering, and yet it is one of the nearest to the earth. If we
wish to represent this distance by the time occupied in the transit of
light, supposing this light to travel, like that of our sun, 77,000
leagues a second, it would take 9½ years to travel from the star to us.

Now, if you wish to know the distance of other stars, and remember that
I only speak of the nearest, look at this table, which I found in an
astronomical treatise:

DISTANCE OF CERTAIN STARS FROM THE EARTH.

  _Names of the         _Distances from      _Time of transit
     Stars._              the Earth._            of light._

  α Of the Swan          551,000 times     9 years and a half.
  α Of the Lyre        1,330,700          21 years.
  α Of the Great Dog   1,375,000          22 years.
  α Of the Great Bear  1,550,800          25 years.
      Polar Star       3,678,000          50 years.

Thus, the star α of the Lyre is distant from us more than 1,330,000
times as far as the earth is from the sun, and its light takes 21 years
to reach us. If, by any celestial catastrophe, star α of the Lyre were
to disappear, to be annihilated, we should still see it for 21 years,
as its light takes that time to reach us.

_Theophilus._ It is then possible that our astronomers are now
observing stars which no longer exist, and are only visible to us
because the light which they omitted is still travelling towards the
earth.

_The Author._ Just so. But to continue. I have begun with the stars
which are nearest to the earth. There are the stars of first and second
magnitude. You know, I suppose, the signification of those terms first,
second, and third magnitude in astronomy?

_Theophilus._ Yes, I know that the word magnitude is only applied to
the luminous appearance of the star, and not to its real bulk. A star
of the first magnitude is one which forms part of the group of the most
luminous stars; a star of the second magnitude is one which comes next
in point of brilliancy.

_The Author._ You must bear in mind that the word _magnitude_
signifies in astronomy the opposite of that which it expresses. The
more luminous a star appears to us, the nearer it is to us; the paler
and less visible, the farther it is away. The brilliance diminishes
in proportion as the figure increases. This is an introversion of
terms, sufficiently exceptional to be taken note of, and it ought
to be remembered, for fear of mistakes. Hitherto we have considered
only stars of the first and second magnitudes. Those of the third,
fourth, fifth, and sixth, lead us to the contemplation of such immense
distances, that the unit which we have adopted, enormous as it is,
is no longer of use. The instruments of celestial observation which
may be applied to the examination and measurement of stars of the
first and second magnitudes, do not serve for stars of the third and
following magnitudes, and, because the small visible diameter of those
stars make them appear mere specks of light, measuring instruments
are equally inapplicable to them. In estimating the distances of the
stars after the third magnitude, a method of comparison, based on the
amplifying power of the telescopes successively used, is employed. I
cannot enter into details of this method, which we owe to Sir William
Herschel, but must content myself with explaining its results, which
are as follows in the case of stars of the sixth magnitude. From
certain stars of that class, light would take 1042 years to reach us:
from others it would take 2700. After the sixth magnitude, the stars
can only be discerned by the aid of the telescope, and their distances
become perfectly stupefying in immensity. Certain of these telescopic
stars are so far from the earth, that their light can only reach us in
5000, and even 10,000 years after it leaves the luminous centre. From
the stars of the last category (fourteenth magnitude), light would take
100,000 years to reach the earth, supposing it to travel at the same
rate as the light of our sun, _i.e._, 77,000 leagues per second.

_Theophilus._ But, if we are to accept the results of the labours of
recent naturalists, man exists on the earth only within 100,000 years,
and some of those stars may have been extinct during all that time,
so that the human race may have been contemplating stars no longer
in being for 100,000 years. To what strange consequences does such a
science lead us!

_The Author._ Yes, the luminous rays which these stars send us from the
deepest depths of space may perhaps be emanations from solar systems no
longer in existence. The present shows us only the past. There may be
stars so profoundly lost in immensity, that their light has not yet had
time to reach us. They exist, but we cannot see them, not because the
telescope could not discover them, but because thousands of centuries
are required for the journey of their luminous rays to our earth,
and those thousands of centuries have not yet elapsed; so that this
grand spectacle is reserved, in that awfully remote future, for our
descendants.

And now, my friend, will you not acknowledge with me, that the
universe, considered merely by the distances which separate us from the
stars, and the stars from each other, is truly the Infinite?

_Theophilus._ Yes, it is the Infinite which unfolds itself before my
eyes. Let me breathe a moment.

_The Author._ If we contemplate the number of the stars, we shall also
have the perspective of the Infinite. It is easy to reckon those of the
first magnitude, _i.e._, the nearest to us. They are 20. Those of the
second magnitude are 65; of the third, 170. The number of the stars
increases as their visibility diminishes, in a very rapid proportion.
The number of stars of each class of visibility, in apparent magnitude,
is three times greater than that of the stars of the preceding class.
There are 500 stars of the fourth, 1500 of the fifth, 4500 of the sixth
magnitudes. The stars visible by the naked eye are 6000 in number.
A practised eye can succeed in counting the 6000 stars in the two
hemispheres.

[Illustration: Fig. 6.--A Corner of the Constellation of Gemini.]

But the telescope enables us to push the numbering of the suns much
farther: it opens up to us the depths of the heavens. Instead of the
small number of stars which our eyes can see, it shows us a myriad
of others, so thickly thronged together that they seem to cover the
sky with fine silver sand. Here, for instance (fig. 6), is the aspect
which one corner of the constellation of Gemini presents to the naked
eye. And here is the same portion of the sky seen by the telescope.
By the aid of this wonderful instrument stars of the thirteenth and
fourteenth magnitudes have been distinguished. The number of stars of
the twelfth magnitude is 9,556,000, which, joined to the number of the
same stars proper to the preceding categories, gives a total of more
than 14,000,000. In the third magnitude, a total number of 42,000,000
of stars is counted. Thus, reckoning those visible to the naked eye,
and by the telescope, we have 56,000,000 of suns, and we stop at this
number only because the telescope does not enable us to see smaller
stars than those of the fourteenth magnitude. But, let the telescope be
brought to greater perfection, and the whole region of the sky will be
seen to be covered with this silver sand, with this diamond dust, of
which each grain is a sun. And such will be the accumulation of these
suns, in the depths of space, that nothing will be seen on the field of
the telescope but a luminous network, formed by the agglomeration of
the suns, which will appear to touch each other.

[Illustration: Fig. 7.--A Corner of the Constellation of Gemini, seen
through the telescope.]

_Theophilus._ The Infinite is beginning again. Let me shut my eyes.

_The Author._ Wait, I have not said all, I have only begun. I am
coming to the nebulæ. Here, indeed, you may expect to grow giddy.
The telescope has dispersed all the theories on which the different
explanations of the nebulæ were built, and has shown us that they
are collections of stars, which, in consequence of their excessive
number, and their closeness to each other, appear to form a whole, a
single vague and continuous brightness. But, when their dimensions
and distances are amplified by the telescope, this diffused light
transforms itself into a brilliant point, analogous to that presented
by the sky, tapestried with small stars, in the same telescope. These
nebulæ are groups of enormous numbers of stars, and even their nearness
to each other is only in appearance. They are, in reality, separated by
enormous distances, and it must not be supposed that they are all in
the same plane; they belong, on the contrary, to very unequal depths in
space, and it is only an optical effect which gathers them together on
the field of the telescope in the same apparent plane.

The nebula of the _Centaur_ is one of the most wonderful. To the naked
eye it is but a dimly-lighted point in the sky; but, looked at through
a good telescope, it takes the aspect represented by figure 8.

[Illustration: Fig. 8.--The Nebula of the Centaur.]

On examination of this figure, it will be seen that a nebula is not
the result of a collection of stars simply spread out upon a level in
space, but of that of an assemblage of stars all placed at unequal
distances, and forming almost a sphere. In fact the stars are crowded
towards the centre, and are, on the contrary, more and more distant
from one another as the outer edge is approached. If a spherical
assemblage of stars were observed from a distance, it would present
a similar aspect. This leads us to believe that the nebula of the
_Centaur_, like the greater number of agglomerations of this kind, is
spherical.

Is it possible to reckon the stars which form a nebula? Only
approximately. Arago estimates the number of stars which form a nebula
no larger than the tenth part of the apparent disc of the moon, at
twenty thousand, at least. This result may give us an idea of the
swarms of suns contained in the nebulæ, for these stellar masses
are very numerous in the sky. In the depths of the nebulæ there are
luminous points whose nature is as yet unrevealed by the telescope,
which cannot be resolved into stars; but analogy leads us to believe
that they are other and still more distant nebulæ, which, by reason of
their apparent littleness, elude the scope of our instruments. But the
time will come, when, thanks to the perfection which our telescopes
shall have attained, this theory will be confirmed, and we shall thus
see deeper and farther into immensity.

The stars which form the nebulæ are sometimes grouped so as to form
regular shapes, spheres, or more or less lengthened ellipses. Sometimes
the sphere is hollow in the centre, and so forms a ring. Nothing more
varied, nothing more strange can be imagined than the forms of those
nebulæ which have hitherto been examined, and which already number more
than a million, of which no two are precisely alike. Certain nebulæ
seem to be double, or joined. Others are lengthened out, like serpents,
as in that of the _Shield of Sobieski_, represented in figure 9.

Lord Rosse was the first to discover that curious disposition of the
nebulæ called _spiral_.

Such a form is inexplicable, but it is certain that the suns which
compose the nebulæ are often grouped, not around a centre, not in
shapeless heaps, but in regular curves, on a system which seems to
reveal the existence of some mysterious force acting upon those stars,
which are distributed along lines representing spirals of different
diameter.

[Illustration: Fig. 9.--The Shield of Sobieski.]

In speaking of the stars, I have said that there are coloured stars or
suns. I will add here that nebulæ are observed coloured red, green, and
yellow, which is an additional proof that they are only agglomerations
of stars. That immense semi-luminous band which traverses the celestial
vault, girding it with a silver belt, is not, as it was long supposed
to be, a diffused quantity of luminous matter. The telescopic analysis
of the Milky Way shows that it consists of a long series of nebulæ.
The length of the Milky Way is from 700 to 800 times the distance from
Sirius to the sun, a distance which is 1,373,000 times that from the
earth to the sun.[27]

_Theophilus._ Can any idea be formed of the number of stars comprised
in the Milky Way?

[Illustration: Fig. 10.--The Milky Way.]

_The Author._ Herschel, having examined the sky of the southern
hemisphere from the Cape of Good Hope, in applying his observations
to the whole extent of the Milky Way, estimated the number of suns
comprised in that immense nebulæ at 18 millions. I have just told you
the length of the Milky Way. A ray of light emitted from a star at one
of its extremities, and reaching the other, would take 15,000 years
to accomplish the transit. So that, when we are looking through the
telescope at one of the suns of this nebula, we receive the impression
of a ray of light emitted from that star 7000 or 8000 years ago,
_i.e._, long before the dawn of the historic ages.[28] The measurement
of the Milky Way enables us therefore to measure the extent of other
nebulæ, still more distant from us. There are, as I have already said,
masses of diffused light in the midst of nebulæ which telescopic
analysis has resolved into stars, which are probably much more distant
nebulæ. The real distance of these luminous masses can be fixed. If it
were asked, to what distance the Milky Way should be removed in order
to offer us the aspect of an ordinary nebula, Arago would answer that
according to his researches, the Milky Way ought to be removed to a
distance equal to 334 times its length. According to this the Milky
Way would be seen from the earth at an angle of 10°, and its light
would take 5,010,000 years to travel that distance. Thus, light would
take _more than five millions of years_ to travel from one of the
telescopic nebulæ to our earth. Such are the intervals which exist in
the universe, and which our instruments can appreciate. It seems to me
that we are now on the borders of the Infinite.

_Theophilus._ We are indeed.

_The Author._ When we know that those terrible distances, which appal
the imagination, are only the results of observations made by our
telescopes, and capable of any amount of extension; when we reflect
that the innumerable worlds thus revealed to us continue farther and
farther, that ever new agglomerations of suns, planetary earths and
their satellites add themselves to those which we can measure, without
limit and without end, that the imagination cannot err in following
them to the uttermost limits of its powers; then, my dear Theophilus,
we comprehend that the universe is truly infinite. And if you consider
that these endless ranks of solar systems have all their following of
planets and satellites, filled with living beings, plants, animals,
men, and superhuman creatures, that flaming comets traverse the orbit
of each world at intervals and plunge into the burning furnace of its
sun; that these milliards of suns are endlessly various, and that all
the complicated motions of these different systems are accomplished
with perfect order, without any mutual disturbance, you will find that
the universe is not only the infinite in extent, but, also in order,
harmony, equilibrium of motion, and laws!

_Theophilus._ The mind loses itself in such thoughts; for the idea of
the infinite is not made for our feeble intelligence. Let us go no
farther, or our reason will fail us.

_The Author._ Nevertheless, I must pursue my long argument to the
end. I must add that in the midst of this boundless space, above this
immense cortége of stars, which are the dwelling places of living
creatures and sentient souls, there exists the Supreme Author, the
Sovereign Ordainer, from Whom, as their sacred source, all that our
eyes behold, our souls feel, and our intelligence admires, is derived.
He, whom I bless with all the gratitude of my heart--God!

_Theophilus._ Thus, then, you have reached the true object of your
discourse. This journey through space is undertaken to prove that God,
being infinite in moral perfections, may be placed in that infinitude
in extent, called the universe. It only remains now to say in what
precise spot you place the sojourn of the Divinity, for I do not see
how there can be a centre to the Infinite, seeing it has neither
beginning nor end.

_The Author._ I am about to explain myself on this point. The absolute
fixity of the sun and the stars was an astronomical principle, which,
in the time of Newton, appeared to be indubitable. But science never
stands still. Observations made in the present century have proved that
the fixity, the immobility of the sun is only relative. The truth is
that the sun, and with him the entire system of planets, asteroïds,
satellites, and comets, which he carries, in his train, change their
places, very slightly no doubt, but still appreciably. Our sun appears
to advance slowly, with all the planetary family, towards that part of
the sky in which the constellation of _Hercules_ is situated, at the
rate of 62,000,000 of leagues each year, or two leagues each second,
describing an orbit which comprehends millions of centuries. That which
is the case with our sun is equally the case with the other suns, that
is to say, the stars. This general motion of translation must be common
to all the stellar systems, and it is indubitable that the countless
millions of solar systems suspended in infinite space, are moving more
or less quickly towards an unknown point in the sky. Now, there is
nothing to forbid the supposition that all these circles or ellipses
traced by myriads of solar systems, have a common centre of attraction,
towards which our system and all the others gravitate. Thus, all these
celestial bodies, without exception, all this ant-hill of worlds which
we have enumerated, may be turning round one point, one centre of
attraction. What forbids us to believe that God dwells at this centre
of attraction for all the worlds which fill infinite space?

_Theophilus._ Now I understand your thought, and I am struck by its
grandeur. This God, placed at the mathematical centre of the worlds
which compose the universe, this infinite intelligence, throned in the
centre of the infinite universe, and presiding over the movements of
all the innumerable phalanxes of heavenly bodies which our imagination
can conceive, responds to the idea which we form of God, if we venture
to face the awful personality of His Omnipotence. You have done well
to develop this theory in your work. It will be in harmony with the
kind of religious spirit which animates it, and which is, besides, the
expression of the desires, and the aspirations of the men of our time.

In the present day a deep and profound need of belief in Providence
makes itself felt. Men want to render homage to God, in whom they feel
there is truth, peace, and safety for the present and in the future.
But the established religions leave many minds in cruel uncertainty. In
"The Day after Death" you have endeavoured to lay the foundations of
_the religion of science and of nature_. These principles respond, as
I believe, to the prevalent wishes of mankind. They satisfy the mind
and the heart, sentiment and reason; they console and strengthen; in
short, they consecrate the idea of God, without laying aside either the
universe or nature.

_The Author._ So be it!


THE END.


BILLING AND SONS, LTD., PRINTERS, GUILDFORD


FOOTNOTES:

[23] Arago. "_Astronomie Populaire_," Vol. I., pp. 372-376.

[24] Arago. "_Astronomie Populaire_," Vol. I., pp. 376-380.

[25] Flammarion. "_Pluralité des Mondes habités_," page 195.

[26] See the Author's work: "_The Earth before the Deluge_," pp.
402-440.

[27] Flammarion. "_Pluralité des Mondes Habités_," page 203.

[28] Flammarion. "_Pluralité des Mondes Habités_," page 203.




MACMILLAN'S LIBRARY OF ENGLISH CLASSICS

EDITED BY A. W. POLLARD.

A Series of Reprints of Standard Works in Library Form.

_Demy 8vo. Cloth elegant. Price 3s. 6d. net per volume. Also in
Roxburgh Binding. Specially suitable for Presentation. Green Morocco
Backs, Cloth Sides, and Gilt Tops. Price 5s. net per volume._

  =BACON'S ESSAYS: Colours of Good and Evil; and Advancement of
   Learning=                                                      1 vol.

  =SHERIDAN'S PLAYS=                                              1 vol.

  =MALORY'S MORTE D'ARTHUR=                                      2 vols.

  =STERNE'S TRISTRAM SHANDY and SENTIMENTAL JOURNEY=             2 vols.

  =BOSWELL'S LIFE OF JOHNSON=                                    3 vols.

  =CARLYLE'S FRENCH REVOLUTION=                                  2 vols.

  =FIELDING'S TOM JONES=                                         2 vols.

  =WHITE'S NATURAL HISTORY OF SELBORNE=                           1 vol.

  =TRAVELS OF SIR JOHN MANDEVILLE, with Illustrative Narratives from
  Hakluyt=                                                        1 vol.

  =LOCKHART'S LIFE OF SCOTT=                                     5 vols.

  =DON QUIXOTE, Translated by SHELTON=                           3 vols.

  =WALTON'S LIVES and COMPLETE ANGLER=                            1 vol.

  =DE QUINCEY'S CONFESSIONS OF AN ENGLISH OPIUM-EATER; Murder as a Fine
  Art; The English Mail Coach, and other Essays=                  1 vol.

  =CARLYLE'S SARTOR RESARTUS and HEROES AND HERO-WORSHIP=         1 vol.

  =SELECT WORKS OF OLIVER GOLDSMITH (The Vicar of Wakefield, The Plays,
  and Poems)=                                                     1 vol.

  =HAZLITT'S CHARACTERS OF SHAKESPEARE'S PLAYS and LECTURES ON THE
  ENGLISH POETS=                                                  1 vol.

  =MILTON'S POETICAL WORKS=                                      2 vols.


MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.




=English Men of Letters.=

EDITED BY JOHN MORLEY.

_Popular Edition. Crown 8vo. Paper covers, 1s. each. Cloth, 1s. 6d.
each._

LIBRARY EDITION. UNIFORM WITH THE NEW SERIES.

_Crown 8vo. Gilt tops. Flat backs. 2s. net each._


=ADDISON. By W. J. COURTHOPE.

=BACON.= By Dean CHURCH.

=BENTLEY.= By Sir RICHARD JEBB.

=BUNYAN.= By J. A. FROUDE.

=BURKE.= By JOHN MORLEY.

=BURNS.= By Principal SHAIRP.

=BYRON.= By Professor NICHOL.

=CARLYLE.= By Professor NICHOL.

=CHAUCER.= By Dr. A. W. WARD.

=COLERIDGE.= By H. D. TRAILL.

=COWPER.= By GOLDWIN SMITH.

=DEFOE.= By W. MINTO.

=DE QUINCEY.= By Professor MASSON.

=DICKENS.= By Dr. A. W. WARD.

=DRYDEN.= By Professor SAINTSBURY.

=FIELDING.= By AUSTIN DOBSON.

=GIBBON.= By J. C. MORRISON.

=GOLDSMITH.= By W. BLACK.

=GRAY.= By EDMUND GOSSE.

=HAWTHORNE.= By HENRY JAMES.

=HUME.= By Professor HUXLEY, F.R.S.

=JOHNSON.= By Sir LESLIE STEPHEN, K.C.B.

=KEATS.= By SIDNEY COLVIN.

=LAMB, CHARLES.= By Canon AINGER.

=LANDOR.= By SIDNEY COLVIN.

=LOCKE.= By THOMAS FOWLER.

=MACAULAY.= By J. C. MORRISON.

=MILTON.= By MARK PATTISON.

=POPE.= By Sir LESLIE STEPHEN, K.C.B.

=SCOTT.= By R. H. HUTTON.

=SHELLEY.= By J. A. SYMONDS.

=SHERIDAN.= By Mrs. OLIPHANT.

=SIDNEY.= By J. A. SYMONDS.

=SOUTHEY.= By Professor DOWDEN.

=SPENSER.= By Dean CHURCH.

=STERNE.= By H. D. TRAILL.

=SWIFT.= By Sir LESLIE STEPHEN, K.C.B.

=THACKERAY.= By ANTHONY TROLLOPE.

=WORDSWORTH.= By F. W. H. MYERS.


MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.




=English Men of Letters.=

NEW SERIES.

_Crown 8vo. Gilt tops. Flat backs. 2s. net each._


=GEORGE ELIOT.= By Sir LESLIE STEPHEN, K.C.B.

=HAZLITT.= By AUGUSTINE BIRRELL, K.C.

=MATTHEW ARNOLD.= By HERBERT W. PAUL.

=RUSKIN.= By FREDERIC HARRISON.

=TENNYSON.= By Sir ALFRED LYALL.

=RICHARDSON.= By AUSTIN DOBSON.

=BROWNING.= By G. K. CHESTERTON.

=CRABBE.= By ALFRED AINGER.

=FANNY BURNEY.= By AUSTIN DOBSON.

=JEREMY TAYLOR.= By EDMUND GOSSE.

=DANTE GABRIEL ROSSETTI.= By A. C. BENSON.

=HOBBES.= By Sir LESLIE STEPHEN, K.C.B.

=MARIA EDGEWORTH.= By the Hon. EMILY LAWLESS.

=ADAM SMITH.= By FRANCIS W. HIRST.

=JANE AUSTEN.= By the Rev. CANON BEECHING.

=SYDNEY SMITH.= By GEORGE W. E. RUSSELL.

=ANDREW MARVELL.= By AUGUSTINE BIRRELL, K.C.

=MRS. GASKELL.= By CLEMENT SHORTER.

=THOMAS MOORE.= By STEPHEN GWYNN.

=CHARLES KINGSLEY.= By G. K. CHESTERTON.

=SHAKESPEARE.= By WALTER RALEIGH.




=English Men of Action Series.=

Crown 8vo. Cloth. With Portraits. 2s. 6d. each.


=CAMPBELL (Colin).= By ARCHIBALD FORBES.

=CLIVE.= By Sir CHARLES WILSON.

=COOK (Captain).= By Sir WALTER BESANT.

=DAMPIER.= By W. CLARK RUSSELL.

=DRAKE.= By JULIAN CORBETT.

=DUNDONALD.= By the Hon. J. W. FORTESCUE.

=GORDON (General).= By Sir W. BUTLER.

=HASTINGS (Warren).= By Sir A. LYALL.

=HAVELOCK (Sir Henry).= By A. FORBES.

=HENRY V.= By the Rev. A. J. CHURCH.

=LAWRENCE (Lord).= By Sir RICHARD TEMPLE.

=LIVINGSTONE.= By THOMAS HUGHES.

=MONK.= By JULIAN CORBETT.

=MONTROSE.= By MOWBRAY MORRIS.

=NAPIER (Sir Charles).= By Colonel Sir W. BUTLER.

=NELSON.= By Professor J. K. LAUGHTON.

=PETERBOROUGH.= By W. STEBBING.

=RODNEY.= By DAVID HANNAY.

=STRAFFORD.= By H. D. TRAILL.

=WARWICK, the King-Maker.= By C. W. OMAN.

=WELLINGTON.= By GEORGE HOOPER.

=WOLFE.= By A. G. BRADLEY.


=Twelve English Statesmen.=

Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. each.

⁂ _A Series of Short Biographies, not designed to be a complete roll of
famous Statesmen, but to present in historic order the lives and work
of those leading actors in our affairs who by their direct influence
have left an abiding mark on the policy, the institutions, and the
position of Great Britain among States._

=WILLIAM THE CONQUEROR.= By EDWARD A. FREEMAN, D.C.L., LL.D., late
Regius Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford.

=HENRY II.= By Mrs. J. R. GREEN.

=EDWARD I.= By T. F. TOUT, M.A., Professor of History, The Owens
College, Manchester.

=HENRY VII.= By JAMES GAIRDNER.

=CARDINAL WOLSEY.= By Bishop CREIGHTON, D.D., late Dixie Professor of
Ecclesiastical History in the University of Cambridge.

=ELIZABETH.= By E. S. BEESLY, M.A., Professor of Modern History,
University College, London.

=OLIVER CROMWELL.= By FREDERIC HARRISON.

=WILLIAM III.= By H. D. TRAILL.

=WALPOLE.= By JOHN MORLEY.

=CHATHAM.= [_In preparation._ By FREDERIC HARRISON.

=PITT.= By Lord ROSEBERY.

=PEEL.= By J. R. THURSFIELD, M.A., late Fellow of Jesus College, Oxford.


MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.




Transcriber's Note.

Variable spelling and hyphenation have been retained. Minor punctuation
inconsistencies have been silently repaired.

Corrections.

The first line indicates the original, the second the correction.

p. 84:

  we maintain that heat tranforms
  we maintain that heat transforms

p. 110:

  The fall of these asteriods
  The fall of these asteroids

p. 112:

  it has been calculated that a dimunition
  it has been calculated that a diminution

p. 121:

  authoritative duductions of modern science.
  authoritative deductions of modern science.

p. 125:

  itself by the phemonena of dreams.
  itself by the phenomena of dreams.

p. 150:

  and the plant resumes it appearance of placid health
  and the plant resumes its appearance of placid health

p. 159:

  that they reciprocately nourish
  that they reciprocally nourish

p. 187:

  whose formidable shapes, and collossal dimensions
  whose formidable shapes, and colossal dimensions

p. 198:

  the gigantic mososaurus
  the gigantic mosasaurus

p. 205:

  and in one latitute of our globe
  and in one latitude of our globe

p. 215:

  they have not cuitivated their faculties
  they have not cultivated their faculties

p. 288:

  that He is infinite in his moral perfections, and in His intellectual
  power
  that He is infinite in His moral perfections, and in His intellectual
  power





End of Project Gutenberg's The Day After Death (New Edition), by Louis Figuier